ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
R - 2013
B.E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
I – VI SEMESTERS CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS
SEMESTER I
SL. No. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. HS6151 Technical English – I 3 1 0 4
2. MA6151 Mathematics – I 3 1 0 4
3. PH6151 Engineering Physics – I 3 0 0 3
4. CY6151 Engineering Chemistry – I 3 0 0 3
5. GE6151 Computer Programming 3 0 0 3
6. GE6152 Engineering Graphics 2 0 3 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE6161 Computer Practices Laboratory 0 0 3 2
8. GE6162 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 3 2
9. GE6163 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory - I 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 17 2 1 26
SEMESTER II
SL. No. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. HS6251 Technical English – II 3 1 0 4
2. MA6251 Mathematics – II 3 1 0 4
3. PH6251 Engineering Physics – II 3 0 0 3
4. CY6251 Engineering Chemistry – II 3 0 0 3
5. GE6252 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering 4 0 0 4
6. GE6253 Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE6261 Computer Aided Drafting and Modelling Laboratory 0 1 2 2
8. GE6262 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory - I 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 19 4 4 252
SEMESTER III
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. MA6351 Transforms and Partial Differential Equations 3 1 0 4
2. CE6306 Strength of Materials 3 1 0 4
3. ME6301 Engineering Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
4. CE6451 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery 3 0 0 3
5. ME6302 Manufacturing Technology - I 3 0 0 3
6. EE6351 Electrical Drives and Controls 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME631 Manufacturing Technology Laboratory - I 0 0 3 2
8. CE6461 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery Laboratory 0 0 3 2
9. EE6365 Electrical Engineering Laboratory 0 0 3 2
TOTAL 18 2 9 26
SEMESTER IV
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. MA6452 Statistics and Numerical Methods 3 1 0 4
2. ME6401 Kinematics of Machinery 3 0 0 3
3. ME6402 Manufacturing Technology– II 3 0 0 3
4. ME6403 Engineering Materials and Metallurgy 3 0 0 3
5. GE6351 Environmental Science and Engineering 3 0 0 3
6. ME6404 Thermal Engineering 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME641 Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–I 0 0 3 2
8. ME6412 Thermal Engineering Laboratory - I 0 0 3 2
9. CE6315 Strength of Materials Laboratory 0 0 3 2
TOTAL 18 1 9 253
SEMESTER V SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. ME6501 Computer Aided Design 3 0 0 3
2. ME6502 Heat and Mas Transfer 3 0 0 3
3. ME6503 Design of Machine Elements 3 0 0 3
4. ME6504 Metrology and Measurements 3 0 0 3
5. ME6505 Dynamics of Machines 3 0 0 3
6. GE6075 Professional Ethics in Engineering 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME651 Dynamics Laboratory 0 0 3 2
8. ME6512 Thermal Engineering Laboratory-I 0 0 3 2
9. ME6513 Metrology and Measurements Laboratory 0 0 3 2
SEMESTER VI
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. ME601 Design of Transmission Systems 3 0 0 3
2. MG6851 Principles of Management 3 0 0 3
3. ME602 Automobile Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. ME603 Finite Element Analysis 3 0 0 3
5. ME604 Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion 3 0 0 3
6. Elective - I 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME61 C.A.D. /C.A.M. Laboratory 0 0 3 2
8. ME612 Design and Fabrication Project 0 0 4 2
9. GE6563 Communication Skills - Laboratory Based 0 0 4 2
SEMESTER VI
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. ME6701 Power Plant Engineering 3 0 0 3
2. ME6702 Mechatronics 3 0 0 3
3. ME6703 Computer Integrated Manufacturing Systems 3 0 0 3
4. GE6757 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3
5. Elective – I 3 0 0 3
6. Elective – I 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME671 Simulation and Analysis Laboratory 0 0 3 2
8. ME6712 Mechatronics Laboratory 0 0 3 2
9. ME6713 Comprehension 0 0 2 1
SEMESTER VI
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. MG6863 Engineering Economics 3 0 0 3
2. Elective – IV 3 0 0 3
3. Elective – V 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
4. ME681 Project Work 0 0 12 6
TOTAL 9 0 12 15
TOTAL NUMBER OF CREDITS TO BE EARNED FOR AWARD OF THE DEGREE = 18
ELECTIVES FOR B.E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SEMESTER VI
Elective I
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. MG6072 Marketing Management 3 0 0 3
2. ME601 Quality Control and Reliability Engineering 3 0 0 3
3. ME602 Refrigeration and Air conditioning 3 0 0 3
4. ME603 Renewable Sources of Energy 3 0 0 3
5. ME604 Unconventional Machining Processes 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VI
Elective I
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. ME605 Process Planing and Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3
2. ME606 Design of Jigs, Fixtures and Press Tools 3 0 0 3
3. ME607 Composite Materials and Mechanics 3 0 0 3
4. ME608 Welding Technology 3 0 0 3
5. ME609 Energy Conservation and Management 3 0 0 3
Elective I
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. ME6010 Robotics 3 0 0 3
2. GE6081 Fundamentals of Nano-science 3 0 0 3
3. ME601 Thermal Turbo Machines 3 0 0 3
4. ME6012 Maintenance Engineering 3 0 0 3
5. EE607 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 3 0 0 35
SEMESTER-VI
Elective IV
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. IE605 Production Planing and Control 3 0 0 3
2. MG6071 Entrepreneurship Development 3 0 0 3
3. ME6013 Design of Pressure Vessels and Piping 3 0 0 3
4. ME6014 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3
5. ME6015 Operations Research 3 0 0 3
Elective V
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. ME6016 Advanced I.C. Engines 3 0 0 3
2. ME6017 Design of Heat Exchangers 3 0 0 3
3. ME6018 Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
4. ME6019 Non Destructive Testing and Materials 3 0 0 3
5. ME6020 Vibration and Noise Control 3 0 0 36
HS6151 TECHNICAL ENGLISH – I L T P C 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
1. To enable learners of Engineering and Technology develop their basic communication skills in
English.
2. To emphasize specially the development of speaking skills amongst learners of Engineering and
Technology.
3. To ensure that learners use the electronic media such as internet and supplement the learning
Listening - Introducing learners to GIE - Types of listening - Listening to audio (verbal & sounds);
Speaking - Speaking about one’s place, important festivals etc. – Introducing oneself, one’s family /
friend; Reading - Skimming a reading passage – Scanning for specifc information - Note-making;
Writing - Fre writng on any given topic (My favourite place / Hobies / Schol ife, etc.) - Sentence
completion - Autobiographical writng (writng about one’s leisure time activites, hometown, etc.);
Grammar - Prepositons - Reference words - Wh-questions - Tenses (Simple); Vocabulary - Word
formation - Word expansion (rot words / etymology); E-materials - Interactive exercises for Grammar
& Vocabulary - Reading comprehension exercises - Listening to audio files and answering questions.
UNIT I 9+3
Listening - Listening and responding to video lectures / talks; Speaking - Describing a simple process
(filing a form, etc.) - Asking and answering questions - Telephone skils – Telephone etiquete;
Reading – Critcal reading - Finding key information in a given text - Sifting facts from opinions;
Writng - Biographical writng (place, people) - Proces descriptions (general/specifc) - Definitons - Recommendations – Instructions; Grammar - Use of imperatives - Subject-verb agreement;
Vocabulary - Compound words - Word Asociation (conotation); E-materials - Interactive exercises
for Grammar and Vocabulary - Listening exercises with sample telephone conversations / lectures – Picture-based activites.
UNIT I 9+3
Listening - Listening to specifc task - focused audio tracks; Speaking - Role-play – Simulation - Group interaction - Speaking in formal situations (teachers, oficials, foreigners); Reading - Reading
and interpreting visual material; Writng - Jumbled sentences - Coherence and cohesion in writng - Chanel conversion (flowchart into proces) - Types of paragraph (cause and efect / compare and
contrast / narative / analytical) - Informal writng (leter/e-mail/blogs) - Paraphrasing; Grammar - Tenses (Past) - Use of sequence words - Adjectives; Vocabulary - Diferent forms and uses of
words, Cause and efect words; E-materials - Interactive exercises for Grammar and Vocabulary - Excerpts from films related to the theme and folow up exercises - Pictures of flow charts and tables
for interpretations.
UNIT IV 9+3
Listening - Watching videos / documentaries and responding to questions based on them; Speaking - Responding to questions - Diferent forms of interviews - Speaking at diferent types of interviews;
Reading - Making inference from the reading pasage - Predicting the content of a reading pasage;
Writng - Interpreting visual materials (line graphs, pie charts etc.) - Esay writng – Diferent types of
esays; Grammar - Adverbs – Tenses – future time reference; Vocabulary - Single word substiutes - Use of abreviations and acronyms; E-materials - Interactive exercises for Grammar and Vocabulary - Sample interviews - film scenes - dialogue writng.7
UNIT V 9+3
Listening - Listening to diferent acents, Listening to Speches/Presentations, Listening to broadcast
and telecast from Radio and TV; Speaking - Giving impromptu talks, Making presentations on given
topics; Reading - Email communication - Reading the atachment files having a poem/joke/proverb - Sending their responses through email; Writng - Creative writng, Poster making; Grammar - Direct
and indirect spech; Vocabulary - Lexical items (fixed / semi fixed expresions); E-materials -
Interactive exercises for Grammar and Vocabulary - Sending emails with atachment – Audio / video
excerpts of diferent acents - Interpreting posters.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Learners should be able to
Speak clearly, confidently, comprehensibly, and communicate with one or many listeners
using apropriate communicative strategies. Write cohesively and coherently and flawlesly avoiding grammatical erors, using a wide
vocabulary range, organizing their ideas logicaly on a topic. Read diferent genres of texts adopting various reading strategies. Listen/view and comprehend diferent spoken discourses/excerpts in diferent acents
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Department of English, Ana University. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and
Enginers. Orient Blackswan, Chenai. 2012
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and Communication Skils for Students of Science and Enginering.
Orient Blackswan, Chenai. 201
REFERENCES:
1. Raman, Menakshi & Sangetha Sharma. Technical Communication: Principles and Practice.
Oxford University Pres, New Delhi. 201.
2. Regional Instiute of English. English for Enginers. Cambridge University Pres, New Delhi.
206.
3. Rizvi, Ashraf. M. Efective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi. 205
4. Rutherford, Andrea. J Basic Communication Skils for Technology. Pearson, New Delhi. 201.
5. Viswamohan, Aysha. English for Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi.
208.
EXTENSIVE Reading (Not for Examination)
1. Kalam, Abdul. Wings of Fire. Universites Pres, Hyderabad. 199.
WEBSITES:
1. htp:/www.usingenglish.com
2. htp:/www.uefap.com
TEACHING METHODS: Lectures
Activites conducted individualy, in pairs and in groups like self introduction, per introduction,
group poster making, grammar and vocabulary games, etc. Discusions
Role play activites
Short presentations
Listening and viewing activites with folow up activites like discusion, filing up workshets,
writng exercises (using language lab wherever necesary/posible) etc.8
EVALUATION PATTERN:
Internal asesment: 20%
3 tests of which two are pen and paper tests and the other is a combination of diferent modes of
asesment like
Project Asignment Reviews
Creative writng
Poster making, etc.
Al the four skils are to be tested with equal weightage given to each.
Speaking asesment: Individual speaking activites, Pair work activites like role play,
Interview, Group discusions
Reading asesment: Reading pasages with comprehension questions graded from simple to
complex, from direct o inferential
Writng asesment: Writng paragraphs, esays etc. Writng should include grammar and
vocabulary.
Listening/Viewing asesment: Lectures, dialogues, film clipings with questions on verbal as
wel as audio/visual content.
End Semester Examination: 80%
MA6151 MATHEMATICS – I L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques this is neded by enginers for practical
aplications. To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their convergence so that
he/ she wil be familar with limitations of using infinite series aproximations for solutions arising
in mathematical modeling. To familarize the student with functions of several variables. This is neded in many branches
of enginering. To introduce the concepts of improper integrals, Gamma, Beta and Eror functions which are
neded in enginering aplications. To acquaint he student with mathematical tols neded in evaluating multiple integrals and their
usage.
UNIT I MATRICES 9+3
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of eigenvalues
and eigenvectors – Statement and aplications of Cayley-Hamilton Theorem – Diagonalization of
matrices – Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of
quadratic forms.
UNIT I SEQUENCES AND SERIES 9+3
Sequences: Definiton and examples – Series: Types and Convergence – Series of positve terms – Tests of convergence: Comparison test, Integral test and D’Alembert’s ratio test – Alternating series –
Leibnitz’s test – Series of positve and negative terms – Absolute and conditonal convergence.9
UNIT I APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3
Curvature in Cartesian co-ordinates – Centre and radius of curvature – Circle of curvature – Evolutes – Envelopes - Evolute as envelope of normals.
UNIT IV DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3
Limits and Continuity – Partial derivatives – Total derivative – Diferentiation of implicit functions –
Jacobian and properties – Taylor’s series for functions of two variables – Maxima and minima of
functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.
UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3
Double integrals in cartesian and polar cordinates – Change of order of integration – Area enclosed
by plane curves – Change of variables in double integrals – Area of a curved surface - Triple integrals – Volume of Solids.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: This course equips students to have basic knowledge and understanding in one fields of
materials, integral and diferential calculus.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “A Text bok of Enginering Mathematics”, Eighth Editon, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd., 201.
2. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Enginering Mathematics”, 41
st Editon, Khana Publications, Delhi,
201.
REFERENCES:
1. Das, H.K., and Er. Rajnish Verma,” Higher Enginering Mathematics”, S. Chand Private Ltd.,
201.
2. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Enginering Mathematics”, 3rd Editon, Pearson Education,
2012.
3. Peter V. O’Neil,” Advanced Enginering Mathematics”, 7th Editon, Cengage learning, 2012.
4. Ramana B.V, “Higher Enginering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing
Company, New Delhi, 208.
5. Sivarama Krishna Das P. and Rukmangadachari E., “Enginering Mathematics”, Volume I,
Second Editon, PEARSON Publishing, 201.
PH6151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS – I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its aplications relevant to various
streams of Enginering and Technology.
UNIT I CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9
Latice – Unit cel – Bravais latice – Latice planes – Miler indices – d spacing in cubic latice – Calculation of number of atoms per unit cel – Atomic radius – Cordination number – Packing factor
for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures – Diamond and graphite structures (qualitative treatment) - Crystal growth techniques –solution, melt (Bridgman and Czochralski) and vapour growth techniques
(qualitative)10
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER AND THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Elasticity- Hoke’s law - Relationship betwen thre moduli of elasticity (qualitative) – stres -strain
diagram – Poison’s ratio –Factors afecting elasticity –Bending moment – Depresion of a cantilever –Young’s modulus by uniform bending- I-shaped girders
Modes of heat transfer- thermal conductivity- Newton’s law of coling - Linear heat flow – Le’s disc
method – Radial heat flow – Ruber tube method – conduction through compound media (series and
paralel)
UNIT I QUANTUM PHYSICS 9
Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien’s displacement law and
Rayleigh – Jeans’ Law from Planck’s theory – Compton efect. Theory and experimental verifcation – Properties of Mater waves – G.P Thomson experiment -Schrödinger’s wave equation – Time
independent and time dependent equations – Physical signifcance of wave function – Particle in a
one dimensional box - Electron microscope - Scaning electron microscope - Transmision electron
microscope.
UNIT IV ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9
Clasifcation of Sound- decibel- Weber–Fechner law – Sabine’s formula- derivation using growth and
decay method – Absorption Coeficient and its determination –factors afecting acoustics of buildings
and their remedies.
Production of ultrasonics by magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - acoustic grating -Non
Destructive Testing – pulse echo system through transmision and reflection modes - A,B and C –
scan displays, Medical aplications - Sonogram
UNIT V PHOTONICS AND FIBRE OPTICS 9
Spontaneous and stimulated emision- Population inversion -Einstein’s A and B coeficients - derivation. Types of lasers – Nd:YAG, CO2, Semiconductor lasers (homojunction & heterojunction)-
Industrial and Medical Aplications.
Principle and propagation of light in optical fibres – Numerical aperture and Aceptance angle - Types
of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – atenuation, dispersion, bending - Fibre Optical
Communication system (Block diagram) - Active and pasive fibre sensors- Endoscope.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The students wil have knowledge on the basics of physics related to properties of mater,
optics, acoustics etc., and they wil aply these fundamental principles to solve practical
problems related to materials used for enginering aplications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arumugam M. Enginering Physics. Anuradha publishers, 2010
2. Gaur R.K. and Gupta S.L. Enginering Physics. Dhanpat Rai publishers, 209
3. Mani Naidu S. Enginering Physics, Second Editon, PEARSON Publishing, 201.
REFERENCES:
1. Searls and Zemansky. University Physics, 209
2. Mani P. Enginering Physics I. Dhanam Publications, 201
3. Marikani A. Enginering Physics. PHI Learning Pvt., India, 209
4. Palanisamy P.K. Enginering Physics. SCITECH Publications, 201
5. Rajagopal K. Enginering Physics. PHI, New Delhi, 201
6. Senthilkumar G. Enginering Physics I. VRB Publishers, 201.1
CY6151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY - I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To make the students conversant with basics of polymer chemistry. To make the student acquire sound knowledge of second law of thermodynamics and
second law based derivations of importance in enginering aplications in al disciplines. To acquaint the student with concepts of important photophysical and photochemical
proceses and spectroscopy. To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its aplications to
single and two component systems and apreciate the purpose and signifcance of aloys. To acquaint the students with the basics of nano materials, their properties and
aplications.
UNIT I POLYMER CHEMISTRY 9
Introduction: Clasifcation of polymers – Natural and synthetic; Thermoplastic and Thermoseting.
Functionality – Degre of polymerization. Types and mechanism of polymerization: Aditon (Fre
Radical, cationic and anionic); condensation and copolymerization. Properties of polymers: Tg,
Tacticity, Molecular weight – weight average, number average and polydispersity index.
Techniques of polymerization: Bulk, emulsion, solution and suspension. Preparation, properties
and uses of Nylon 6,6, and Epoxy resin.
UNIT I CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS 9
Terminology of thermodynamics - Second law: Entropy - entropy change for an ideal gas,
reversible and ireversible proceses; entropy of phase transitons; Clausius inequality. Fre
energy and work function: Helmholtz and Gibs fre energy functions (problems); Criteria of
spontaneity; Gibs-Helmholtz equation (problems); Clausius-Clapeyron equation; Maxwel
relations – Van’t Hof isotherm and isochore(problems).
UNIT I PHOTOCHEMISTRY AND SPECTROSCOPY 9
Photochemistry: Laws of photochemistry - Grothus–Draper law, Stark–Einstein law and Lambert- Ber Law. Quantum eficiency – determination- Photo proceses - Internal Conversion, Inter- system crosing, Fluorescence, Phosphorescence, Chemiluminescence and Photo-sensitzation.
Spectroscopy: Electromagnetic spectrum - Absorption of radiation – Electronic, Vibrational and
rotational transitons. UV-visible and IR spectroscopy – principles, instrumentation (Block diagram
only).
UNIT IV PHASE RULE AND ALLOYS 9
Phase rule: Introduction, definiton of terms with examples, One Component System- water system
- Reduced phase rule - Two Component Systems- clasifcation – lead-silver system, zinc- magnesium system. Aloys: Introduction- Definiton- Properties of aloys- Signifcance of aloying,
Functions and efect of aloying elements- Ferous aloys- Nichrome and Stainles stel – heat
treatment of stel; Non-ferous aloys – bras and bronze.
UNIT V NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics - distinction betwen molecules, nanoparticles and bulk materials; size-dependent
properties. Nanoparticles: nano cluster, nano rod, nanotube(CNT) and nanowire. Synthesis:
precipitation, thermolysis, hydrothermal, solvothermal, electrode positon, chemical vapour
depositon, laser ablation; Properties and aplications
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The knowledge gained on polymer chemistry, thermodynamics. spectroscopy, phase rule
and nano materials wil provide a strong platform to understand the concepts on these
subjects for further learning.12
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain P.C. and Monica Jain, “Enginering Chemistry”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P)
Ltd., New Delhi, 2010
2. Kanan P., Ravikrishnan A., “Enginering Chemistry”, Sri Krishna Hi-tech Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. Chenai, 209
REFERENCES:
1. Dara S.S, Umare S.S, “Enginering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi
2010
2. Sivasankar B., “Enginering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hil Publishing Company, Ltd., New
Delhi, 208.
3. Gowariker V.R. , Viswanathan N.V. and JayadevSredhar, “Polymer Science”, New Age
International P (Ltd.,), Chenai, 206.
4. Ozin G. A. and Arsenault A. C., “Nanochemistry: A Chemical Aproach to Nanomaterials”,
RSC Publishing, 205.
GE6151 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to: Learn the organization of a digital computer. Be exposed to the number systems. Learn to think logicaly and write pseudo code or draw flow charts for problems. Be exposed to the syntax of C. Be familar with programming in C. Learn to use arays, strings, functions, pointers, structures and unions in C.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Generation and Clasifcation of Computers- Basic Organization of a Computer –Number System – Binary – Decimal – Conversion – Problems. Ned for logical analysis and thinking – Algorithm – Pseudo code – Flow Chart.
UNIT I C PROGRAMMING BASICS 10
Problem formulation – Problem Solving - Introduction to ‘C’ programming –fundamentals – structure
of a ‘C’ program – compilation and linking proceses – Constants, Variables – Data Types – Expresions using operators in ‘C’ – Managing Input and Output operations – Decision Making and
Branching – Loping statements – solving simple scientifc and statistical problems.
UNIT I ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9
Arays – Initalization – Declaration – One dimensional and Two dimensional arays. String- String
operations – String Arays. Simple programs- sorting- searching – matrix operations.
UNIT IV FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 9
Function – definiton of function – Declaration of function – Pas by value – Pas by reference – Recursion – Pointers - Definiton – Initalization – Pointers arithmetic – Pointers and arays- Example
Problems.13
UNIT V STRUCTURES AND UNIONS 9
Introduction – ned for structure data type – structure definiton – Structure declaration – Structure
within a structure - Union - Programs using structures and Unions – Storage clases, Pre-procesor
directives.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to: Design C Programs for problems. Write and execute C programs for simple aplications.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anita Goel and Ajay Mital, “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C”, Dorling
Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education in South Asia, 201.
2. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First
Editon, Oxford University Pres, 209
3. Yashavant P. Kanetkar. “ Let Us C”, BPB Publications, 201.
REFERENCES:
1. Byron S Gotfried, “Programming with C”, Schaum’s Outlines, Second Editon, Tata McGraw- Hil, 206.
2. Dromey R.G., “How to Solve it by Computer”, Pearson Education, Fourth Reprint, 207.
3. Kernighan,B.W and Ritchie,D.M, “The C Programming language”, Second Editon, Pearson
Education, 206.
GE6152 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
2 0 3 4
OBJECTIVES: To develop in students, graphic skils for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
Enginering products. T o expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings. CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1
Importance of graphics in engine ring ap lications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specif cations – Size, layout and folding of drawing she ts – Letering and
dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREE HAND SKETCHING 5+9
Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engine ring practices: Conics – Construction of
elipse, parabola and hyperbola by ec entricity method – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves, Scales:
Construction of Diagonal and Vernier scales.
Visualization concepts and Fre Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of Thre
Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Fre hand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of
objects
UNIT I PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 5+9
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes - Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces Projection of
planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT I PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+914
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the axis is
inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method and auxilary plane method.
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF
SURFACES 5+9
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical posit on when the cut ing plane is inclined to the one of
the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section. Development of
lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones. Development of
lateral surfaces of solids with cut-outs and holes
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6 +9
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positons and miscelaneous problems. Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method .
COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING (Demonstration Only) 3
Introduction to drafting packages and demonstration of their use.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course the student wil be able to
perform fre hand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of
objects. do orthographic projection of lines and plane surfaces. draw projections and solids and development of surfaces. prepare isometric and perspective sections of simple solids. demonstrate computer aided drafting.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Bhat N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Enginering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 50th
Editon, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Enginering Drawing” (Vol. I&I combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore,
207.
2. Luzader, Waren.J. and Duf,John M., “Fundamentals of Enginering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Editon, Prentice Hal of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 205.
3. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engine ring Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Editon, 209.
4. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Enginering Graphics”, New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008. 5. Natrajan K.V., “A text bok of Engine ring Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chenai, 209.
6. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Enginering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 208.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 1071 – 201: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets. 2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 201: Technical products Documentation – Let ering. 3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 20 1 & SP 46 – 20 3: Lines for technical drawings. 4. IS 1 6 9 – 1986 & SP 46 – 203: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.15
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 201: Technical drawings – Projection Methods. Special points applicable to University Examinations on Enginering Graphics:
1. There wil be five questions, each of either or type covering al units of the syl abus. 2. Al questions wil cary equal marks of 20 each making a total of 10 . 3. The answer paper shal consist of drawing she ts of A3 size only. The
students wil be permit ed to use apropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size. 4. The examination wil be conducted in apropriate sesions on the same day
GE6161 COMPUTER PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to: Be familar with the use of Ofice software. Be exposed to presentation and visualization tols. Be exposed to problem solving techniques and flow charts. Be familar with programming in C. Learn to use Arays, strings, functions, structures and unions.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Search, generate, manipulate data using MS ofice/ Open Ofice
2. Presentation and Visualization – graphs, charts, 2D, 3D
3. Problem formulation, Problem Solving and Flowcharts
4. C Programming using Simple statements and expresions
5. Scientifc problem solving using decision making and loping.
6. Simple programming for one dimensional and two dimensional arays.
7. Solving problems using String functions
8. Programs with user defined functions – Includes Parameter Pasing
9. Program using Recursive Function and conversion from given program to flow chart.
10. Program using structures and unions.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to: Aply god programming design methods for program development. Design and implement C programs for simple aplications. Develop recursive programs.
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
Standalone desktops with C compiler 30 Nos.
(or)
Server with C compiler suporting 30 terminals or more.16
GE6162 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic enginering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Enginering.
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 9
Buildings:
(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings. Safety
aspects.
Plumbing Works:
(a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers,
elbows in household fitings.
(b) Study of pipe conections requirements for pumps and turbines.
(c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water suply and sewage works.
(d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe conections – Mixed pipe material conection – Pipe conections with diferent
joining components.
(e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
(a) Study of the joints in rofs, dors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wod work, joints by sawing, planing and cuting.
I MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Welding:
(a) Preparation of arc welding of but joints, lap joints and te joints.
(b) Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
(a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
(b) Driling Practice
Shet Metal Work:
(a) Forming & Bending:
(b) Model making – Trays, funels, etc.
(c) Diferent ype of joints.
Machine asembly practice:
(a) Study of centrifugal pump
(b) Study of air conditoner
Demonstration on:
(a) Smithy operations, upseting, swaging, seting down and bending. Example – Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.17
(b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone puley.
(c) Fiting – Exercises – Preparation of square fiting and ve – fiting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)
I ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 10
1. Residential house wirng using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wirng.
3. Stair case wirng
4. Measurement of electrical quanties – voltage, curent, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement
of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CR.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EOR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose
PCB.
5. Measurement of riple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: abilty to fabricate carpentry components and pipe conections including plumbing works. abilty to use welding equipments to join the structures. abilty to fabricate electrical and electronics circuits.
REFERENCES:
1. Jeyachandran K., Natarajan S. & Balasubramanian S., “A Primer on Enginering
Practices Laboratory”, Anuradha Publications, 207.
2. Jeyapovan T., Saravanapandian M. & Pranitha S., “Enginering Practices Lab Manual”,
Vikas Puplishing House Pvt.Ltd, 206.
3. Bawa H.S., “Workshop Practice”, Tata McGraw – Hil Publishing Company Limited, 207.
4. Rajendra Prasad A. & Sarma P.M.M.S., “Workshop Practice”, Sre Sai Publication, 202.
5. Kanaiah P. & Narayana K.L., “Manual on Workshop Practice”, Scitech Publications, 199.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
CIVIL
1. Asorted components for plumbing consisting of metalic pipes,
plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and
other fitings. 15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fited to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard wodworking tols 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial truses, dor joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tols: (a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
(b) Demoliton Hammer 2 Nos
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer 2 Nos
(e) Hand Driling Machine 2 Nos
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos18
MECHANICAL
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding both with exhaust facilty 5 Nos.
3. Welding acesories like welding shield, chiping hammer,
wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tols 2 Sets.
7. Moulding table, foundry tols 2 Sets.
8. Power Tol: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditoner One each.
ELECTRICAL
1. Asorted electrical components for house wirng 15 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Meger (250V/50V) 1 No.
5. Power Tols: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Asorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Smal PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power
suply
GE6163 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 2 1
PHYSICS LABORATORY – I
OBJECTIVES: To introduce diferent experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts aplied in
optics, thermal physics and properties of mater.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Any FIVE Experiments)
1. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of aceptance angle in an optical fiber.
2. Determination of velocity of sound and compresibilty of liquid – Ultrasonic
interferometer.
3. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Le’s Disc method.
5. Determination of Young’s modulus by Non uniform bending method
6. Determination of specifc resistance of a given coil of wire – Carey Foster’s Bridge19
OUTCOMES: The hands on exercises undergone by the students wil help them to aply physics principles
of optics and thermal physics to evaluate enginering properties of materials.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Diode laser, lycopodium powder, glas plate, optical fiber.
2. Ultrasonic interferometer
3. Spectrometer, mercury lamp, grating
4. Le’s Disc experimental set up
5. Traveling microscope, meter scale, knife edge, weights
6. Carey foster’s bridge set up
(vernier Caliper, Screw gauge, reading lens are required for most of the experiments)
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY- I
OBJECTIVES: To make the student to acquire practical skils in the determination of water quality
parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis. To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
vacometry.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Any FIVE Experiments)
1 Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
2 Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
3 Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
4 Determination of strength of acids in a mixture using conductivity meter.
5 Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer.
(1,10- phenanthroline /thiocyanate method).
6 Determination of molecular weight of polyvinylalcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
7 Conductometric tiration of strong acid vs strong base.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The students wil be outfited with hands-on knowledge in the quantiative chemical analysis of
water quality related parameters.
REFERENCES:
1. Daniel R. Paleros, “Experimental organic chemistry” John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York 201.
2. Furnis B.S. Hanaford A.J, Smith P.W.G and Tatchel A.R., “Vogel’s Textbok of practical
organic chemistry”, LBS Singapore 194.
3. Jefery G.H., Baset J., Mendham J.and Deny vogel’s R.C, “Text bok of quantiative
analysis chemical analysis”, ELBS 5th Edn. Longman, Singapore publishers, Singapore, 196.
4. Kolthof I.M., Sandel E.B. et al. “Quantiative chemical analysis”, Mcmilan, Madras 1980.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Iodine flask - 30 Nos
2. pH meter - 5 Nos
3. Conductivity meter - 5 Nos
4. Spectrophotometer - 5 Nos
5. Ostwald Viscometer - 10 Nos
Common Apparatus : Pipete, Burete, conical flask, percelain tile, dropper (each 30 Nos.)20
HS6251 TECHNICAL ENGLISH I L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To make learners acquire listening and speaking skils in both formal and informal contexts. To help them develop their reading skils by familarizing them with diferent types of reading
strategies. To equip them with writng skils neded for academic as wel as workplace contexts. To make them acquire language skils at heir own pace by using e-materials and language lab
components.
UNIT I 9+3
Listening - Listening to informal conversations and participating; Speaking - Opening a conversation
(gretings, comments on topics like weather) - Turn taking - Closing a conversation (excuses,
general wish, positve comment, thanks); Reading - Developing analytical skils, Deductive and
inductive reasoning - Extensive reading; Writng - Efective use of SMS for sending short notes and
mesages - Using ‘emoticons’ as symbols in email mesages; Grammar - Regular and iregular
verbs - Active and pasive voice; Vocabulary - Homonyms (e.g. ‘can’) - Homophones (e.g. ‘some’,
‘sum’); E-materials - Interactive exercise on Grammar and vocabulary – bloging; Language Lab - Listening to diferent ypes of conversation and answering questions.
UNIT I 9+3
Listening - Listening to situation based dialogues; Speaking - Conversation practice in real life
situations, asking for directions (using polite expresions), giving directions (using imperative
sentences), Purchasing gods from a shop, Discusing various aspects of a film (they have already
sen) or a bok (they have already read); Reading - Reading a short story or an article from
newspaper, Critcal reading, Comprehension skils; Writng - Writng a review / summary of a story /
article, Personal eter (Invitng your friend to a function, congratulating someone for his /her suces,
thanking one’s friends / relatives); Grammar - modal verbs, Purpose expresions; Vocabulary - Phrasal verbs and their meanings, Using phrasal verbs in sentences; E-materials - Interactive
exercises on Grammar and vocabulary, Extensive reading activity (reading stories / novels), Posting
reviews in blogs - Language Lab - Dialogues (Fil up exercises), Recording students’ dialogues.
UNIT I 9+3
Listening - Listening to the conversation - Understanding the structure of conversations; Speaking - Conversation skils with a sense of stres, intonation, pronunciation and meaning - Seking
information – expresing felings (afection, anger, regret, etc.); Reading - Sped reading – reading
pasages with time limit - Skimming; Writng - Minutes of meting – format and practice in the
preparation of minutes - Writng summary after reading articles from journals - Format for journal
articles – elements of technical articles (abstract, introduction, methodology, results, discusion,
conclusion, apendices, references) - Writng strategies; Grammar - Conditonal clauses - Cause
and efect expresions; Vocabulary - Words used as nouns and verbs without any change in the
speling (e.g. ‘rock’, ‘train’, ‘ring’); E-materials - Interactive exercise on Grammar and vocabulary - Sped Reading practice exercises; Language Lab - Intonation practice using EFLU and RIE materials – Atending a meting and writng minutes.
UNIT IV 9+3
Listening - Listening to a telephone conversation, Viewing model interviews (face-to-face, telephonic
and video conferencing); Speaking - Role play practice in telephone skils - listening and responding, -asking questions, -note taking – pasing on mesages, Role play and mock interview for grasping
interview skils; Reading - Reading the job advertisements and the profile of the company concerned –
scaning; Writng - Aplying for a job – cover leter - résumé preparation – vision, mision and goals
of the candidate; Grammar - Numerical expresions - Conectives (discourse markers); Vocabulary -
Idioms and their meanings – using idioms in sentences; E-materials - Interactive exercises on21
Grammar and Vocabulary - Diferent forms of résumés- Filing up a résumé / cover leter; Language
Lab - Telephonic interview – recording the responses - e-résumé writng.
UNIT V 9+3
Listening - Viewing a model group discusion and reviewing the performance of each participant -
Identifying the characteristics of a god listener; Speaking - Group discusion skils – initating the
discusion – exchanging sugestions and proposals – expresing disent/agrement – asertivenes
in expresing opinions – mind maping technique; Reading - Note making skils – making notes from
boks, or any form of writen materials - Intensive reading; Writng – Checklist - Types of reports – Feasibilty / Project report – report format – recommendations / sugestions – interpretation of data
(using charts for efective presentation); Grammar - Use of clauses; Vocabulary – Colocation; E- materials - Interactive grammar and vocabulary exercises - Sample GD - Pictures for discusion,
Interactive grammar and vocabulary exercises; Language Lab - Diferent models of group discusion.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Learners should be able to
Speak convincingly, expres their opinions clearly, initate a discusion, negotiate, argue using
apropriate communicative strategies. Write efectively and persuasively and produce diferent types of writng such as naration,
description, expositon and argument as wel as creative, critcal, analytical and evaluative
writng. Read diferent genres of texts, infer implied meanings and critcaly analyse and evaluate them
for ideas as wel as for method of presentation. Listen/view and comprehend diferent spoken excerpts critcaly and infer unspoken and
implied meanings.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Department of English, Ana University. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and
Enginers. Orient Blackswan, Chenai. 2012
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and Communication Skils for Students of Science and Enginering.
Orient Blackswan, Chenai. 201
REFERENCES:
1. Anderson, Paul V. Technical Communication: A Reader-Centered Aproach. Cengage. New
Delhi. 208
2. Muralikrishna, & Sunita Mishra. Communication Skils for Enginers. Pearson, New Delhi.
201
3. Riordan, Daniel. G. Technical Communication. Cengage Learning, New Delhi. 205
4. Sharma, Sangetha & Binod Mishra. Communication Skils for Enginers and Scientists. PHI
Learning, New Delhi. 209
5. Smith-Worthington, Darlene & Sue Jeferson. Technical Writng for Suces. Cengage, Mason
USA. 207
EXTENSIVE Reading (Not for Examination)
1. Khera, Shiv. You can Win. Macmilan, Delhi. 198.
Websites
1. htp:/www.englishclub.com
2. htp:/owl.english.purdue.edu2
TEACHING METHODS: Lectures
Activites conducted individualy, in pairs and in groups like individual writng and
presentations, group discusions, interviews, reporting, etc
Long presentations using visual aids
Listening and viewing activites with folow up activites like discusions, filing up workshets,
writng exercises (using language lab wherever necesary/posible) etc
Projects like group reports, mock interviews etc using a combination of two or more of the
language skils
EVALUATION PATTERN:
Internal asesment: 20%
3 tests of which two are pen and paper tests and the other is a combination of diferent modes
of asesment like
Project Asignment Report Creative writng, etc.
Al the four skils are to be tested with equal weightage given to each.
Speaking asesment: Individual presentations, Group discusions
Reading asesment: Reading pasages with comprehension questions graded folowing
Blom’s taxonomy
Writng asesment: Writng esays, CVs, reports etc. Writng should include grammar and
vocabulary.
Listening/Viewing asesment: Lectures, dialogues, film clipings with questions on verbal as
wel as audio/visual content graded folowing Blom’s taxonomy.
End Semester Examination: 80%
MA6251 MATHEMATICS – I L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary diferential
equations that model enginering problems. To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus neded for problems in al
enginering disciplines. To develop an understanding of the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to
enable the student to aply them with confidence, in aplication areas such as heat
conduction, elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow the of electric curent. To make the student apreciate the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in
which it is easier to handle the problem that is being investigated.23
UNIT I VECTOR CALCULUS 9+3
Gradient, divergence and curl – Directional derivative – Irotational and solenoidal vector fields – Vector integration – Gren’s theorem in a plane, Gaus divergence theorem and Stokes’ theorem
(excluding profs) – Simple aplications involving cubes and rectangular paralelopipeds.
UNIT I ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Higher order linear diferential equations with constant coeficients – Method of variation of
parameters – Cauchy’s and Legendre’s linear equations – Simultaneous first order linear equations
with constant coeficients.
UNIT I LAPLACE TRANSFORM 9+3
Laplace transform – Suficient conditon for existence – Transform of elementary functions – Basic
properties – Transforms of derivatives and integrals of functions - Derivatives and integrals of
transforms - Transforms of unit step function and impulse functions – Transform of periodic functions.
Inverse Laplace transform -Statement of Convolution theorem – Inital and final value theorems – Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coeficients using Laplace transformation
techniques.
UNIT IV ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 9+3
Functions of a complex variable – Analytic functions: Necesary conditons – Cauchy-Rieman
equations and suficient conditons (excluding profs) – Harmonic and orthogonal properties of
analytic function – Harmonic conjugate – Construction of analytic functions – Conformal maping: w =
z+k, kz, 1/z, z2
, ez and bilnear transformation.
UNIT V COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9+3
Complex integration – Statement and aplications of Cauchy’s integral theorem and Cauchy’s integral
formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series expansions – Singular points – Residues – Cauchy’s residue
theorem – Evaluation of real definite integrals as contour integrals around unit circle and semi-circle
(excluding poles on the real axis).
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The subject helps the students to develop the fundamentals and basic concepts in vector
calculus, ODE, Laplace transform and complex functions. Students wil be able to solve
problems related to enginering aplications by using these techniques.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “A Text bok of Enginering Mathematics”, Eighth Editon, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd.,201.
2. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Enginering Mathematics”, 41
st
Editon, Khana Publications, Delhi,
201.
REFERENCES:
1. Das, H.K., and Er. Rajnish Verma,” Higher Enginering Mathematics”,
S. Chand Private Ltd., 201
2. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Enginering Mathematics”, 3rd Editon, Pearson Education,
2012.
3. Peter V. O’Neil,” Advanced Enginering Mathematics”, 7th Editon, Cengage learning, 2012.
4. Ramana B.V, “Higher Enginering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Company, New
Delhi, 208.
5. Sivarama Krishna Das P. and Rukmangadachari E., “Enginering Mathematics” Volume I,
Second Editon, PEARSON Publishing, 201.24
PH6251 ENGINEERING PHYSICS – I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enrich the understanding of various types of materials and their aplications in enginering
and technology.
UNIT I CONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Conductors – clasical fre electron theory of metals – Electrical and thermal conductivity – Wiedeman – Franz law – Lorentz number – Draw backs of clasical theory – Quantum theory – Fermi distribution function – Efect of temperature on Fermi Function – Density of energy states –
carier concentration in metals.
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Intrinsic semiconductor – carier concentration derivation – Fermi level – Variation of Fermi level with
temperature – electrical conductivity – band gap determination – compound semiconductors -direct
and indirect band gap- derivation of carier concentration in n-type and p-type semiconductor –
variation of Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration – Hal efect –Determination of
Hal coeficient – Aplications.
UNIT I MAGNETIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Origin of magnetic moment – Bohr magneton – comparison of Dia, Para and Fero magnetism – Domain theory – Hysteresis – soft and hard magnetic materials – antiferomagnetic materials – Ferites and its aplications
Superconductivity: properties – Type I and Type I superconductors – BCS theory of
superconductivity(Qualitative) - High Tc superconductors – Aplications of superconductors – SQUID,
cryotron, magnetic levitation.
UNIT IV DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9
Electrical susceptibilty – dielectric constant – electronic, ionic, orientational and space charge
polarization – frequency and temperature dependence of polarisation – internal field – Clausius – Mosoti relation (derivation) – dielectric los – dielectric breakdown – uses of dielectric materials
(capacitor and transformer) – feroelectricity and aplications.
UNIT V ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Metalic glases: preparation, properties and aplications. Shape memory aloys (SMA):
Characteristics, properties of NiTi aloy, aplication, Nanomaterials– Preparation -pulsed laser
depositon – chemical vapour depositon – Aplications – NLO materials –Birefringence- optical Ker
efect – Clasifcation of Biomaterials and its aplications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The students wil have the knowledge on physics of materials and that knowledge wil be used
by them in diferent enginering and technology aplications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arumugam M., Materials Science. Anuradha publishers, 2010
2. Pilai S.O., Solid State Physics. New Age International(P) Ltd., publishers, 209
REFERENCES:
1. Palanisamy P.K. Materials Science. SCITECH Publishers, 201
2. Senthilkumar G. Enginering Physics I. VRB Publishers, 201
3. Mani P. Enginering Physics I. Dhanam Publications, 201
4. Marikani A. Enginering Physics. PHI Learning Pvt., India, 20925
CY6251 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY - I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To make the students conversant with boiler fed water requirements, related problems
and water treatment echniques. Principles of electrochemical reactions, redox reactions in corosion of materials and
methods for corosion prevention and protection of materials. Principles and generation of energy in bateries, nuclear reactors, solar cels, wind mils
and fuel cels. Preparation, properties and aplications of enginering materials. Types of uels, calorifc value calculations, manufacture of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9
Introduction to boiler fed water-requirements-formation of deposits in steam boilers and heat
exchangers- disadvantages (wastage of fuels, decrease in eficiency, boiler explosion) prevention
of scale formation -softening of hard water -external treatment zeolite and demineralization -
internal treatment- boiler compounds (phosphate, calgon, carbonate, coloidal) - caustic
embritlement -boiler corosion-priming and foaming- desalination of brackish water –reverse
osmosis.
UNIT I ELECTROCHEMISTRY AND CORROSION 9
Electrochemical cel - redox reaction, electrode potential- origin of electrode potential- oxidation
potential- reduction potential, measurement and aplications - electrochemical series and its
signifcance - Nernst equation (derivation and problems). Corosion- causes- factors- types- chemical, electrochemical corosion (galvanic, diferential aeration), corosion control - material
selection and design aspects - electrochemical protection – sacrifcial anode method and
impresed curent cathodic method. Paints- constiuents and function. Electroplating of Coper
and electroles plating of nickel.
UNIT I ENERGY SOURCES 9
Introduction- nuclear energy- nuclear fision- controled nuclear fision- nuclear fusion- diferences
betwen nuclear fision and fusion- nuclear chain reactions- nuclear reactor power generator- clasifcation of nuclear reactor- light water reactor- breder reactor- solar energy conversion- solar cels- wind energy. Bateries and fuel cels:Types of bateries- alkaline batery- lead storage
batery- nickel-cadmium batery- lithium batery- fuel cel H2 -O2 fuel cel- aplications.
UNIT IV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Abrasives: definiton, clasifcation or types, grinding whel, abrasive paper and cloth.
Refractories: definiton, characteristics, clasifcation, properties – refractorines and RUL,
dimensional stabilty, thermal spaling, thermal expansion, porosity; Manufacture of alumina,
magnesite and silcon carbide, Portland cement- manufacture and properties - seting and
hardening of cement, special cement- waterprof and white cement–properties and uses. Glas - manufacture, types, properties and uses.
UNIT V FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuel: Introduction- clasifcation of fuels- calorifc value- higher and lower calorifc values- coal- analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate)- carbonization- manufacture of metalurgical coke (Oto
Hofman method) - petroleum- manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius proces)- knocking- octane number - diesel oil- cetane number - natural gas- compresed natural gas(CNG)- liquefied
petroleum gases(LPG)- producer gas- water gas. Power alcohol and bio diesel. Combustion of
fuels: introduction- theoretical calculation of calorifc value- calculation of stoichiometry of fuel and
air ratio- igniton temperature- explosive range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS26
OUTCOMES: The knowledge gained on enginering materials, fuels, energy sources and water
treatment techniques wil faciltate beter understanding of enginering proceses and
aplications for further learning.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vairam S, Kalyani P and SubaRamesh.,“Enginering Chemistry”., Wiley India PvtLtd.,New
Delhi., 201
2. DaraS.S,UmareS.S.“Enginering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi ,2010
REFERENCES:
1 Kanan P. and Ravikrishnan A., “Enginering Chemistry”, Sri Krishna Hi-tech Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. Chenai, 209
2. AshimaSrivastava and Janhavi N N., “Concepts of Enginering Chemistry”, ACME
Learning Private Limited., New Delhi., 2010.
3. RenuBapna and Renu Gupta., “Enginering Chemistry”, Macmilan India Publisher Ltd.,
2010.
4 Pahari A and Chauhan B., “Enginering Chemistry”., Firewal Media., New Delhi., 2010
GE6252 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To explain the basic theorems used in Electrical circuits and the diferent components and
function of electrical machines. To explain the fundamentals of semiconductor and aplications. To explain the principles of digital electronics
To impart knowledge of communication.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASURMENTS 12
Ohm’s Law – Kirchof’s Laws – Steady State Solution of DC Circuits – Introduction to AC Circuits – Waveforms and RMS Value – Power and Power factor – Single Phase and Thre Phase Balanced
Circuits.
Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron Instruments (Ammeters and Voltmeters),
Dynamometer type Wat meters and Energy meters.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL MECHANICS 12
Construction, Principle of Operation, Basic Equations and Aplications of DC Generators, DC Motors,
Single Phase Transformer, single phase induction Motor.
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS 12
Characteristics of PN Junction Diode – Zener Efect – Zener Diode and its Characteristics – Half wave
and Ful wave Rectifers – Voltage Regulation.
Bipolar Junction Transistor – CB, CE, CC Configurations and Characteristics – Elementary Treatment
of Smal Signal Amplifer.27
UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 12
Binary Number System – Logic Gates – Bolean Algebra – Half and Ful Aders – Flip-Flops – Registers and Counters – A/D and D/A Conversion (single concepts)
UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 12
Types of Signals: Analog and Digital Signals – Modulation and Demodulation: Principles of Amplitude
and Frequency Modulations.
Communication Systems: Radio, TV, Fax, Microwave, Satelite and Optical Fibre (Block Diagram
Aproach only).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: abilty to identify the electrical components explain the characteristics of electrical machines. abilty to identify electronics components and use of them to design circuits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mitle N., “Basic Electrical Enginering”, Tata McGraw Hil Editon, New Delhi, 190.
2. Sedha R.S., “Aplied Electronics”, S. Chand & Co., 206.
REFERENCES:
1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S and Muraledharan K A, “Basic Electrical, Electronics
and Computer Enginering”, Tata McGraw Hil, Second Editon, 206.
2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Enginering”, Oxford pres 205.
3. Mehta V K, “Principles of Electronics”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, 194.
4. Mahmod Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline Series,
McGraw Hil, 202.
5. Premkumar N, “Basic Electrical Enginering”, Anuradha Publishers, 203.
GE6253 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To develop capacity to predict the efect of orce and motion in the course of carying out the
design functions of enginering.
UNIT I BASICS AND STATICS OF PARTICLES 12
Introduction – Units and Dimensions – Laws of Mechanics – Lami’s theorem, Paralelogram and
triangular Law of forces – Vectorial representation of forces – Vector operations of forces -aditons,
subtraction, dot product, cros product – Coplanar Forces – rectangular components – Equilbrium of
a particle – Forces in space – Equilbrium of a particle in space – Equivalent systems of forces – Principle of transmisibilty .
UNIT I EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 12
Fre body diagram – Types of suports –Action and reaction forces –stable equilbrium – Moments
and Couples – Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial representation of
moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment – Varignon’s theorem – Single equivalent
force -Equilbrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions – Equilbrium of Rigid bodies in thre dimensions
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 12
Centroids and centre of mas– Centroids of lines and areas - Rectangular, circular, triangular areas
by integration – T section, I section, - Angle section, Holow section by using standard formula –28
Theorems of Papus - Area moments of inertia of plane areas – Rectangular, circular, triangular
areas by integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Holow section by using standard formula – Paralel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem –Principal moments of inertia of plane areas – Principal axes of inertia-Mas moment of inertia –mas moment of inertia for prismatic, cylindrical and
spherical solids from first principle – Relation to area moments of inertia.
UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 12
Displacements, Velocity and aceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilnear motion - Newton’s laws of motion – Work Energy Equation– Impulse and Momentum – Impact of elastic
bodies.
UNIT V FRICTION AND ELEMENTS OF RIGID BODY DYNAMICS 12
Friction force – Laws of sliding friction – equilbrium analysis of simple systems with sliding friction – wedge friction-. Roling resistance -Translation and Rotation of Rigid Bodies – Velocity and
aceleration – General Plane motion of simple rigid bodies such as cylinder, disc/whel and sphere.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: abilty to explain the diferential principles aplies to solve enginering problems dealing with
force, displacement, velocity and aceleration. abilty to analyse the forces in any structures. abilty to solve rigid body subjected to dynamic forces.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ber, F.P and Johnston Jr. E.R., “Vector Mechanics for Enginers (In SI Units): Statics and
Dynamics”, 8th Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Publishing company, New Delhi (204).
2. Vela Murali, “Enginering Mechanics”, Oxford University Pres (2010)
REFERENCES:
1. Hibeler, R.C and Ashok Gupta, “Enginering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics”, 1th Editon,
Pearson Education 2010.
2. Irving H. Shames and Krishna Mohana Rao. G., “Enginering Mechanics – Statics and
Dynamics”, 4th Editon, Pearson Education 206.
3. Meriam J.L. and Kraige L.G., “ Enginering Mechanics- Statics - Volume 1, Dynamics- Volume
2”, Third Editon, John Wiley & Sons,193.
4. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G., “Enginering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics”,
3
rd Editon, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 205.
5. Bhavikati, S.S and Rajashekarapa, K.G., “Enginering Mechanics”, New Age International
(P) Limited Publishers, 198.
6. Kumar, K.L., “Enginering Mechanics”, 3rd Revised Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Publishing
company, New Delhi 208.
GE6261 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND MODELING LABORATORY L T P C
0 1 2 2
OBJECTIVES: To develop skil to use software to create 2D and 3D models.
LIST OF EXERCISES USING SOFTWARE CAPABLE OF DRAFTING AND MODELING
1. Study of capabilties of software for Drafting and Modeling – Cordinate systems (absolute,
relative, polar, etc.) – Creation of simple figures like polygon and general multi-line figures.
2. Drawing of a Title Block with necesary text and projection symbol.29
3. Drawing of curves like parabola, spiral, involute using Bspline or cubic spline.
4. Drawing of ront view and top view of simple solids like prism, pyramid, cylinder, cone, etc, and
dimensioning.
5. Drawing front view, top view and side view of objects from the given pictorial views (eg. V- block, Base of a mixie, Simple stol, Objects with hole and curves).
6. Drawing of a plan of residential building ( Two bed roms, kitchen, hal, etc.)
7. Drawing of a simple stel trus.
8. Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid, cylinder, cone, etc,
9. Drawing isometric projection of simple objects.
10. Creation of 3-D models of simple objects and obtaining 2-D multi-view drawings from 3-D
model.
Note: Ploting of drawings must be made for each exercise and atached to the records writen by
students.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: abilty to use the software packers for drafting and modeling
abilty to create 2D and 3D models of Enginering Components
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
Sl.No Description of Equipment Quantity
1. Pentium IV computer or beter hardware, with
suitable graphics facilty
30 No.
2. Licensed software for Drafting and Modeling. 30 Licenses
3. Laser Printer or Ploter to print /plot drawings 2 No.
GE6262 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 2 1
PHYSICS LABORATORY – I
OBJECTIVES: To introduce diferent experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts aplied in
optics, thermal physics and properties of mater.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Determination of Young’s modulus by uniform bending method
2. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
3. Determination of Coeficient of viscosity of a liquid –Poiseuile’s method
4. Determination of Dispersive power of a prism - Spectrometer
5. Determination of thicknes of a thin wire – Air wedge method
6. Determination of Rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum
OUTCOMES: The students wil have the abilty to test materials by using their knowledge of aplied physics
principles in optics and properties of mater.30
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Traveling microscope, meter scale, Knife edge, weights
2. Band gap experimental set up
3. Burete, Capilary tube, ruber tube, stop clock, beaker and weighing balance
4. spectrometer, prism, sodium vapour lamp.
5. Air-wedge experimental set up.
6. Torsion pendulum set up.
(vernier Caliper, Screw gauge, reading lens are required for most of the experiments)
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY - I
OBJECTIVES: To make the student acquire practical skils in the wet chemical and instrumental
methods for quantiative estimation of hardnes, alkalinity, metal ion content, corosion
in metals and cement analysis.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Any FIVE Experiments)
1 Determination of alkalinity in water sample
2 Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardnes of water by EDTA method
3 Estimation of coper content of the given solution by EDTA method
4 Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer
5 Estimation of sodium present in water using flame photometer
6 Corosion experiment – weight los method
7 Conductometric precipitation tiration using BaCl2 and Na2SO4
8 Determination of CaO in Cement.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The students wil be conversant with hands-on knowledge in the quantiative chemical analysis
of water quality related parameters, corosion measurement and cement analysis.
REFERENCES:
1. Daniel R. Paleros, “Experimental organic chemistry” John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
New York, 201.
2. Furnis B.S. Hanaford A.J, Smith P.W.G and Tatchel A.R., “Vogel’s Textbok of
practical organic chemistry, LBS Singapore ,194.
3. Jefery G.H, Baset J., Mendham J. and Deny R.C., “Vogel’s Text bok of
quantiative analysis chemical analysis”, ELBS 5th Edn. Longman, Singapore
publishers, Singapore, 196.
4. Kolthof I.M. and Sandel E.B. et al. Quantiative chemical analysis, McMilan, Madras
1980
• Laboratory clases on alternate weks for Physics and Chemistry.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Potentiometer - 5 Nos
2. Flame photo meter - 5 Nos
3. Weighing Balance - 5 Nos
4. Conductivity meter - 5 Nos
Common Apparatus : Pipete, Burete, conical flask, percelain tile, dropper (30 Nos each)31
MA6351 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES
To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many aplications in enginering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems. To acquaint he student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations. To introduce the efective mathematical tols for the solutions of partial diferential equations
that model several physical proceses and to develop Z transform techniques for discrete time
systems.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 + 3
Formation of partial diferential equations – Singular integrals - Solutions of standard types of first
order partial diferential equations - Lagrange’s linear equation - Linear partial diferential equations of
second and higher order with constant coeficients of both homogeneous and non-homogeneous
types.
UNIT I FOURIER SERIES 9 + 3
Dirchlet’s conditons – General Fourier series – Od and even functions – Half range sine series – Half range cosine series – Complex form of Fourier series – Parseval’s identiy – Harmonic analysis.
UNIT I APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 + 3
Clasifcation of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Solutions of one dimensional wave
equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution of two dimensional
equation of heat conduction (excluding insulated edges).
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9 + 3
Statement of Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s
identiy.
UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9 + 3
Z- transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z - transform (using partial fraction and residues) – Convolution theorem - Formation of diference equations – Solution of diference equations using
Z - transform.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
The understanding of the mathematical principles on transforms and partial diferential
equations would provide them the abilty to formulate and solve some of the physical problems
of enginering.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Verarajan. T., "Transforms and Partial Diferential Equations", Tata McGraw Hil Education
Pvt. Ltd., Second reprint, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Grewal. B.S., "Higher Enginering Mathematics", 42nd Editon, Khana Publishers, Delhi,
2012.
3. Narayanan.S., Manicavachagom Pilay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Enginering Students" Vol. I & I, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt Ltd. 198.
REFERENCES
1. Bali.N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbok of Enginering Mathematics", 7th Editon, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd, 207.32
2. Ramana.B.V., "Higher Enginering Mathematics", Tata Mc-Graw Hil Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 208.
3. Glyn James, "Advanced Modern Enginering Mathematics", 3rd Editon, Pearson Education,
207.
4. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Enginering Mathematics", 8
th Editon, Wiley India, 207.
5. Ray Wylie. C and Baret.L.C, "Advanced Enginering Mathematics", Sixth Editon, Tata
McGraw Hil Education Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
6. Data.K.B., "Mathematical Methods of Science and Enginering", Cengage Learning India Pvt
Ltd, Delhi, 2013.
CE6306 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the streses developed in bars, compounds bars, beams, shafts, cylinders and
spheres.
UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 9
Rigid bodies and deformable solids – Tension, Compresion and Shear Streses – Deformation of
simple and compound bars – Thermal streses – Elastic constants – Volumetric strains –Streses on
inclined planes – principal streses and principal planes – Mohr’s circle of stres.
UNIT I TRANSVERSE LOADING ON BEAMS AND STRESSES IN BEAM 9
Beams – types transverse loading on beams – Shear force and bending moment in beams – Cantilevers – Simply suported beams and over – hanging beams. Theory of simple bending–
bending stres distribution – Load carying capacity – Proportioning of sections – Flitched beams – Shear stres distribution.
UNIT I TORSION 9
Torsion formulation streses and deformation in circular and holows shafts – Steped shafts– Deflection in shafts fixed at the both ends – Streses in helical springs – Deflection of helical springs,
cariage springs.
UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9
Double Integration method – Macaulay’s method – Area moment method for computation of slopes
and deflections in beams - Conjugate beam and strain energy – Maxwel’s reciprocal theorems.
UNIT V THIN CYLINDERS, SPHERES AND THICK CYLINDERS 9
Streses in thin cylindrical shel due to internal presure circumferential and longitudinal streses and
deformation in thin and thick cylinders – spherical shels subjected to internal presure –Deformation
in spherical shels – Lame’s theorem.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply mathematical knowledge to
calculate the deformation behavior of simple structures. Critcaly analyse problem and solve the problems related to mechanical elements and analyse
the deformation behavior for diferent ypes of loads.3
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bansal, R.K., "Strength of Materials", Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., 207
2. Jindal U.C., "Strength of Materials", Asian Boks Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 207
REFERENCES:
1. Egor. P.Popov “Enginering Mechanics of Solids” Prentice Hal of India, New Delhi, 201
2. Subramanian R., "Strength of Materials", Oxford University Pres, Oxford Higher Education Series,
207.
3. Hibeler, R.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Pearson Education, Low Price Editon, 207
4. Ferdinand P. Ben, Rusel Johnson, J.r. and John J. Dewole "Mechanics of Materials", Tata
McGraw Hil Publishing ‘co. Ltd., New Delhi, 205.
ME6301 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To familarize the students to understand the fundamentals of thermodynamics and to perform
thermal analysis on their behavior and performance.
(Use of Standard and aproved Steam Table, Molier Chart, Compresibilty Chart and
Psychrometric Chart permited)
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND FIRST LAW 9
Basic concepts - concept of continum, comparison of microscopic and macroscopic aproach. Path
and point functions. Intensive and extensive, total and specifc quanties. System and their types.
Thermodynamic Equilbrium State, path and proces. Quasi-static, reversible and ireversible
proceses. Heat and work transfer, definiton and comparison, sign convention. Displacement work
and other modes of work .P-V diagram. Zeroth law of thermodynamics – concept of temperature and
thermal equilbrium– relationship betwen temperature scales –new temperature scales. First law of
thermodynamics –aplication to closed and open systems – steady and unsteady flow proceses.
UNIT I SECOND LAW AND AVAILABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Heat Reservoir, source and sink. Heat Engine, Refrigerator, Heat pump. Statements of second law
and its corolaries. Carnot cycle Reversed Carnot cycle, Performance. Clausius inequality. Concept of
entropy, T-s diagram, Tds Equations, entropy change for - pure substance, ideal gases - diferent
proceses, principle of increase in entropy. Aplications of I Law. High and low grade energy.
Available and non-available energy of a source and finite body. Energy and ireversibilty. Expresions
for the energy of a closed system and open systems. Energy balance and entropy generation.
Ireversibilty. Iand I law Eficiency.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCE AND STEAM POWER CYCLE 9
Formation of steam and its thermodynamic properties, p-v, p-T, T-v, T-s, h-s diagrams. p-v-T surface.
Use of Steam Table and Molier Chart. Determination of drynes fraction. Aplication of I and I law
for pure substances. Ideal and actual Rankine cycles, Cycle Improvement Methods - Reheat and
Regenerative cycles, Economiser, preheater, Binary and Combined cycles.
UNIT IV IDEAL AND REAL GASES, THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS 9
Properties of Ideal gas- Ideal and real gas comparison- Equations of state for ideal and real gases- Reduced properties-.Compresibilty factor-.Principle of Coresponding states. -Generalised
Compresibilty Chart and its use-. Maxwel relations, Tds Equations, Diference and ratio of heat34
capacites, Energy equation, Joule-Thomson Coeficient, Clausius Clapeyron equation, Phase
Change Proceses. Simple Calculations.
UNIT V GAS MIXTURES AND PSYCHROMETRY 9
Mole and Mas fraction, Dalton’s and Amagat’s Law. Properties of gas mixture – Molar mas, gas
constant, density, change in internal energy, enthalpy, entropy and Gibs function. Psychrometric
properties, Psychrometric charts. Property calculations of air vapour mixtures by using chart and
expresions. Psychrometric proces – adiabatic saturation, sensible heating and coling,
humidifcation, dehumidifcation, evaporative coling and adiabatic mixing. Simple Aplications
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the Thermodynamic Principles
to Mechanical Enginering Aplication. Aply mathematical fundamentals to study the properties of steam, gas and gas mixtures.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Nag.P.K., “Enginering Thermodynamics”, 4thEditon, Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi, 208.
2. Natarajan E., "Enginering Thermodynamics: Fundamentals and Aplications", Anuragam
Publications, 2012.
REFERENCES :
1. Cengel. Y and M.Boles, "Thermodynamics - An Enginering Aproach", 7th Editon, Tata
McGraw Hil, 2010.
2. Holman.J.P., "Thermodynamics", 3rd Editon, McGraw-Hil, 195.
3. Rathakrishnan. E., "Fundamentals of Enginering Thermodynamics", 2nd Editon, Prentice- Hal of India Pvt. Ltd, 206
4. Chatopadhyay, P, "Enginering Thermodynamics", Oxford University Pres, 2010.
5. Arora C.P, “Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi, 203.
6. Van Wylen and Sontag, “Clasical Thermodynamics”, Wiley Eastern, 1987
7. Venkatesh. A, “Basic Enginering Thermodynamics”, Universites Pres (India) Limited, 207.
8. Kau-Fui Vincent Wong, "Thermodynamics for Enginers", CRC Pres, 2010 Indian Reprint.
9. Prasana Kumar: Thermodynamics "Enginering Thermodynamics" Pearson Education, 2013
CE6451 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: The aplications of the conservation laws to flow through pipes and hydraulic machines are
studied
To understand the importance of dimensional analysis. To understand the importance of various types of low in pumps and turbines.
UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLOW CHARACTERISTICS 8
Units and dimensions- Properties of fluids- mas density, specifc weight, specifc volume, specifc
gravity, viscosity, compresibilty, vapor presure, surface tension and capilarity. Flow characteristics – concept of control volume - aplication of continuity equation, energy equation and momentum
equation.35
UNIT I FLOW THROUGH CIRCULAR CONDUITS 8
Hydraulic and energy gradient - Laminar flow through circular conduits and circular anuli-Boundary
layer concepts – types of boundary layer thicknes – Darcy Weisbach equation –friction factor- Mody
diagram- commercial pipes- minor loses – Flow through pipes in series and paralel.
UNIT I DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 9
Ned for dimensional analysis – methods of dimensional analysis – Similtude –types of similtude - Dimensionles parameters- aplication of dimensionles parameters – Model analysis.
UNIT IV PUMPS 10
Impact of jets - Euler’s equation - Theory of roto-dynamic machines – various eficiencies– velocity
components at entry and exit of the rotor- velocity triangles - Centrifugal pumps– working principle - work done by the impeler - performance curves - Reciprocating pump- working principle – Rotary
pumps –clasifcation.
UNIT V TURBINES 10
Clasifcation of turbines – heads and eficiencies – velocity triangles. Axial, radial and mixed flow
turbines. Pelton whel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbines- working principles - work done by water
on the runer – draft tube. Specifc sped - unit quanties – performance curves for turbines –
governing of turbines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply mathematical knowledge to
predict he properties and characteristics of a fluid. Can critcaly analyse the performance of pumps and turbines.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Bok House, New Delhi
204.
REFERENCES:
1. Streter, V. L. and Wylie E. B., "Fluid Mechanics", McGraw Hil Publishing Co. 2010
2. Kumar K. L., "Enginering Fluid Mechanics", Eurasia Publishing House(p) Ltd., New Delhi
204
3. Robert W.Fox, Alan T. McDonald, Philp J.Pritchard, “Fluid Mechanics and Machinery”, 201.
4. Graebel. W.P, "Enginering Fluid Mechanics", Taylor & Francis, Indian Reprint, 201
ME6302 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY – I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To introduce the concepts of basic manufacturing proceses and fabrication techniques, such
as metal casting, metal joining, metal forming and manufacture of plastic components.
UNIT I METAL CASTING PROCESSES 9
Sand Casting : Sand Mould – Type of paterns - Patern Materials – Patern alowances –Moulding
sand Properties and testing – Cores –Types and aplications – Moulding machines– Types and
aplications; Melting furnaces : Blast and Cupola Furnaces; Principle of special casting
proceses : Shel - investment – Ceramic mould – Presure die casting - Centrifugal Casting - CO2
proces – Stir casting; Defects in Sand casting36
UNIT I JOINING PROCESSES 9
Operating principle, basic equipment, merits and applications of : Fusion welding proceses :
Gas welding - Types – Flame characteristics; Manual metal arc welding – Gas Tungsten arc welding
- Gas metal arc welding – Submerged arc welding – Electro slag welding; Operating principle and
applications of : Resistance welding - Plasma arc welding – Thermit welding – Electron beam
welding – Friction welding and Friction Stir Welding; Brazing and soldering; Weld defects: types,
causes and cure.
UNIT I METAL FORMING PROCESSES 9
Hot working and cold working of metals – Forging proceses – Open, impresion and closed die
forging – forging operations. Roling of metals– Types of Roling – Flat strip roling – shape roling
operations – Defects in roled parts. Principle of rod and wire drawing – Tube drawing – Principles of
Extrusion – Types – Hot and Cold extrusion. UNIT IV SHEET METAL PROCESSES 9
Shet metal characteristics – shearing, bending and drawing operations – Stretch forming operations – Formabilty of shet metal – Test methods –special forming proceses-Working principle and
aplications – Hydro forming – Ruber pad forming – Metal spining– Introduction of Explosive
forming, magnetic pulse forming, pen forming, Super plastic forming – Micro forming
UNIT V MANUFACTURE OF PLASTIC COMPONENTS 9
Types and characteristics of plastics – Moulding of thermoplastics – working principles and typical
aplications – injection moulding – Plunger and screw machines – Compresion moulding, Transfer
Moulding – Typical industrial aplications – introduction to blow moulding –Rotational moulding – Film
blowing – Extrusion – Thermoforming – Bonding of Thermoplastics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the diferent manufacturing
proces and use this in industry for component production
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hajra Chouldhary S.K and Hajra Choudhury. AK., "Elements of workshop Technology", volume Iand I, Media promoters and Publishers Private Limited, Mumbai, 197
2. Kalpakjian. S, “Manufacturing Enginering and Technology”, Pearson Education India Editon,
206
REFERENCES:
1. Gowri P. Hariharan, A.Suresh Babu, "Manufacturing Technology I", Pearson Education, 208
2. Roy. A. Lindberg, "Proceses and Materials of Manufacture", PHI /Pearson education, 206
3. Paul Degarma E, Black J.T and Ronald A. Kosher, "Materials and Proceses, in
Manufacturing" Eight Editon, Prentice – Hal of India, 197.
4. Sharma, P.C., "A Text bok of production Technology", S.Chand and Co. Ltd., 204.
5. Rao, P.N. "Manufacturing Technology Foundry, Forming and Welding", 2ndEditon, TMH-203;
20337
EE6351 ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the basic concepts of diferent types of electrical machines and their
performance. To study the diferent methods of starting D.C motors and induction motors. To study the conventional and solid-state drives
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Basic Elements – Types of Electric Drives – factors influencing the choice of electrical drives –
heating and coling curves – Loading conditons and clases of duty – Selection of power rating for
drive motors with regard to thermal overloading and Load variation factors
UNIT I DRIVE MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 9
Mechanical characteristics – Sped-Torque characteristics of various types of load and drive motors – Braking of Electrical motors – DC motors: Shunt, series and compound - single phase and thre
phase induction motors. UNIT I STARTING METHODS 8
Types of D.C Motor starters – Typical control circuits for shunt and series motors – Thre phase
squirel cage and slip ring induction motors.
UNIT IV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF D.C. DRIVES 10
Sped control of DC series and shunt motors – Armature and field control, Ward-Leonard control
system - Using controled rectifers and DC chopers –aplications.
UNIT V CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF A.C. DRIVES 10
Sped control of thre phase induction motor – Voltage control, voltage /frequency control, slip power
recovery scheme – Using inverters and AC voltage regulators – aplications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon Completion of this subject, the students can able to explain diferent types of electrical
machines and their performance
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vedam Subrahmaniam, “Electric Drives (Concepts and Aplications”, Tata McGraw-Hil, 201
2. Nagrath .IJ. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines”, Tata McGraw-Hil, 198
REFERENCES:
1. Pilai.S.K “A First Course on Electric Drives”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 198
2. Singh. M.D., K.B.Khanchandani, “Power Electronics”, Tata McGraw-Hil, 198
3. Partab. H., “Art and Science and Utilsation of Electrical Energy”, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 19438
ME631 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: To Study and practice the various operations that can be performed in lathe, shaper, driling,
miling machines etc. and to equip with the practical knowledge required in the core industries.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Machining and Machining time estimations for :
1. Taper Turning
2. External Thread cuting
3. Internal Thread Cuting
4. Ecentric Turning
5. Knurling
6. Square Head Shaping
7. Hexagonal Head Shaping
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to demonstrate and fabricate diferent
types of components using the machine tols
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Centre Lathes 7 Nos.
2 Horizontal Miling Machine 1 No
3 Vertical Miling Machine 1 No
4 Shaper 1 Nos.
CE6461 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: Upon Completion of this subject, the students can able to have hands on experience in flow
measurements using diferent devices and also perform calculation related to loses in pipes
and also perform characteristic study of pumps, turbines etc.,
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of the Coeficient of discharge of given Orifce meter.
2. Determination of the Coeficient of discharge of given Venturi meter.
3. Calculation of the rate of low using Rota meter.
4. Determination of riction factor for a given set of pipes.
5. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of centrifugal pump/
submergible pump
6. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating pump.
7. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump.
8. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton whel.
9. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine.
10. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Kaplan turbine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS39
OUTCOMES: Abilty to use the measurement equipments for flow measurement Abilty to do performance trust on diferent fluid machinery
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Orifce meter setup 1
2 Venturi meter setup 1
3 Rotameter setup 1
4 Pipe Flow analysis setup 1
5 Centrifugal pump/submergible pump setup 1
6 Reciprocating pump setup 1
7 Gear pump setup 1
8 Pelton whel setup 1
9 Francis turbine setup 1
10 Kaplan turbine setup 1
EE6365 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: • To validate the principles studied in theory by performing experiments in the laboratory
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Load test on DC Shunt & DC Series motor
2. O.C.C & Load characteristics of DC Shunt and DC Series generator
3. Sped control of DC shunt motor (Armature, Field control)
4. Load test on single phase transformer
5. O.C & S.C Test on a single phase transformer
6. Regulation of an alternator by EMF & MMF methods.
7. V curves and inverted V curves of synchronous Motor
8. Load test on thre phase squirel cage Induction motor
9. Sped control of thre phase slip ring Induction Motor
10. Load test on single phase Induction Motor.
1. Study of DC & AC Starters
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Abilty to perform sped characteristic of diferent electrical machine
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 DC Shunt motor 2
2 DC Series motor 1
3 DC shunt motor-DC Shunt Generator set 1
4 DC Shunt motor-DC Series Generator set 140
5 Single phase transformer 2
6 Thre phase alternator 2
7 Thre phase synchronous motor 1
8 Thre phase Squirel cage Induction motor 1
9 Thre phase Slip ring Induction motor 1
10 Single phase Induction motor 1
MA6452 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: This course aims at providing the necesary basic concepts of a few statistical and numerical
methods and give procedures for solving numericaly diferent kinds of problems ocuring in
enginering and technology.
UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9+3
Large sample test based on Normal distribution for single mean and diference of means - Tests
based on t, 2 and F distributions for testing means and variances – Contingency table (Test for
Independency) – Godnes of it.
UNIT I DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9+3
One way and two way clasifcations - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design –
Latin square design - 2
2
factorial design.
UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3
Newton Raphson method – Gaus elimination method – pivoting – Gaus Jordan methods – Iterative
methods of Gaus Jacobi and Gaus Seidel – Matrix inversion by Gaus Jordan method – Eigen
values of a matrix by power method.
UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL
INTEGRATION 9+3
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided diference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
diference interpolation – Aproximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.
UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Taylor’s series method – Euler’s method – Modifed Euler’s method – Fourth order Runge-Kuta
method for solving first order equations – Milne’s predictor corector methods for solving first order
equations – Finite diference methods for solving second order equations.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
It helps the students to have a clear perception of the power of statistical and numerical
techniques, ideas and would be able to demonstrate the aplications of these techniques to
problems drawn from industry, management and other enginering fields.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Johnson. R.A., and Gupta. C.B., "Miler and Freund’s Probabilty and Statistics for Enginers",
1th Editon, Pearson Education, Asia, 201.
2. Grewal. B.S., and Grewal. J.S., "Numerical Methods in Enginering and Science", 9
th Editon,
Khana Publishers, New Delhi, 207.41
REFERENCES
1. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L., and Ye. K., "Probabilty and Statistics for Enginers
and Scientists", 8
th Editon, Pearson Education, Asia, 207.
2. Spiegel. M.R., Schiler. J., and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probabilty and
Statistics", Tata McGraw Hil Editon, 204.
3. Chapra. S.C., and Canale. R.P, "Numerical Methods for Enginers", 5
th Editon, Tata McGraw
Hil, New Delhi, 207.
4. Gerald. C.F., and Wheatley. P.O. "Aplied Numerical Analysis" Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 206.
ME6401 KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the basic components and layout of linkages in the asembly of a system /
machine. To understand the principles in analyzing the asembly with respect to the displacement,
velocity, and aceleration at any point in a link of a mechanism. To understand the motion resulting from a specifed set of linkages, design few linkage
mechanisms and cam mechanisms for specifed output motions. To understand the basic concepts of tothed gearing and kinematics of gear trains and the
efects of riction in motion transmision and in machine components.
UNIT I BASICS OF MECHANISMS 9
Clasifcation of mechanisms – Basic kinematic concepts and definitons – Degre of fredom,
Mobilty – Kutzbach criterion, Gruebler’s criterion – Grashof’s Law – Kinematic inversions of four-bar
chain and slider crank chains – Limit positons – Mechanical advantage – Transmision Angle – Description of some common mechanisms – Quick return mechanisms, Straight line generators,
Universal Joint – rocker mechanisms.
UNIT I KINEMATICS OF LINKAGE MECHANISMS 9
Displacement, velocity and aceleration analysis of simple mechanisms – Graphical method– Velocity
and aceleration polygons – Velocity analysis using instantaneous centres – kinematic analysis of
simple mechanisms – Coincident points – Coriolis component of Aceleration – Introduction to linkage
synthesis problem.
UNIT I KINEMATICS OF CAM MECHANISMS 9
Clasifcation of cams and folowers – Terminology and definitons – Displacement diagrams –Uniform
velocity, parabolic, simple harmonic and cycloidal motions – Derivatives of folower motions – Layout
of plate cam profiles – Specifed contour cams – Circular arc and tangent cams – Presure angle and
undercuting – sizing of cams.
UNIT IV GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 9
Law of tothed gearing – Involutes and cycloidal toth profiles –Spur Gear terminology and definitons –Gear toth action – contact ratio – Interference and undercuting. Helical, Bevel, Worm, Rack and
Pinion gears [Basics only]. Gear trains – Sped ratio, train value – Paralel axis gear trains – Epicyclic
Gear Trains.42
UNIT V FRICTION IN MACHINE ELEMENTS 9
Surface contacts – Sliding and Roling friction – Friction drives – Friction in screw threads –Bearings
and lubrication – Friction clutches – Belt and rope drives – Friction in brakes- Band and Block brakes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply fundamentals of mechanism for
the design of new mechanisms and analyse them for optimum design.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Uicker, J.J., Penock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, 3
rd
Editon, Oxford University Pres, 209.
2. Ratan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 209.
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Bevan, "Theory of Machines", 3rd Editon, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 205.
2. Cleghorn. W. L, “Mechanisms of Machines”, Oxford University Pres, 205
3. Robert L. Norton, "Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery", Tata McGraw-Hil, 209.
4. Alen S. Hal Jr., “Kinematics and Linkage Design”, Prentice Hal, 1961
5. Ghosh. A and Malick, A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", Afilated East-West Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 198.
6. Rao.J.S. and Dukipati.R.V. "Mechanisms and Machine Theory", Wiley-Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi, 192.
7. John Hanah and Stephens R.C., "Mechanics of Machines", Viva Low-Prices Student Editon,
199.
8. Ramamurthi. V, "Mechanics of Machines", Narosa Publishing House, 202.
9. Khurmi, R.S., ”Theory of Machines”,14th Editon, S Chand Publications, 205
10. Sadhu Sigh : Theory of Machines, "Kinematics of Machine", Third Editon, Pearson Education,
2012
ME6402 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY – I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the concept and basic mechanics of metal cuting, working of standard
machine tols such as lathe, shaping and alied machines, miling, driling and alied machines,
grinding and alied machines and broaching. To understand the basic concepts of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) of machine tols and
CNC Programming
UNIT I THEORY OF METAL CUTTING 9
Mechanics of chip formation, single point cuting tol, forces in machining, Types of chip, cuting tols – nomenclature, orthogonal metal cuting, thermal aspects, cuting tol materials, tol wear, tol ife,
surface finish, cuting fluids and Machinabilty.
UNIT I TURNING MACHINES 9
Centre lathe, constructional features, specifcation, operations – taper turning methods, thread cuting
methods, special atachments, machining time and power estimation. Capstan and turet lathes- tol
layout – automatic lathes: semi automatic – single spindle : Swis type, automatic screw type – multi
spindle:43
UNIT I SHAPER, MILLING AND GEAR CUTTING MACHINES 9
Shaper - Types of operations. Driling ,reaming, boring, Taping. Miling operations-types of miling
cuter. Gear cuting – forming and generation principle and construction of gear miling ,hobing and
gear shaping proceses –finishing of gears.
UNIT IV ABRASIVE PROCESS AND BROACHING 9
Abrasive proceses: grinding whel – specifcations and selection, types of grinding proces–
cylindrical grinding, surface grinding, centreles grinding and internal grinding- Typical aplications –
concepts of surface integrity, broaching machines: broach construction – push, pul, surface and
continuous broaching machines
UNIT V CNC MACHINING 9
Numerical Control (NC) machine tols – CNC types, constructional details, special features,
machining centre, part programming fundamentals CNC – manual part programming – micromachining – wafer machining
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to understand and compare the
functions and aplications of diferent metal cuting tols and also demonstrate the
programming in CNC machining.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hajra Choudhury, "Elements of Workshop Technology", Vol.I., Media Promoters
2. Rao. P.N “Manufacturing Technology - Metal Cuting and Machine Tols", Tata McGraw-Hil,
New Delhi, 203.
REFERENCES:
1. Richerd R Kibe, John E. Nely, Roland O. Merges and Waren J.White “Machine Tol
Practices”, Prentice Hal of India, 198
2. HMT, "Production Technology", Tata McGraw Hil, 198.
3. Geofrey Bothroyd, "Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tols", Mc Graw Hil,
1984
4. Roy. A.Lindberg, “Proces and Materials of Manufacture,” Fourth Editon, PHI/Pearson
Education 206.
ME6403 ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND METALLURGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge on the structure, properties, treatment, testing and aplications of metals
and non-metalic materials so as to identify and select suitable materials for various
enginering aplications.
UNIT I ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS 9
Constiution of aloys – Solid solutions, substiutional and interstial – phase diagrams, Isomorphous,
eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic, and peritectoid reactions, Iron – carbon equilbrium diagram.
Clasifcation of stel and cast Iron microstructure, properties and aplication.
UNIT I HEAT TREATMENT 10
Definiton – Ful anealing, stres relief, recrystalisation and spheroidising – normalising, hardening
and Tempering of stel. Isothermal transformation diagrams – coling curves superimposed on I.T.4
diagram CCR – Hardenabilty, Jominy end quench test - Austempering, martempering – case
hardening, carburizing, Nitriding, cyaniding, carbonitriding – Flame and Induction hardening – Vacum
and Plasma hardening. . UNIT I FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS METALS 9
Efect of aloying aditons on stel- α and β stabilsers– stainles and tol stels – HSLA, Maraging
stels – Cast Iron - Grey, white, maleable, spheroidal – aloy cast irons, Coper and coper aloys – Bras, Bronze and Cupronickel – Aluminium and Al-Cu – precipitation strengthening treatment – Bearing aloys, Mg-aloys, Ni-based super aloys and Titanium aloys. UNIT IV NON-METALLIC MATERIALS 9
Polymers – types of polymer, commodity and enginering polymers – Properties and aplications of
various thermoseting and thermoplastic polymers (PP, PS, PVC, PMMA, PET,PC, PA, ABS, PI, PAI,
PPO, PPS, PEEK, PTFE, Polymers – Urea and Phenol formaldehydes)- Enginering Ceramics – Properties and aplications of Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4, PSZ and SIALON –Composites-Clasifcations- Metal
Matrix and FRP - Aplications of Composites.
UNIT V MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND DEFORMATION MECHANISMS 8
Mechanisms of plastic deformation, slip and twining – Types of fracture – Testing of materials under
tension, compresion and shear loads – Hardnes tests (Brinel, Vickers and Rockwel), hardnes
tests, Impact est lzod and charpy, fatigue and crep failure mechanisms.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the diferent materials, their
procesing, heat reatments in suitable aplication in mechanical enginering fields. TEXT BOOKS:
1. Avner, S.H., “Introduction to Physical Metalurgy”, McGraw Hil Bok Company,194.
2. Wiliams D Calister, “Material Science and Enginering” Wiley India Pvt Ltd, Revised Indian
Editon 207
REFERENCES:
1. Raghavan.V, “Materials Science and Enginering”, Prentice Hal of India Pvt. Ltd., 199.
2. Keneth G.Budinski and Michael K. Budinski, “Enginering Materials”, Prentice Hal of India
Private Limited, 4th Indian Reprint 202.
3. Upadhyay. G.S. and Anish Upadhyay, “Materials Science and Enginering”, Viva Boks Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 206.
4. U.C.Jindal : Material Science and Metalurgy, "Enginering Materials and Metalurgy", First
Editon, Dorling Kindersley, 2012
GE6351 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To the study of nature and the facts about environment. To finding and implementing scientifc, technological, economic and politcal solutions to
environmental problems. To study the interelationship betwen living organism and environment. To apreciate the importance of environment by asesing its impact on the human world;
envision the surounding environment, its functions and its value.45
To study the dynamic proceses and understand the features of the earth’s interior and
surface. To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, polution control and waste
management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 12
Definiton, scope and importance of Risk and hazards; Chemical hazards, Physical hazards,
Biological hazards in the environment – concept of an ecosystem – structure and function of an
ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers-Oxygen cycle and Nitrogen cycle – energy flow
in the ecosystem – ecological sucesion proceses – Introduction, types, characteristic features,
structure and function of the (a) forest ecosystem (b) grasland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d)
aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity
definiton: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – biogeographical clasifcation of India – value of
biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, national and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of
biodiversity – threats to biodiversity: habitat los, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts –
endangered and endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity. Field study of common plants, insects, birds Field study of simple
ecosystems – pond, river, hil slopes, etc.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 10
Definiton – causes, efects and control measures of: (a) Air polution (Atmospheric chemistry- Chemical compositon of the atmosphere; Chemical and photochemical reactions in the atmosphere -
formation of smog, PAN, acid rain, oxygen and ozone chemistry;- Mitgation procedures- Control of
particulate and gaseous emision, Control of SO2, NOX, CO and HC) (b) Water polution : Physical
and chemical properties of terestrial and marine water and their environmental signifcance; Water
quality parameters – physical, chemical and biological; absorption of heavy metals - Water treatment
proceses. (c) Soil polution - soil waste management: causes, efects and control measures of
municipal solid wastes – (d) Marine polution (e) Noise polution (f) Thermal polution (g) Nuclear
hazards–role of an individual in prevention of polution – polution case studies – Field study of local
poluted site – Urban /Rural /Industrial /Agricultural.
UNIT I NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their efects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and overutilzation of
surface and ground water, dams-benefits and problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation,
environmental efects of extracting and using mineral resources, case studies – Fod resources:
World fod problems, changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing, efects of modern agriculture,
fertilzer-pesticide problems, water loging, salinity, case studies – Energy resources: Growing energy
neds, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy sources. Energy
Conversion proceses – Biogas – production and uses, anaerobic digestion; case studies – Land
resources: Land as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and
desertifcation – role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of resources
for sustainable lifestyles. Introduction to Environmental Biochemistry: Proteins –Biochemical
degradation of polutants, Bioconversion of polutants. Field study of local area to document
environmental asets – river /forest /grasland /hil / mountain.
UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resetlement and rehabiltation of
people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental organization- environmental ethics: Isues and posible solutions – 12 Principles of gren chemistry- nuclear46
acidents and holocaust, case studies. – wasteland reclamation – consumerism and waste products –
environment production act – Air act – Water act – Wildlife protection act – Forest conservation act – The Biomedical Waste (Management and Handling) Rules; 198 and amendments- scheme of
labeling of environmentaly friendly products (Ecomark). enforcement machinery involved in
environmental legislation- central and state polution control boards- disaster management: flods,
earthquake, cyclone and landslides. Public awarenes.
UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and child
welfare –Environmental impact analysis (EIA)- -GIS-remote sensing-role of information technology in
environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Environmental Polution or problems canot be solved by mere laws. Public participation is an
important aspect which serves the environmental Protection. One wil obtain knowledge on the
folowing after completing the course. Public awarenes of environmental is at infant stage. Ignorance and incomplete knowledge has lead to misconceptions
Development and improvement in std. of living has lead to serious environmental disasters
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Gilbert M.Masters, "Introduction to Environmental Enginering and Science", 2nd editon,
Pearson Education, 204. 2. Beny Joseph, "Environmental Science and Enginering", Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi, 206. REFERENCES :
1. Trivedi.R.K., "Handbok of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards", Vol. Iand I, Enviro Media, 3rd editon, BPB publications, 2010. 2. Cuningham, W.P. Coper, T.H. Gorhani, "Environmental Encyclopedia", Jaico Publ., House,
Mumbai, 201.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, "Environmental law", Prentice hal of India PVT LTD, New Delhi,
207.
4. Rajagopalan, R, "Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure", Oxford University Pres, 205.
ME6404 THERMAL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To integrate the concepts, laws and methodologies from the first course in thermodynamics
into analysis of cyclic proceses
To aply the thermodynamic concepts into various thermal aplication like IC engines, Steam
Turbines, Compresors and Refrigeration and Air conditoning systems
(Use of standard refrigerant property data bok, Steam Tables, Molier diagram and Psychrometric
chart permited)
UNIT I GAS POWER CYCLES 8
Oto, Diesel, Dual, Brayton cycles, Calculation of mean efective presure, and air standard eficiency
- Comparison of cycles.47
UNIT I INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES 10
Clasifcation - Components and their function. Valve timing diagram and port timing diagram - actual
and theoretical p-V diagram of four stroke and two stroke engines. Simple and complete Carburetor. MPFI, Diesel pump and injector system. Batery and Magneto Igniton System - Principles of
Combustion and knocking in SI and CI Engines. Lubrication and Coling systems. Performance
calculation.
UNIT I STEAM NOZZLES AND TURBINES 9
Flow of steam through nozles, shapes of nozles, efect of friction, critcal presure ratio,
supersaturated flow. Impulse and Reaction principles, compounding, velocity diagram for simple and
multi-stage turbines, sped regulations –Governors.
UNIT IV AIR COMPRESSOR 9
Clasifcation and working principle of various types of compresors, work of compresion with and
without clearance, Volumetric eficiency, Isothermal eficiency and Isentropic eficiency of
reciprocating compresors, Multistage air compresor and inter coling –work of multistage air
compresor
UNIT V REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9
Refrigerants - Vapour compresion refrigeration cycle- super heat, sub coling – Performance
calculations - working principle of vapour absorption system, Ammonia –Water, Lithium bromide – water systems (Description only) . Air conditoning system - Proceses, Types and Working
Principles. - Concept of RSHF, GSHF, ESHF- Coling Load calculations.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the diferent gas power cycles
and use of them in IC and R&AC aplications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rajput. R. K., “Thermal Enginering” S.Chand Publishers, 200
2. Kothandaraman.C.P., Domkundwar. S,Domkundwar. A.V., “A course in thermal Enginering", Fifth Editon, ”Dhanpat Rai & sons ,202
REFERENCES:
1. Sarkar, B.K,”Thermal Enginering” Tata McGraw-Hil Publishers, 207
2. Arora.C.P, ”Refrigeration and Air Conditoning ,” Tata McGraw-Hil Publishers 194
3. Ganesan V.” Internal Combustion Engines” ,Third Editon, Tata Mcgraw-Hil 207
4. Rudramorthy, R, “Thermal Enginering “,Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi,203
5. Ramalingam. K.K., "Thermal Enginering", SCITECH Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., 209.
ME641 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: To Study and acquire knowledge on various basic machining operations in special purpose
machines and its aplications in real ife manufacture of components in the industry
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Contour miling using vertical miling machine
2. Spur gear cuting in miling machine
3. Helical Gear Cuting in miling machine48
4. Gear generation in hobing machine
5. Gear generation in gear shaping machine
6. Plain Surface grinding
7. Cylindrical grinding
8. Tol angle grinding with tol and Cuter Grinder
9. Measurement of cuting forces in Miling /Turning Proces
10. CNC Part Programming.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Abilty to use diferent machine tols to manufacturing gears. Abilty to use diferent machine tols for finishing operations
Abilty to manufacture tols using cuter grinder Develop CNC part programming
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Turet and Capstan Lathes 1 No each
2 Horizontal Miling Machine 2 No
3 Vertical Miling Machine 1 No
4 Surface Grinding Machine 1 No.
5 Cylinderical Grinding Machine 1 No.
6 Radial Driling Machine 1 No.
7 lathe Tol Dynamometer 1 No
8 Miling Tol Dynamometer 1 No
9 Gear Hobing Machine 1 No
10 Tol Makers Microscope 1 No
1 CNC Lathe 1 No
12 CNC Miling machine 1 No
13 Gear Shaping machine 1 No
14 Centerles grinding machine 1 No
15 Tol and cuter grinder 1 No
ME6412 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: To study the value timing-V diagram and performance of IC Engines
To Study the characteristics of uels/Lubricates used in IC Engines
To study the Performance of steam generator/ turbine
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I.C. ENGINE LAB 30
1. Valve Timing and Port Timing diagrams.
2. Actual p-v diagrams of IC engines.
3. Performance Test on 4 – stroke Diesel Engine.
4. Heat Balance Test on 4 – stroke Diesel Engine.49
5. Morse Test on Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine.
7. Retardation Test on a Diesel Engine.
8. Determination of Flash Point and Fire Point of various fuels /lubricants.
STEAM LAB 15
1. Study on Steam Generators and Turbines.
2. Performance and Energy Balance Test on a Steam Generator.
3. Performance and Energy Balance Test on Steam Turbine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Abilty to conduct experiment on IC engine to study the characteristic and performance of IC
design/ steam turbines.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 I.C Engine – 2 stroke and 4 stroke model 1 set
2 Aparatus for Flash and Fire Point 1 No.
3 4-stroke Diesel Engine with mechanical oading. 1 No
4 4-stroke Diesel Engine with hydraulic loading. 1 No.
5 4-stroke Diesel Engine with electrical oading. 1 No.
6 Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine 1 No.
7 Single cylinder Petrol Engine 1 No.
8 Data Acquisiton system with any one of the above engines 1 No.
9 Steam Boiler with turbine setup 1 No.
CE6315 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES
To suplement the theoretical knowledge gained in Mechanics of Solids with practical testing for
determining the strength of materials under externaly aplied loads. This would enable the student to
have a clear understanding of the design for strength and stifnes
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tension test on a mild stel rod
2. Double shear test on Mild stel and Aluminium rods
3. Torsion test on mild stel rod
4. Impact est on metal specimen
5. Hardnes test on metals - Brinel and Rockwel Hardnes Number
6. Deflection test on beams
7. Compresion test on helical springs
8. Strain Measurement using Rosete strain gauge
9. Efect of hardening- Improvement in hardnes and impact resistance of stels.
10. Tempering- Improvement Mechanical properties Comparison
(i) Unhardened specimen
(i) Quenched Specimen and
(i) Quenched and tempered specimen.
1. Microscopic Examination of
(i) Hardened samples and
(i) Hardened and tempered samples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS50
OUTCOMES: Abilty to perform diferent destructive testing
Abilty to characteristic materials
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Universal Tensile Testing machine with double 1 shear atachment –
40 Ton Capacity
1
2 Torsion Testing Machine (60 NM Capacity) 1
3 Impact Testing Machine (30 J Capacity) 1
4 Brinel Hardnes Testing Machine 1
5 Rockwel Hardnes Testing Machine 1
6 Spring Testing Machine for tensile and compresive loads (250 N) 1
7 Metalurgical Microscopes 3
8 Mufle Furnace (80 C) 1
ME6501 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: • To provide an overview of how computers are being used in mechanical component design
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9
Product cycle- Design proces- sequential and concurent enginering- Computer aided design – CAD system architecture- Computer graphics – co-ordinate systems- 2D and 3D transformations- homogeneous cordinates - Line drawing -Cliping- viewing transformation
UNIT I GEOMETRIC MODELING 9
Representation of curves- Hermite curve- Bezier curve- B-spline curves-rational curves-Techniques
for surface modeling – surface patch- Cons and bicubic patches- Bezier and B-spline surfaces. Solid
modeling techniques- CSG and B-rep
UNIT I VISUAL REALISM 9
Hiden – Line-Surface-Solid removal algorithms – shading – colouring – computer animation.
UNIT IV ASSEMBLY OF PARTS 9
Asembly modeling – interferences of positons and orientation – tolerance analysis-masproperty
calculations – mechanism simulation and interference checking.
UNIT V CAD STANDARDS 9
Standards for computer graphics- Graphical Kernel System (GKS) - standards for exchangeimages- Open Graphics Library (OpenGL) - Data exchange standards - IGES, STEP, CALSetc. - communication standards.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to use computer and CAD software's for
modeling of mechanical components51
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Zeid “Mastering CAD CAM” Tata McGraw-Hil Publishing Co.207
REFERENCES:
1. Chris McMahon and Jimmie Browne “CAD/CAM Principles", "Practice and Manufacturing
management “ Second Editon, Pearson Education, 199.
2. Wiliam M Neuman and Robert F.Sproul “Principles of Computer Graphics”, McGraw Hil
Bok Co. Singapore, 1989.
3. Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker “Computer Graphics”’. Prentice Hal, Inc, 192.
4. Foley, Wan Dam, Feiner and Hughes - "Computer graphics principles & practice" Pearson
Education - 203.
ME6502 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the mechanisms of heat ransfer under steady and transient conditons. To understand the concepts of heat ransfer through extended surfaces. To learn the thermal analysis and sizing of heat exchangers and to understand the basic
concepts of mas transfer.
(Use of standard HMT data bok permited)
UNIT I CONDUCTION 9
General Diferential equation of Heat Conduction– Cartesian and Polar Cordinates – One
Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction – plane and Composite Systems – Conduction with
Internal Heat Generation – Extended Surfaces – Unsteady Heat Conduction – Lumped Analysis – Semi Infinite and Infinite Solids –Use of Heisler’s charts.
UNIT I CONVECTION 9
Fre and Forced Convection - Hydrodynamic and Thermal Boundary Layer. Fre and Forced
Convection during external flow over Plates and Cylinders and Internal flow through tubes . UNIT I PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT EXCHANGERS 9
Nuselt’s theory of condensation - Regimes of Pol boilng and Flow boilng. Corelations in boilng
and condensation. Heat Exchanger Types - Overal Heat Transfer Coeficient – Fouling Factors - Analysis – LMTD method - NTU method.
UNIT IV RADIATION 9
Black Body Radiation – Grey body radiation - Shape Factor – Electrical Analogy – Radiation Shields.
Radiation through gases.
UNIT V MASS TRANSFER 9
Basic Concepts – Difusion Mas Transfer – Fick’s Law of Difusion – Steady state Molecular Difusion
– Convective Mas Transfer – Momentum, Heat and Mas Transfer Analogy –Convective Mas
Transfer Corelations.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to understand and aply diferent heat
and mas transfer principles of diferent aplications.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Yunus A. Cengel, "Heat Transfer A Practical Aproach", Tata McGraw Hil, 201052
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewit, "Fundamentals of Heat and Mas Transfer", John
Wiley & Sons, 198.
2. Venkateshan. S.P., "Heat Transfer", Ane Boks, New Delhi, 204.
3. Ghoshdastidar, P.S, "Heat Transfer", Oxford, 204,
4. Nag, P.K., "Heat Transfer", Tata McGraw Hil, New Delhi, 202
5. Holman, J.P., "Heat and Mas Transfer", Tata McGraw Hil, 200
6. Ozisik, M.N., "Heat Transfer", McGraw Hil Bok Co., 194.
7. Kothandaraman, C.P., "Fundamentals of Heat and Mas Transfer", New Age International,
New Delhi, 198.
8. Yadav, R., "Heat and Mas Transfer", Central Publishing House, 195.
9. M.Thirumaleshwar : Fundamentals of Heat and Mas Transfer, "Heat and Mas Transfer",
First Editon, Dorling Kindersley, 209
ME6503 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
• To familarize the various steps involved in the Design Proces
• To understand the principles involved in evaluating the shape and dimensions of a component
to satisfy functional and strength requirements. • To learn to use standard practices and standard data
• To learn to use catalogues and standard machine components
(Use of P S G Design Data Bok is permited)
UNIT I STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE MEMBERS 10
Introduction to the design proces - factors influencing machine design, selection of materials based
on mechanical properties - Prefered numbers, fits and tolerances – Direct, Bending and torsional
stres equations – Impact and shock loading – calculation of principle streses for various load
combinations, ecentric loading – curved beams – crane hok and ‘C’ frame- Factor of safety -
theories of failure – Design based on strength and stifnes – stres concentration – Design for
variable loading.
UNIT I SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS 8
Design of solid and holow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critcal sped – Keys, keyways and
splines - Rigid and flexible couplings.
UNIT I TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT JOINTS 9
Threaded fastners - Bolted joints including ecentric loading, Knuckle joints, Coter joints – Welded
joints, riveted joints for structures - theory of bonded joints.
UNIT IV ENERGY STORING ELEMENTS AND ENGINE COMPONENTS 9
Various types of springs, optimization of helical springs - ruber springs - Flywhels considering
streses in rims and arms for engines and punching machines- Conecting Rods and crank shafts.
UNIT V BEARINGS 9
Sliding contact and roling contact bearings - Hydrodynamic journal bearings, Sommerfeld Number,
Raimondi and Boyd graphs, - Selection of Roling Contact bearings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS53
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to sucesfuly design machine
components
TEXT BOOK:
1. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Bok Co, 2010.
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbet “Mechanical
Enginering Design”, 8th Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 208.
REFERENCES:
1. Sundararajamorthy T. V. Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publications,
Chenai, 203.
2. Robert C. Juvinal and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Design”, 4
th Editon, Wiley,
205
3. Alfred Hal, Halowenko, A and Laughlin, H., “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hil
BokCo.(Schaum’s Outline), 2010
4. Bernard Hamrock, Steven Schmid,Bo Jacobson, “Fundamentals of Machine Elements”,2nd
Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Bok Co., 206.
5. Orthwein W, “Machine Component Design”, Jaico Publishing Co, 203.
6. Ansel Ugural, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Aproach", 1st Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Bok
Co, 203.
7. Merhyle F. Spots, Tery E. Shoup and Le E. Hornberger, “Design of Machine Elements”
8th Editon, Printice Hal, 203.
ME6504 METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To provide knowledge on various Metrological equipments available to measure the dimension
of the components. To provide knowledge on the corect procedure to be adopted to measure the dimension of
the components.
UNIT I .BASICS OF METROLOGY 5
Introduction to Metrology – Ned – Elements – Work piece, Instruments – Persons – Environment –
their efect on Precision and Acuracy – Erors – Erors in Measurements – Types – Control – Types
of standards.
UNIT I LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENTS 10
Linear Measuring Instruments – Evolution – Types – Clasifcation – Limit gauges – gauge design –
terminology – procedure – concepts of interchange abilty and selective asembly – Angular
measuring instruments – Types – Bevel protractor clinometers angle gauges, spirt levels sine bar – Angle alignment elescope – Autocolimator – Aplications.
UNIT I ADVANCES IN METROLOGY 12
Basic concept of lasers Advantages of lasers – laser Interferometers – types – DC and AC Lasers
interferometer – Aplications – Straightnes – Alignment. Basic concept of CMM – Types of CMM – Constructional features – Probes – Acesories – Software – Aplications – Basic concepts of
Machine Vision System – Element – Aplications.54
UNIT IV FORM MEASUREMENT 10
Principles and Methods of straightnes – Flatnes measurement – Thread measurement, gear
measurement, surface finish measurement, Roundnes measurement – Aplications.
UNIT V MEASUREMENT OF POWER, FLOW AND TEMPERATURE 8
Force, torque, power - mechanical , Pneumatic, Hydraulic and Electrical type. Flow measurement:
Venturimeter, Orifce meter, rotameter, pitot tube – Temperature: bimetalic strip, thermocouples,
electrical resistance thermometer – Reliabilty and Calibration – Readabilty and Reliabilty.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the Students can demonstrate diferent measurement
technologies and use of them in Industrial Components
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K. “Enginering Metrology”, Khana Publishers, 205.
2. Gupta. I.C., “Enginering Metrology”, Dhanpatrai Publications, 205.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles Reginald Shotbolt, “Metrology for Enginers”, 5
th editon, Cengage Learning
EMEA,190.
2. Backwith, Marangoni, Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements”, Pearson Education ,206.
ME6505 DYNAMICS OF MACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the force-motion relationship in components subjected to external forces and
analysis of standard mechanisms. To understand the undesirable efects of unbalances resulting from prescribed motions in
mechanism. To understand the efect of Dynamics of undesirable vibrations. To understand the principles in mechanisms used for sped control and stabilty control. UNIT I FORCE ANALYSIS 9
Dynamic force analysis – Inertia force and Inertia torque– D Alembert’s principle –Dynamic Analysis in
reciprocating engines – Gas forces – Inertia efect of conecting rod– Bearing loads – Crank shaft
torque – Turning moment diagrams –Fly Whels – Flywhels of punching preses- Dynamics of Camfolower
mechanism.
UNIT I BALANCING 9
Static and dynamic balancing – Balancing of rotating mases – Balancing a single cylinder engine – Balancing of Multi-cylinder inline, V-engines – Partial balancing in engines – Balancing of linkages – Balancing machines-Field balancing of discs and rotors.
UNIT I SINGLE DEGREE FREE VIBRATION 9
Basic features of vibratory systems – Degres of redom – single degre of redom – Fre vibration
– Equations of motion – Natural frequency – Types of Damping – Damped vibration– Torsional
vibration of shaft – Critcal speds of shafts – Torsional vibration – Two and thre rotor torsional
systems.5
UNIT IV FORCED VIBRATION 9
Response of one degre fredom systems to periodic forcing – Harmonic disturbances –Disturbance
caused by unbalance – Suport motion –transmisibilty – Vibration isolation vibration measurement.
UNIT V MECHANISM FOR CONTROL 9
Governors – Types – Centrifugal governors – Gravity controled and spring controled centrifugal
governors – Characteristics – Efect of friction – Controling force curves. Gyroscopes –Gyroscopic
forces and torques – Gyroscopic stabilzation – Gyroscopic efects in Automobiles, ships and
airplanes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the Students can able to predict the force analysis in
mechanical system and related vibration isues and can able to solve the problem
TEXT BOOK:
1. Uicker, J.J., Penock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms” ,3rd
Editon, Oxford University Pres, 209.
2. Ratan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 209
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Bevan, "Theory of Machines", 3rd Editon, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 205.
2. Cleghorn. W. L, “Mechanisms of Machines”, Oxford University Pres, 205
3. Benson H. Tongue, ”Principles of Vibrations”, Oxford University Pres, 2nd Editon, 207
4. Robert L. Norton, "Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery", Tata McGraw-Hil, 209.
5. Alen S. Hal Jr., “Kinematics and Linkage Design”, Prentice Hal, 1961
6. Ghosh. A and Malick, A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", Afilated East-West Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 198.
7. Rao.J.S. and Dukipati.R.V. "Mechanisms and Machine Theory", Wiley-Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi, 192.
8. John Hanah and Stephens R.C., "Mechanics of Machines", Viva Low-Prices Student Editon,
199.
9. Grover. G.T., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Nem Chand and Bros., 196
10. Wiliam T. Thomson, Marie Dilon Dahleh, Chandramouli Padmanabhan, “Theory of Vibration
with Aplication”, 5th editon, Pearson Education, 201
1. V.Ramamurthi, "Mechanics of Machines", Narosa Publishing House, 202.
12. Khurmi, R.S.,”Theory of Machines”, 14th Editon, S Chand Publications, 205.
GE6075 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enable the students to create an awarenes on Enginering Ethics and Human Values, to
instil Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to apreciate the rights of others.
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10
Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefuly – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Coperation – Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirtuality – Introduction to Yoga and
meditation for profesional excelence and stres management.56
UNIT I ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Senses of ‘Enginering Ethics’ – Variety of moral isues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral
Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Giligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
profesional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories
UNIT I ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Enginering as Experimentation – Enginers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics – A Balanced Outlok on Law.
UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Safety and Risk – Asesment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk - Respect for Authority – Colective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Ocupational
Crime – Profesional Rights – Employe Rights – Intelectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development – Enginers as Managers – Consulting Enginers – Enginers as Expert Witneses and Advisors – Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibilty
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to aply ethics in society, discus
the ethical isues related to enginering and realize the responsibilties and rights in the
society
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Enginering”, Tata McGraw Hil, New Delhi,
203.
2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Enginering Ethics”, Prentice Hal of India,
New Delhi, 204.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Flederman, “Enginering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hal, New Jersey, 204.
2. Charles E. Haris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Enginering Ethics – Concepts
and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 209
3. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Busines”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 203
4. Edmund G Sebauer and Robert L Bary, “Fundametals of Ethics for Scientists and
Enginers”, Oxford University Pres, Oxford, 201
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Busines Ethics: Decision Making for Personal
Integrity and Social Responsibilty” Mc Graw Hil education, India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, " Value Education", Vethathir publications, Erode, 201
Web sources:
1. www.onlinethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org57
ME651 DYNAMICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: • To suplement he principles learnt in kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery. • To understand how certain measuring devices are used for dynamic testing.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. a) Study of gear parameters.
b) Experimental study of velocity ratios of simple, compound, Epicyclic and diferential gear trains.
2. a) Kinematics of Four Bar, Slider Crank, Crank Rocker, Double crank, Double rocker, Oscilating
cylinder Mechanisms.
b) Kinematics of single and double universal joints.
3. a) Determination of Mas moment of inertia of Fly whel and Axle system.
b) Determination of Mas Moment of Inertia of axisymmetric bodies using Turn Table aparatus.
c) Determination of Mas Moment of Inertia using biflar suspension and compound
pendulum.
4. Motorized gyroscope – Study of gyroscopic efect and couple.
5. Governor - Determination of range sensitvity, efort etc., for Wats, Porter, Proel, and
Hartnel Governors.
6. Cams – Cam profile drawing, Motion curves and study of jump phenomenon
7. a) Single degre of redom Spring Mas System – Determination of natural
Frequency and verifcation of Laws of springs – Damping coeficient determination.
b) Multi degre fredom suspension system – Determination of influence coeficient.
8. a) Determination of torsional natural frequency of single and Double Rotor systems.- Undamped and Damped Natural frequencies.
b) Vibration Absorber – Tuned vibration absorber.
9. Vibration of Equivalent Spring mas system – undamped and damped vibration.
10. Whirling of shafts – Determination of critcal speds of shafts with concentrated loads.
1. a) Balancing of rotating mases. (b) Balancing of reciprocating mases.
12. a) Transverse vibration of Fre-Fre beam – with and without concentrated mases.
b) Forced Vibration of Cantilever beam – Mode shapes and natural frequencies.
c) Determination of transmisibilty ratio using vibrating table.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
Abilty to demonstrate the principles of kinematics and dynamics of machinery
Abilty to use the measuring devices for dynamic testing.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Cam folower setup. 1 No.
2 Motorised gyroscope. 1 No.
3 Governor aparatus - Wat, Porter, Proel and Hartnel governors. 1 No.
4 Whirling of shaft aparatus. 1 No.
5 Dynamic balancing machine. 1 No.
6 Two rotor vibration setup. 1 No.
7 Spring mas vibration system. 1 No.
8 Torsional Vibration of single rotor system setup. 1 No.
9 Gear Models 1 No.
10 Kinematic Models to study various mechanisms. 1 No.
1 Turn table aparatus. 1 No.
12 Transverse vibration setup of
a) cantilever
1 No.58
b) Fre-Fre beam
c) Simply suported beam.
ME6512 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES
To study the heat ransfer phenomena predict he relevant coeficient using implementation
To study the performance of refrigeration cycle / components
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
HEAT TRANSFER LAB: 30
1. Thermal conductivity measurement using guarded plate aparatus.
2. Thermal conductivity measurement of pipe insulation using laged pipe aparatus.
3. Determination of heat ransfer coeficient under natural convection from a vertical cylinder.
4. Determination of heat ransfer coeficient under forced convection from a tube.
5. Determination of Thermal conductivity of composite wal.
6. Determination of Thermal conductivity of insulating powder.
7. Heat ransfer from pin-fin aparatus (natural & forced convection modes)
8. Determination of Stefan – Boltzman constant.
9. Determination of emisivity of a grey surface.
10. Efectivenes of Paralel /counter flow heat exchanger.
REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING LAB 15
1. Determination of COP of a refrigeration system
2. Experiments on Psychrometric proceses
3. Performance test on a reciprocating air compresor
4. Performance test in a HC Refrigeration System
5. Performance test in a fluidized Bed Coling Tower
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Abilty to demonstrate the fundamentals of heat and predict he coeficient used in that ransfer
aplication and also design refrigeration cycle.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Guarded plate aparatus 1 No.
2 Laged pipe aparatus 1 No.
3 Natural convection-vertical cylinder aparatus 1 No.
4 Forced convection inside tube aparatus 1 No.
5 Composite wal aparatus 1 No.
6 Thermal conductivity of insulating powder aparatus 1 No.
7 Pin-fin aparatus 1 No.
8 Stefan-Boltzman aparatus 1 No.
9 Emisivity measurement aparatus 1 No.
10 Paralel/counter flow heat exchanger aparatus 1 No.59
1 Single/two stage reciprocating air compresor 1 No.
12 Refrigeration test rig 1 No.
13 Air-conditoning test rig 1 No.
ME6513 METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES
To familar with diferent measurement equipments and use of this industry for quality
inspection
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tol Maker’s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Toth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Co ordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
1. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocolimator
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Abilty to handle diferent measurement ols and perform measurements in quality impulsion
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Micrometer 5
2 Vernier Caliper 5
3 Vernier Height Gauge 2
4 Vernier depth Gauge 2
5 Slip Gauge Set 1
6 Gear Toth Vernier 1
7 Sine Bar 1
8 Floating Cariage Micrometer 1
9 Profile Projector /Tol Makers Microscope 1
10 Paralel / counter flow heat exchanger aparatus 1
1 Mechanical /Electrical /Pneumatic Comparator 1
12 Autocolimator 1
13 Temperature Measuring Setup 1
14 Force Measuring Setup 1
15 Torque Measuring Setup 1
16 Cordinate measuring machine 160
17 Surface finish measuring equipment 1
18 Bore gauge 1
19 Telescope gauge 1
ME601 DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of Mechanical power
Transmision components. To understand the standard procedure available for Design of Transmision of Mechanical
elements
To learn to use standard data and catalogues
(Use of P S G Design Data Bok permited)
UNIT I DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS 9
Design of Flat belts and puleys - Selection of V belts and puleys – Selection of hoisting wire ropes
and puleys – Design of Transmision chains and Sprockets.
UNIT I SPUR GEARS AND PARALLEL AXIS HELICAL GEARS 9
Sped ratios and number of teth-Force analysis -Toth streses - Dynamic efects – Fatigue strength
- Factor of safety - Gear materials – Design of straight toth spur & helical gears based on strength
and wear considerations – Presure angle in the normal and transverse plane- Equivalent number of
teth-forces for helical gears.
UNIT I BEVEL, WORM AND CROSS HELICAL GEARS 9
Straight bevel gear: Toth terminology, toth forces and streses, equivalent number of teth.
Estimating the dimensions of pair of straight bevel gears. Worm Gear: Merits and demeritsterminology.
Thermal capacity, materials-forces and streses, eficiency, estimating the size of the
worm gear pair. Cros helical: Terminology-helix angles-Estimating the size of the pair of cros helical
gears.
UNIT IV GEAR BOXES 9
Geometric progresion - Standard step ratio - Ray diagram, kinematics layout -Design of sliding mesh
gear box - Design of multi sped gear box for machine tol aplications - Constant mesh gear box - Sped reducer unit. – Variable sped gear box, Fluid Couplings, Torque Converters for automotive
aplications.
UNIT V CAMS, CLUTCHES AND BRAKES 9
Cam Design: Types-presure angle and under cuting base circle determination-forces and surface
streses. Design of plate clutches –axial clutches-cone clutches-internal expanding rim clutches- Electromagnetic clutches. Band and Block brakes - external shoe brakes – Internal expanding shoe
brake.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to sucesfuly design transmision
components used in Engine and machines61
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Bok Co, 2010.
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbet “Mechanical
Enginering Design”, 8th Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 208.
REFERENCES:
1. Sundararajamorthy T. V, Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publications,
Chenai, 203.
2. Gitn Maitra, L. Prasad “Hand bok of Mechanical Design”, 2nd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil,
201.
3. Prabhu. T.J., “Design of Transmision Elements”, Mani Ofset, Chenai, 200.
4. C.S.Sharma, Kamlesh Purohit, “Design of Machine Elements”, Prentice Hal of India, Pvt. Ltd.,
203.
5. Bernard Hamrock, Steven Schmid, Bo Jacobson, “Fundamentals of Machine Elements”,
2nd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Bok Co., 206.
6. Robert C. Juvinal and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Design”, 4
th Editon, Wiley,
205
7. Alfred Hal, Halowenko, A and Laughlin, H., “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hil
BokCo.(Schaum’s Outline), 2010
8. Orthwein W, “Machine Component Design”, Jaico Publishing Co, 203.
9. Ansel Ugural, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Aproach", 1st Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil
Bok Co, 203.
10. Merhyle F. Spots, Tery E. Shoup and Le E. Hornberger, “Design of Machine Elements”
8
th Editon, Printice Hal, 203.
1. U.C.Jindal :Machine Design, "Design of Transmision System", Dorling Kindersley, 2010
MG6851 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enable the students to study the evolution of Management, to study the functions and
principles of management and to learn the aplication of the principles in an organization .
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9
Definiton of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers - managerial roles and skils – Evolution of Management – Scientifc, human relations , system and
contingency aproaches – Types of Busines organization - Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and Environment – Curent
trends and isues in Management.
UNIT I PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planing – planing proces – types of planing – objectives – seting
objectives – policies – Planing premises – Strategic Management – Planing Tols and Techniques – Decision making steps and proces.
UNIT I ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization structure
– types – Line and staf authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority – centralization and
decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planing, Recruitment,62
selection, Training and Development, Performance Management ,Carer planing and management.
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – proces of communication – barier in communication – efective communication –
communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and proces of controling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control and
performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course, students wil be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planing, organizing, stafing, leading & controling and have same
basic knowledge on international aspect of management
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Stephen P. Robins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hal (India)Pvt. Ltd., 10th Editon,
209.
2. JAF Stoner, Freman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Editon, Pearson
Education, 204.
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen A. Robins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of Management”
7
th Editon, Pearson Education, 201.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, “ Management”, Biztantra, 208.
3. Harold Kontz & Heinz Weihrich, “Esentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hil, 198.
4. Tripathy PC & Redy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hil, 199
ME602 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the construction and working principle of various parts of an automobile. To have the practice for asembling and dismantling of engine parts and transmision system
UNIT I VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES 9
Types of automobiles, vehicle construction and diferent layouts, chasis, frame and
body, Vehicle aerodynamics (various resistances and moments involved), IC engines –componentsfunctions
and materials, variable valve timing (VVT).
UNIT I ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9
Electronicaly controled gasoline injection system for SI engines, Electronicaly
controled diesel injection system (Unit injector system, Rotary distributor type and
common rail direct injection system), Electronic igniton system (Transistorized coil igniton system,
capacitve discharge igniton system), Turbo chargers (WGT, VGT), Engine emision control by thre
way catalytic converter system, Emision norms (Euro and BS).63
UNIT I TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9
Clutch-types and construction, gear boxes- manual and automatic, gear shift mechanisms, Over drive,
transfer box, fluid flywhel, torque converter, propeler shaft, slip joints, universal joints ,Diferential
and rear axle, Hotchkis Drive and Torque Tube Drive.
UNIT IV STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 9
Stering geometry and types of stering gear box-Power Stering, Types of Front Axle,
Types of Suspension Systems, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Braking Systems, Antilock Braking System
(ABS), electronic brake force distribution (EBD) and Traction Control.
UNIT V ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Use of Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas, Bio-diesel, Bio-ethanol, Gasohol and
Hydrogen in Automobiles- Engine modifcations required –Performance, Combustion and Emision
Characteristics of SI and CI engines with these alternate fuels - Electric and Hybrid Vehicles, Fuel Cel
Note: Practical Training in dismantling and asembling of Engine parts and Transmision Systems
should be given to the students.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students wil be able to identify the diferent components in
automobile enginering. Have clear understanding on diferent auxilary and transmision systems usual.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Enginering”, Vol 1 & 2, Seventh Editon, Standard Publishers, New
Delhi, 197.
2. Jain K.K. and Asthana .R.B, “Automobile Enginering” Tata McGraw Hil Publishers, New
Delhi, 202.
REFERENCES:
1. Newton ,Steds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Buterworth Publishers,1989.
2. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics,” Second Editon, East-West Pres, 199.
3. Martin W, Stockel and Martin T Stockle , “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” The God
heart –Wil Cox Company Inc, USA ,1978.
4. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology,” SAE International Publications USA, 198.
5. Ganesan V. “Internal Combustion Engines”, Third Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 207.
ME603 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To introduce the concepts of Mathematical Modeling of Enginering Problems. To apreciate the use of FEM to a range of Enginering Problems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical Background – Mathematical Modeling of field problems in Enginering – Governing
Equations – Discrete and continuous models – Boundary, Inital and Eigen Value problems– Weighted
Residual Methods – Variational Formulation of Boundary Value Problems – RitzTechnique – Basic
concepts of the Finite Element Method.64
UNIT I ONE-DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 9
One Dimensional Second Order Equations – Discretization – Element types- Linear and Higher order
Elements – Derivation of Shape functions and Stifnes matrices and force vectors- Asembly of
Matrices - Solution of problems from solid mechanics and heat transfer. Longitudinal vibration
frequencies and mode shapes. Fourth Order Beam Equation –Transverse deflections and Natural
frequencies of beams.
UNIT I TWO DIMENSIONAL SCALAR VARIABLE PROBLEMS 9
Second Order 2D Equations involving Scalar Variable Functions – Variational formulation –Finite
Element formulation – Triangular elements – Shape functions and element matrices and vectors.
Aplication to Field Problems - Thermal problems – Torsion of Non circular shafts –Quadrilateral
elements – Higher Order Elements.
UNIT IV TWO DIMENSIONAL VECTOR VARIABLE PROBLEMS 9
Equations of elasticity – Plane stres, plane strain and axisymmetric problems – Body forces and
temperature efects – Stres calculations - Plate and shel elements.
UNIT V ISOPARAMETRIC FORMULATION 9
Natural co-ordinate systems – Isoparametric elements – Shape functions for iso parametric elements – One and two dimensions – Serendipity elements – Numerical integration and aplication to plane
stres problems - Matrix solution techniques – Solutions Techniques to Dynamic problems –
Introduction to Analysis Software.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to understand diferent mathematical
Techniques used in FEM analysis and use of them in Structural and thermal problem
TEXT BOOK:
1. Redy. J.N., “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil,
205
2. Seshu, P, “Text Bok of Finite Element Analysis”, Prentice-Hal of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
207.
REFERENCES:
1. Rao, S.S., “The Finite Element Method in Enginering”, 3rd Editon, Buterworth Heineman,
204
2. Logan, D.L., “A first course in Finite Element Method”, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., 202
3. Robert D. Cok, David S. Malkus, Michael E. Plesha, Robert J. Wit, “Concepts and
Aplications of Finite Element Analysis”, 4th Editon, Wiley Student Editon, 202.
4. Chandrupatla & Belagundu, “Introduction to Finite Elements in Enginering”, 3rd Editon,
Prentice Hal Colege Div, 190
5. Bhati Asghar M, "Fundamental Finite Element Analysis and Aplications", John Wiley & Sons,
205 (Indian Reprint 2013)*
ME604 GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the basic diference betwen incompresible and compresible flow.65
To understand the phenomenon of shock waves and its efect on flow. To gain some basic
knowledge about jet propulsion and Rocket Propulsion.
(Use of Standard Gas Tables permited)
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND ISENTROPIC FLOWS 6
Energy and momentum equations of compresible fluid flows – Stagnation states, Mach waves and
Mach cone – Efect of Mach number on compresibilty – Isentropic flow through variable ducts – Nozle and Difusers
UNIT I FLOW THROUGH DUCTS 9
Flows through constant area ducts with heat transfer (Rayleigh flow) and Friction (Fano flow) –
variation of low properties.
UNIT I NORMAL AND OBLIQUE SHOCKS 10
Governing equations – Variation of low parameters acros the normal and oblique shocks – Prandtl – Meyer relations – Aplications.
UNIT IV JET PROPULSION 10
Theory of jet propulsion – Thrust equation – Thrust power and propulsive eficiency – Operating
principle, cycle analysis and use of stagnation state performance of ram jet, turbojet, turbofan and
turbo prop engines.
UNIT V SPACE PROPULSION 10
Types of rocket engines – Propelants-feding systems – Igniton and combustion – Theory of rocket
propulsion – Performance study – Staging – Terminal and characteristic velocity – Aplications –
space flights.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to sucesfuly aply gas dynamics
principles in the Jet and Space Propulsion
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anderson, J.D., "Modern Compresible flow", 3
rd Editon, McGraw Hil, 203.
2. Yahya, S.M. "Fundamentals of Compresible Flow", New Age International (P) Limited, New
Delhi, 196.
REFERENCES:
1. Hil. P. and C. Peterson, "Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion", Adison – Wesley
Publishing company, 192.
2. Zucrow. N.J., "Aircraft and Misile Propulsion", Vol.1 & I, John Wiley, 1975.
3. Zucrow. N.J., "Principles of Jet Propulsion and Gas Turbines", John Wiley, New York, 1970.
4. Suton. G.P., "Rocket Propulsion Elements", John wiley, New York,1986,.
5. Shapiro. A.H.," Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compresible fluid Flow", John wiley, New
York, 1953. 6. Ganesan. V., "Gas Turbines", Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Co., New Delhi, 199.
7. Somasundaram. PR.S.L., "Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsions", New Age International
Publishers, 196.
8. Babu. V., "Fundamentals of Gas Dynamics", ANE Boks India, 208.
9. Cohen. H., G.E.C. Rogers and Saravanamuto, "Gas Turbine Theory", Longman Group Ltd.,
1980.6
ME61 CAD /CAM LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modeling software systems.
• To study the features of CNC Machine Tol.
• To expose students to modern control systems (Fanuc, Siemens etc.,)
• To know the aplication of various CNC machines like CNC lathe, CNC Vertical Machining
centre, CNC EDM and CNC wire-cut and studying of Rapid prototyping.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. 3D GEOMETRIC MODELLING 24 PERIODS
List of Experiments
1. Introduction of 3D Modeling software
Creation of 3D asembly model of folowing machine elements using 3D Modeling software
2. Flange Coupling
3. Plummer Block
4. Screw Jack
5. Lathe Tailstock
6. Universal Joint
7. Machine Vice
8. Stufing box
9. Croshead
10. Safety Valves
1. Non-return valves
12. Conecting rod
13. Piston
14. Crankshaft
* Students may also be trained in manual drawing of some of the above components
2. Manual Part Programming. 21 PERIODS
(i) Part Programming - CNC Machining Centre
a) Linear Cuting.
b) Circular cuting.
c) Cuter Radius Compensation.
d) Caned Cycle Operations.
(i) Part Programming - CNC Turning Centre
a) Straight, Taper and Radius Turning.
b) Thread Cuting.
c) Rough and Finish Turning Cycle.
d) Driling and Taping Cycle.
3. Computer Aided Part Programming
e) CL Data and Post proces generation using CAM packages.
f) Aplication of CAPP in Machining and Turning Centre.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS67
OUTCOMES
Abilty to develop 2D and 3D models using modeling softwares. Abilty to understand the CNC control in modern manufacturing system. Abilty to prepare CNC part programming and perform manufacturing.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. Description of Equipment Qty
HARDWARE
1. Computer Server 1
2. Computer nodes or systems (High end CPU with atleast 1
GB main memory) networked to the server 30
3. A3 size ploter 1
4. Laser Printer 1
5. CNC Lathe 1
6. CNC miling machine 1
SOFTWARE
7. Any High end integrated modeling and manufacturing CAD
/ CAM software 15 licenses
8. CAM Software for machining centre and turning centre
(CNC Programming and tol path simulation for FANUC /
Sinumeric and Heidenhain controler)
15 licenses
9. Licensed operating system Adequate
10. Suport for CAPP Adequate
ME612 DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROJECT L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES: The main objective is to give an oportunity to the student to get hands on training in the
fabrication of one or more components of a complete working model, which is designed by
them.
GUIDELINE FOR REVIEW AND EVALUATION
The students may be grouped into 2 to 4 and work under a project supervisor. The device/
system/component(s) to be fabricated may be decided in consultation with the supervisor and if
posible with an industry. A project report to be submited by the group and the fabricated model, which wil be reviewed and evaluated for internal asesment by a Commite constiuted by the
Head of the Department. At the end of the semester examination the project work is evaluated based
on oral presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal examiners constiuted by
the Head of the Department.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Use of design principles and develop conceptual and enginering design of any components. Abilty to fabricate any components using diferent manufacturing tols.68
GE6563 COMMUNICATION SKILLS – LABORATORY BASED L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES: To provide oportunites to learners to practice their communicative skils to make them
become proficient users of English. To enable learners to fine-tune their linguistic skils (LSRW) with the help of technology to
communicate globaly. To enhance the performance of learners at placement interviews and group discusions and
other recruitment procedures.
UNIT I LISTENING /VIEWING 10
Listening and note-taking – Listening to telephonic conversations – Ted talks – Inspirng Speches – Watching documentaries on personalites, places, socio-cultural events, TV news programmes and
discusions to answer diferent kinds questions, viz., identifying key idea and comprehension
questions… so on.
UNIT I SPEAKING 12
Conversation practice – Interview – Group Discusion – Introducing oneself and others – Role play – Debate – Presentation – Panel discusion – Neutral acent. UNIT I READING 10
Diferent genres of text (literature, media, technical) for comprehension – Reading strategies like note- making – reading graphs, charts and graphic organizer – Sequencing sentences – reading online
sources like e-boks, e-journals and e-newspapers.
UNIT IV WRITING 12
Blogs – Twets – Online resume/ – e-mails – SMS and Online texting – Report writng – Describing
charts and tables – Writng for media on curent events.
UNIT V VOCABULARY 8
Idioms and Phrases – Proverbs – Colocations – Chunks of language.
UNIT VI GRAMMAR 8
Sentence structures – Subject-Verb agrement – Pronoun-Antecedent agrement – Tense forms – Active and pasive voices – Direct and Indirect speches – Cohesive devices.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Teaching Methods:
1. To be totaly learner-centric with minimum teacher intervention as the course revolves around
practice.
2. Suitable audio/video samples from Podcast/YouTube to be used for ilustrative purposes.
3. Portfolio aproach for writng to be folowed. Learners are to be encouraged to blog, twet, text
and email employing apropriate language.
4. GD/Interview/Role Play/Debate could be conducted of the laboratory (in a regular clasrom)
but learners are to be exposed to telephonic interview and video conferencing.
5. Learners are to be asigned to read/write/listen/view materials outside the clasrom as wel
for graining proficiency and beter participation in the clas.
Lab Infrastructure:
S. No. Description of Equipment (minimum configuration) Qty Required
1 Server 1 No. PIV System
1 GB RAM /40 GB HDD69
OS: Win 200 server Audio card with headphones
JRE 1.3
2 Client Systems 60 Nos. PI System
256 or 512 MB RAM /40 GB HDD
OS: Win 200
Audio card with headphones
JRE 1.3
3 Handicam 1 No.
4 Television 46” 1 No.
5 Colar mike 1 No.
6 Cordles mike 1 No.
7 Audio Mixer 1 No.
8 DVD recorder/player 1 No.
9 LCD Projector with MP3/CD/DVD provision for
Audio/video facilty
1 No.
Evaluation:
Internal: 20 marks
Record maintenance: Students should write a report on a regular basis on the activites
conducted, focusing on the details such as the description of the activity, ideas emerged,
learning outcomes and so on. At the end of the semester records can be evaluated out of 20
marks.
External: 80 marks
Online Test - 35 marks
Interview - 15 marks
Presentation - 15 marks
Group Discusion - 15 marks
Note on Internal and External Evaluation:
1. Interview – mock interview can be conducted on one-on-one basis.
2. Speaking – example for role play:
a. Marketing enginer convincing a customer to buy his product.
b. Telephonic conversation- fixing an oficial apointment /placing an order /enquirng
and so on.
3. Presentation – should be extempore on simple topics
4. Discusion – topics of diferent kinds; general topics, case studies and abstract concept
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners should be able to
Take international examination such as IELTS and TOEFL
Make presentations and Participate in Group Discusions. Sucesfuly answer questions in interviews. REFERENCES:
1. Barker, A. “Improve Your Communication Skils”, New Delhi: Kogan Page India Pvt. Ltd.,
206.
2. Craven, Miles. “Listening Extra – A resource book of multi-level skils activities”, Cambridge University Pres, 204.70
3. Gammidge, Mick, “Speaking Extra - A resource book of multi-level skils activities”,
Cambridge University Pres, 204.
4. Hartley, Peter. “Group Communication”, London: Routledge, 204.
5. John Sely, “The Oxford Guide to Writing and Speaking” , New Delhi: Oxford University
Pres, 204.
6. Naterop, Jean & Rod Revel, “Telephoning in English”, Cambridge University Pres, 1987.
7. Ramesh, Gopalswamy and Mahadevan Ramesh, “The ACE of Soft Skils”. New Delhi:
Pearson, 2010.
Web Sources:
www.humanresources.about.com
www.careride.com
ME6701 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: Providing an overview of Power Plants and detailng the role of Mechanical Enginers in their
operation and maintenance.
UNIT I COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS 10
Rankine cycle - improvisations, Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critcal Boilers, FBC
Boilers, Turbines, Condensers, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal power plants – Fuel and
ash handling, Draught system, Fed water treatment. Binary Cycles and Cogeneration systems.
UNIT I DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANTS 10
Oto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle - Analysis & Optimisation. Components of Diesel and Gas Turbine
power plants. Combined Cycle Power Plants. Integrated Gasifer based Combined Cycle systems.
UNIT I NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS 7
Basics of Nuclear Enginering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of Nuclear
Reactors : Boilng Water Reactor (BWR), Presurized Water Reactor (PWR), CANada Deuterium- Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breder, Gas Coled and Liquid Metal Coled Reactors. Safety measures
for Nuclear Power plants.
UNIT IV POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY 10
Hydro Electric Power Plants – Clasifcation, Typical Layout and asociated components including
Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo Voltaic (SPV), Solar
Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cel power systems.
UNIT V ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF POWER PLANTS 8
Power tarif types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection criteria,
relative merits & demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of diferent power plants. Polution control
technologies including Waste Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power Plants.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to understand diferent types of power
plant, and its functions and their flow lines and isues related to them. Analyse and solve energy and economic related isues in power sectors.71
TEXT BOOK:
1. Nag. P.K., "Power Plant Enginering", Third Editon, Tata McGraw – Hil Publishing Company
Ltd., 208.
REFERENCES:
1. El-Wakil. M.M., "Power Plant Technology", Tata McGraw – Hil Publishing Company Ltd.,
2010.
2. Black & Veatch, Springer, "Power Plant Enginering", 196.
3. Thomas C. Eliot, Kao Chen and Robert C. Swanekamp, "Power Plant Enginering", Second
Editon, Standard Handbok of McGraw – Hil, 198.
4. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable energy", Open University, Oxford University Pres in asociation
with the Open University, 204.
ME6702 MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the elements and techniques involved in Mechatronics systems
which are very much esential to understand the emerging field of automation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12
Introduction to Mechatronics – Systems – Concepts of Mechatronics aproach – Ned for
Mechatronics – Emerging areas of Mechatronics – Clasifcation of Mechatronics. Sensors and
Transducers: Static and dynamic Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance
sensors – Strain gauges – Edy curent sensor – Hal efect sensor – Temperature sensors – Light
sensors
UNIT I 8085 MICROPROCESSOR AND 8051 MICROCONTROLLER 10
Introduction – Architecture of 8085 – Pin Configuration – Adresing Modes –Instruction set, Timing
diagram of 8085 – Concepts of 8051 microcontroler – Block diagram,.
UNIT I PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 8
Introduction – Architecture of 825, Keyboard interfacing, LED display –interfacing, ADC and DAC
interface, Temperature Control – Steper Motor Control – Trafic Control interface.
UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 7
Introduction – Basic structure – Input and output procesing – Programming – Mnemonics – Timers,
counters and internal relays – Data handling – Selection of PLC.
UNIT V ACTUATORS AND MECHATRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN 8
Types of Steper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle – Advantages and
Disadvantages. Design proces-stages of design proces – Traditonal and Mechatronics design
concepts – Case studies of Mechatronics systems – Pick and place Robot – Engine Management
system – Automatic car park barier.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to design mechatronics system with the
help of Microprocesor, PLC and other electrical and Electronics Circuits.72
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bolton, “Mechatronics”, Printice Hal, 208
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocesor Architecture, Programming, and Aplications with the
8085”, 5th Editon, Prentice Hal, 208.
REFERENCES:
1. Michael B.Histand and Davis G.Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hil International editon, 207.
2. Bradley D.A, Dawson D, Buru N.C and Loader A.J, “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hal, 193.
3. Smail.A and Mrad.F , “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Inteligent Machines”, Oxford
University Pres, 207.
4. Devadas Shety and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, PWS publishing
company, 207.
5. Krishna Kant, “Microprocesors & Microcontrolers”, Prentice Hal of India, 207.
6. Clarence W, de Silva, "Mechatronics" CRC Pres, First Indian Re-print, 2013
ME6703 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the aplication of computers in various aspects of Manufacturing viz., Design,
Proper planing, Manufacturing cost, Layout & Material Handling system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10
Brief introduction to CAD and CAM – Manufacturing Planing, Manufacturing control- Introduction to
CAD/CAM – Concurent Enginering-CIM concepts – Computerised elements of CIM system –Types
of production - Manufacturing models and Metrics – Mathematical models of Production Performance
– Simple problems – Manufacturing Control – Simple Problems – Basic Elements of an Automated
system – Levels of Automation – Lean Production and Just-In-Time Production.
UNIT I PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL AND COMPUTERISED
PROCESS PLANNING 10
Proces planing – Computer Aided Proces Planing (CAPP) – Logical steps in Computer Aided
Proces Planing – Agregate Production Planing and the Master Production Schedule – Material
Requirement planing – Capacity Planing- Control Systems-Shop Flor Control-Inventory Control – Brief on Manufacturing Resource Planing-I (MRP-I) & Enterprise Resource Planing (ERP) - Simple Problems.
UNIT I CELLULAR MANUFACTURING 9
Group Technology(GT), Part Familes – Parts Clasifcation and coding – Simple Problems in Opitz
Part Coding system – Production flow Analysis – Celular Manufacturing – Composite part concept – Machine cel design and layout – Quantiative analysis in Celular Manufacturing – Rank Order
Clustering Method - Aranging Machines in a GT cel – Holier Method – Simple Problems.73
UNIT IV FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM (FMS) AND AUTOMATED
GUIDED VEHICLE SYSTEM (AGVS) 8
Types of Flexibilty - FMS – FMS Components – FMS Aplication & Benefits – FMS Planing and
Control– Quantiative analysis in FMS – Simple Problems. Automated Guided Vehicle System
(AGVS) – AGVS Aplication – Vehicle Guidance technology – Vehicle Management & Safety.
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS 8
Robot Anatomy and Related Atributes – Clasifcation of Robots- Robot Control systems – End
Efectors – Sensors in Robotics – Robot Acuracy and Repeatabilty - Industrial Robot Aplications – Robot Part Programming – Robot Acuracy and Repeatabilty – Simple Problems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the student can able to understand the use of computers in
proces planing and use of FMS and Robotics in CIM
TEXT BOOK:
1. Mikel.P.Grover “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Prentice Hal of India, 208.
2. Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyan S.and Raju V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, 2nd Editon, New Age
International (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 200.
REFERENCES:
1. Kant Vajpaye S, “Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hal India,
203.
2. Gideon Halevi and Roland Weil, “Principles of Proces Planing – A Logical Aproach”
Chapman & Hal, London, 195.
3. Rao. P, N Tewari &T.K. Kundra, “Computer Aided Manufacturing”, Tata McGraw Hil
Publishing Company, 200.
GE6757 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To faciltate the understanding of Quality Management principles and proces.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Ned for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitons of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and
Crosby - Bariers to TQM - Quality statements - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer
satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention - Costs of quality.
UNIT I TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Leadership - Strategic quality planing, Quality Councils - Employe involvement - Motivation,
Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Quality circles Recogniton and Reward, Performance apraisal - Continuous proces improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Suplier partnership - Partnering,
Suplier selection, Suplier Rating.
UNIT I TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditonal tols of quality - New management tols - Six sigma: Concepts, Methodology,
aplications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason to bench mark,
Bench marking proces - FMEA - Stages, Types.74
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
Control Charts - Proces Capabilty - Concepts of Six Sigma - Quality Function Development (QFD) - Taguchi quality los function - TPM - Concepts, improvement neds - Performance measures.
UNIT V QUALITY SYSTEMS 9
Ned for ISO 900 - ISO 901-208 Quality System - Elements, Documentation, Quality Auditng - QS 900 - ISO 1400 - Concepts, Requirements and Benefits - TQM Implementation in
manufacturing and service sectors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The student would be able to aply the tols and techniques of quality management to
manufacturing and services proceses.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H. Besterfiled, et at., "Total quality Management", Third Editon, Pearson Education Asia,
Indian Reprint, 206. REFERENCES:
1. James R. Evans and Wiliam M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality", 8th
Editon, First Indian Editon, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hal (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
206.
3. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice Hal
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 206.
ME671 SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: To give exposure to software tols neded to analyze enginering problems. To expose the students to diferent aplications of simulation and analysis tols.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
A. SIMULATION
1. MATLAB basics, Dealing with matrices, Graphing-Functions of one variable and two variables
2. Use of Matlab to solve simple problems in vibration
3. Mechanism Simulation using Multibody Dynamic software
B. ANALYSIS
1. Force and Stres analysis using link elements in Truses, cables etc.
2. Stres and deflection analysis in beams with diferent suport conditons.
3. Stres analysis of lat plates and simple shels.
4. Stres analysis of axi – symmetric components.
5. Thermal stres and heat ransfer analysis of plates.
6. Thermal stres analysis of cylindrical shels.
7. Vibration analysis of spring-mas systems.
8. Model analysis of Beams.
9. Harmonic, transient and spectrum analysis of simple systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS75
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the Students can model, analyse and simulate experiments to
met real world system and evaluate the performance.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Computer Work Station 15
2 Color Desk Jet Printer 01
3 Multibody Dynamic Software Suitable for Mechanism
simulation and analysis
15 licenses
4 C /MATLAB 5 licenses
ME6712 MECHATRONICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: • To know the method of programming the microprocesor and also the design, modeling &
analysis of basic electrical, hydraulic & pneumatic Systems which enable the students to
understand the concept of mechatronics.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Asembly language programming of 8085 – Aditon – Subtraction – Multiplication – Division – Sorting – Code Conversion.
2. Steper motor interface.
3. Trafic light interface.
4. Sped control of DC motor.
5. Study of various types of transducers.
6. Study of hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-pneumatic circuits.
7. Modeling and analysis of basic hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical circuits using Software.
8. Study of PLC and its aplications.
9. Study of image procesing technique.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to design mechatronics system with the
help of Microprocesor, PLC and other electrical and Electronics Circuits.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Sl.
No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Basic Pneumatic Trainer Kit with manual and electrical
controls/ PLC Control each
1 No.
2 Basic Hydraulic Trainer Kit 1 No
3 Hydraulics and Pneumatics Systems Simulation Software 10 No
4 8051 - Microcontroler kit with steper motor and drive
circuit sets
2 No
Image procesing system with hardware & software 1 No.76
ME6713 COMPREHENSION L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES: To encourage the students to comprehend the knowledge acquired from the first Semester to
Sixth Semester of B.E Degre Course through periodic exercise.
METHOD OF EVALUATION:
The students wil be asesed 10% internaly through wekly test with objective type questions
on al the subject related topics
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: abilty to understand and comprehend any given problem related to mechanical enginering
field.
MG6863 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enable students to understand the fundamental economic concepts aplicable to
enginering and to learn the techniques of incorporating inflation factor in economic decision
making.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 8
Introduction to Economics- Flow in an economy, Law of suply and demand, Concept of Enginering
Economics – Enginering eficiency, Economic eficiency, Scope of enginering economics - Element
of costs, Marginal cost, Marginal Revenue, Sunk cost, Oportunity cost, Break-even analysis - V ratio,
Elementary economic Analysis – Material selection for product Design selection for a product,
Proces planing.
UNIT I VALUE ENGINEERING 10
Make or buy decision, Value enginering – Function, aims, Value enginering procedure. Interest
formulae and their aplications –Time value of money, Single payment compound amount factor,
Single payment present worth factor, Equal payment series sinking fund factor, Equal payment series
payment Present worth factor- equal payment series capital recovery factor - Uniform gradient series
anual equivalent factor, Efective interest rate, Examples in al the methods.
UNIT I CASH FLOW 9
Methods of comparison of alternatives – present worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow
diagram), Future worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow
diagram), Anual equivalent method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash
flow diagram), rate of return method, Examples in al the methods.
UNIT IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9
Replacement and Maintenance analysis – Types of maintenance, types of replacement problem,
determination of economic life of an aset, Replacement of an aset with a new aset – capital
recovery with return and concept of chalenger and defender, Simple probabilstic model for items
which fail completely.7
UNIT V DEPRECIATION 9
Depreciation- Introduction, Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method of
depreciation-Sum of the years digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation/
Anuity method of depreciation, service output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public
alternatives- introduction, Examples, Inflation adjusted decisions – procedure to adjust inflation,
Examples on comparison of alternatives and determination of economic life of aset.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : Upon sucesful completion of this course, students wil acquire the skils to aply the basics
of economics and cost analysis to enginering and take economicaly sound decisions.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Paner Selvam, R, “Enginering Economics”, Prentice Hal of India Ltd, New Delhi, 201.
REFERENCES:
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Enginering Economics”, Prentice Hal of India, 201.
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavele, “Enginering Economics and analysis” Eng. Pres,
Texas, 2010.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sulivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Enginering Economy”, Macmilan, New
York, 201.
4. Zahid A khan: Enginering Economy, "Enginering Economy", Dorling Kindersley, 2012
ME681 PROJECT WORK L T P C
0 0 12 6
OBJECTIVES: To develop the abilty to solve a specifc problem right from its identifcation and literature
review til the sucesful solution of the same. To train the students in preparing project reports
and to face reviews and viva voce examination.
The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic aproved by the head of the department under the
guidance of a faculty member and prepares a comprehensive project report after completing the work
to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progres of the project is evaluated based on a minimum of
thre reviews. The review commite may be constiuted by the Head of the Department. A project
report is required at the end of the semester. The project work is evaluated based on oral
presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal examiners constiuted by the Head
of the Department.
TOTAL: 180 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: On Completion of the project work students wil be in a positon to take up any chalenging
practical problems and find solution by formulating proper methodology.78
MG6072 MARKETING MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enable students to deal with newer concepts of marketing concepts like strategic marketing
segmentation, pricing, advertisement and strategic formulation. The course wil enable a
student o take up marketing as a profesional carer.
UNIT I MARKETING PROCESS 9
Definiton, Marketing proces, dynamics, neds, wants and demands, marketing concepts,
environment, mix, types. Philosophies, seling versus marketing, organizations, industrial versus
consumer marketing, consumer gods, industrial gods, product hierarchy.
UNIT I BUYING BEHAVIOUR AND MARKET SEGMENTATION 9
Cultural, demographic factors, motives, types, buying decisions, segmentation factors - demographic - Psycho graphic and geographic segmentation, proces, paterns.
UNIT I PRODUCT PRICING AND MARKETING RESEARCH 9
Objectives, pricing, decisions and pricing methods, pricing management. Introduction, uses, proces
of marketing research.
UNIT IV MARKETING PLANNING AND STRATEGY FORMULATION 9
Components of marketing plan-strategy formulations and the marketing proces, implementations,
portfolio analysis, BCG, GEC grids.
UNIT V ADVERTISING, SALES PROMOTION AND DISTRIBUTION 9
Characteristics, impact, goals, types, and sales promotions - point of purchase - unique seling
propositon. Characteristics, wholesaling, retailng, chanel design, logistics, and modern trends in
retailng, Modern Trends, e-Marketing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : The learning skils of Marketing wil enhance the knowledge about Marketer’s Practices and
create insights on Advertising, Branding, Retailng and Marketing Research.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Philp Kolter & Keler, “Marketing Management”, Prentice Hal of India, 14th editon, 2012.
2. Chandrasekar. K.S., “Marketing Management Text and Cases”, 1
st Editon, Tata McGraw Hil – Vijaynicole, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Ramasamy and Nama kumari, “Marketing Environment: Planing, implementation and control
the Indian context”, 190.
2. Czinkota&Kotabe, “Marketing management”, Thomson learning, Indian editon 207
3. Adrain palmer, “ Introduction to marketing theory and practice”, Oxford university pres IE
204.
4. Donald S. Tul and Hawkins, “Marketing Reasearch”, Prentice Hal of Inida-197.
5. Philp Kotler and Gary Armstrong “Principles of Marketing” Prentice Hal of India, 200.
6. Steven J.Skiner, “Marketing”, Al India Publishers and Distributes Ltd. 198.
7. Graeme Drummond and John Ensor, "Introduction to marketing concepts", Elsevier, Indian
Reprint, 207.79
ME601 QUALITY CONTROL AND RELIABILITY ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To introduce the concept of SQC
To understand proces control and aceptance sampling procedure and their aplication. To learn the concept of reliabilty.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR VARIABLES 10
Introduction, definiton of quality, basic concept of quality, definiton of SQC, benefits and limitation of
SQC, Quality asurance, Quality control: Quality cost-Variation in proces causes of variation –Theory
of control chart- uses of control chart – Control chart for variables – X chart, R chart and chart - proces capabilty – proces capabilty studies and simple problems. Six sigma concepts
UNIT I PROCESS CONTROL FOR ATTRIBUTES 8
Control chart for atributes –control chart for non conformings– p chart and np chart – control chart for
nonconformites– C and U charts, State of control and proces out of control identifcation in charts,
patern study.
UNIT I ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING 9
Lot by lot sampling – types – probabilty of aceptance in single, double, multiple sampling techniques – O.C. curves – producer’s Risk and consumer’s Risk. AQL, LTPD, AOQL concepts-standard
sampling plans for AQL and LTPD- uses of standard sampling plans.
UNIT IV LIFE TESTING – RELIABILITY 9
Life testing – Objective – failure data analysis, Mean failure rate, mean time to failure, mean time
betwen failure, hazard rate – Weibul model, system reliabilty, series, paralel and mixed
configuration – simple problems. Maintainabilty and availabilty – simple problems. Aceptance
sampling based on reliabilty test – O.C Curves.
UNIT V QUALITY AND RELIABLITY 9
Reliabilty improvements – techniques- use of Pareto analysis – design for reliabilty – redundancy unit
and standby redundancy – Optimization in reliabilty – Product design – Product analysis – Product
development – Product life cycles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: Use of aproved statistical table permited in the examination.
OUTCOMES: • Upon sucesful completion of this course, the students can able to aply the concept of SQC
in proces control for reliable component production
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Douglas.C. Montgomery, “ Introduction to Statistical quality control”, 4th editon, John Wiley
201.
2. Srinath. L.S., “Reliabilty Enginering”, Afilated East west pres, 191.
REFERENCES:
1. John.S. Oakland. "Statistical proces control”, 5th editon, Elsevier, 205
2. Conor, P.D.T.O., “Practical Reliabilty Enginering”, John Wiley, 193
3. Grant, Eugene .L “Statistical Quality Control”, McGraw-Hil, 196
4. Monohar Mahajan, “Statistical Quality Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 201.
5. Gupta. R.C, “Statistical Quality control”, Khana Publishers, 197.
6. Besterfield D.H., “Quality Control”, Prentice Hal, 193.
7. Sharma S.C., “Inspection Quality Control and Reliabilty”, Khana Publishers, 198.
8. Dany Samson, “Manufacturing & Operations Strategy”, Prentice Hal, 19180
ME602 REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the underlying principles of operations in diferent Refrigeration & Air
conditoning systems and components. To provide knowledge on design aspects of Refrigeration & Air conditoning systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 5
Introduction to Refrigeration - Unit of Refrigeration and C.O.P.– Ideal cycles- Refrigerants Desirable
properties – Clasifcation - Nomenclature - ODP & GWP.
UNIT I VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 10
Vapor compresion cycle : p-h and T-s diagrams - deviations from theoretical cycle – subcoling and
super heating- efects of condenser and evaporator presure on COP- multipresure system - low
temperature refrigeration - Cascade systems – problems. Equipments: Type of Compresors,
Condensers, Expansion devices, Evaporators.
UNIT I OTHER REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 8
Working principles of Vapour absorption systems and adsorption coling systems – Steam jet
refrigeration- Ejector refrigeration systems- Thermoelectric refrigeration- Air refrigeration - Magnetic - Vortex and Pulse tube refrigeration systems.
UNIT IV PSYCHROMETRIC PROPERTIES AND PROCESSES 10
Properties of moist Air-Gibs Dalton law, Specifc humidity, Dew point temperature, Degre of
saturation, Relative humidity, Enthalpy, Humid specifc heat, Wet bulb temperature Thermodynamic
wet bulb temperature, Psychrometric chart; Psychrometric of air-conditoning proceses, mixing of air
streams.
UNIT V AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS AND LOAD ESTIMATION 12
Air conditoning loads: Outside and inside design conditons; Heat transfer through structure, Solar
radiation, Electrical apliances, Infiltration and ventilation, internal heat load; Aparatus selection;
fresh air load, human comfort & IAQ principles, efective temperature & chart, calculation of summer &
winter air conditoning load; Clasifcations, Layout of plants; Air distribution system; Filters; Air
Conditoning Systems with Controls: Temperature, Presure and Humidity sensors, Actuators &
Safety controls.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to demonstrate the operations in
diferent Refrigeration & Air conditoning systems and also able to design Refrigeration & Air
conditoning systems .
TEXT BOOK:
1. Arora, C.P., "Refrigeration and Air Conditoning", 3
rd editon, McGraw Hil, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Roy J. Dosat, "Principles of Refrigeration", 4
th editon, Pearson Education Asia, 209.
2. Stoecker, W.F. and Jones J. W., "Refrigeration and Air Conditoning", McGraw Hil, New Delhi,
1986.
3. ASHRAE Hand bok, Fundamentals, 2010
4. Jones W.P., "Air conditoning enginering", 5
th editon,Elsevier Buterworth-Heineman, 20181
ME603 RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: At the end of the course, the students are expected to identify the new methodologies /
technologies for efective utilzation of renewable energy sources.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
World Energy Use – Reserves of Energy Resources – Environmental Aspects of Energy Utilsation – Renewable Energy Scenario in Tamil nadu, India and around the World – Potentials - Achievements /
Aplications – Economics of renewable energy systems.
UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY 9
Solar Radiation – Measurements of Solar Radiation - Flat Plate and Concentrating Colectors – Solar
direct Thermal Aplications – Solar thermal Power Generation - Fundamentals of Solar Photo Voltaic
Conversion – Solar Cels – Solar PV Power Generation – Solar PV Aplications.
UNIT I WIND ENERGY 9
Wind Data and Energy Estimation – Types of Wind Energy Systems – Performance – Site Selection – Details of Wind Turbine Generator – Safety and Environmental Aspects
UNIT IV BIO - ENERGY 9
Biomas direct combustion – Biomas gasifers – Biogas plants – Digesters – Ethanol production – Bio diesel – Cogeneration - Biomas Aplications
UNIT V OTHER RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Tidal energy – Wave Energy – Open and Closed OTEC Cycles – Smal Hydro-Geothermal Energy – Hydrogen and Storage - Fuel Cel Systems – Hybrid Systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to identify the new methodologies /
technologies for efective utilzation of renewable energy sources.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rai. G.D., "Non Conventional Energy Sources", Khana Publishers, New Delhi, 201.
2. Twidel, J.W. & Weir, A., "Renewable Energy Sources", EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 206.
REFERENCES:
1. Sukhatme. S.P., "Solar Energy", Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 197.
2. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future", Oxford University Pres,
U.K., 196.
3. Tiwari. G.N., Solar Energy – "Fundamentals Design, Modeling & Aplications", Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi, 202.
4. Freris. L.L., "Wind Energy Conversion Systems", Prentice Hal, UK, 190.
5. Johnson Gary, L. "Wind Energy Systems", Prentice Hal, New York, 1985
6. David M. Mousdale – "Introduction to Biofuels", CRC Pres, Taylor & Francis Group, USA
2010
7. Chetan Singh Solanki, Solar Photovoltaics, "Fundamentals, Technologies and Aplications", PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 209.82
ME604 UNCONVENTIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To learn about various unconventional machining proceses, the various proces parameters
and their influence on performance and their aplications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Unconventional machining Proces – Ned – clasifcation – Brief overview .
UNIT I MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9
Abrasive Jet Machining – Water Jet Machining – Abrasive Water Jet Machining - Ultrasonic
Machining.(AJM, WJM, AWJM and USM). Working Principles – equipment used – Proces
parameters – MRR- Aplications.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9
Electric Discharge Machining (EDM)- working Principle-equipments-Proces Parameters-Surface
Finish and MRR- electrode / Tol – Power and control Circuits-Tol Wear – Dielectric – Flushing – Wire cut EDM – Aplications.
UNIT IV CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO-CHEMICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 1
Chemical machining and Electro-Chemical machining (CHM and ECM)-Etchants – Maskant -
techniques of aplying maskants - Proces Parameters – Surface finish and MRR-Aplications.
Principles of ECM- equipments-Surface Roughnes and MRR Electrical circuit-Proces Parameters- ECG and ECH - Aplications.
UNIT V THERMAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 10
Laser Beam machining and driling (LBM), plasma Arc machining (PAM) and Electron Beam
Machining (EBM). Principles – Equipment –Types - Beam control techniques – Aplications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to demonstrate diferent unconventional
machining proceses and know the influence of diference proces parameters on the
performance and their aplications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vijay.K. Jain “Advanced Machining Proceses” Alied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 207
2. Pandey P.C. and Shan H.S. “Modern Machining Proceses” Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi,
207. REFERENCES:
1. Benedict. G.F. “Nontraditonal Manufacturing Proceses”, Marcel Deker Inc., New York,
1987. 2. Mc Geough, “Advanced Methods of Machining”, Chapman and Hal, London, 198. 3. Paul De Garmo, J.T.Black, and Ronald.A.Kohser, “Material and Proceses in Manufacturing”
Prentice Hal of India Pvt. Ltd., 8thEditon, New Delhi ,201.83
ME605 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To introduce the proces planing concepts to make cost estimation for various products after
proces planing
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS PLANNING 10
Introduction- methods of proces planing-Drawing interpretation-Material evaluation – steps in
proces selection-.Production equipment and toling selection
UNIT I PROCESS PLANNING ACTIVITIES 10
Proces parameters calculation for various production proceses-Selection jigs and fixtures election
of quality asurance methods - Set of documents for proces planing-Economics of proces
planing- case studies
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 8
Importance of costing and estimation –methods of costing-elements of cost estimation –Types of
estimates – Estimating procedure- Estimation labor cost, material cost- alocation of over head
charges- Calculation of depreciation cost
UNIT IV PRODUCTION COST ESTIMATION 8
Estimation of Diferent Types of Jobs - Estimation of Forging Shop, Estimation of Welding Shop,
Estimation of Foundry Shop
UNIT V MACHINING TIME CALCULATION 9
Estimation of Machining Time - Importance of Machine Time Calculation- Calculation of Machining
Time for Diferent Lathe Operations ,Driling and Boring - Machining Time Calculation for Miling,
Shaping and Planing -Machining Time Calculation for Grinding
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to use the concepts of proces planing
and cost estimation for various products.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter scalon, “Proces planing, Design/Manufacture Interface”, Elsevier science technology
Boks, Dec 202.
REFERENCES:
1. Ostwalal P.F. and Munez J., “Manufacturing Proceses and systems”, 9
th Editon, John Wiley,
198.
2. Rusel R.S and Tailor B.W, “Operations Management”, 4th Editon, PHI, 203.
3. Chitale A.V. and Gupta R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, 2nd Editon, PHI, 202.
ME606 DESIGN OF JIGS, FIXTURES AND PRESS TOOLS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the functions and design principles of Jigs, fixtures and pres tols
To gain proficiency in the development of required views of the final design.84
UNIT I LOCATING AND CLAMPING PRINCIPLES: 8
Objectives of tol design- Function and advantages of Jigs and fixtures – Basic elements – principles
of location – Locating methods and devices – Redundant Location – Principles of clamping – Mechanical actuation – pneumatic and hydraulic actuation Standard parts – Dril bushes and Jig
butons – Tolerances and materials used.
UNIT I JIGS AND FIXTURES 10
Design and development of jigs and fixtures for given component- Types of Jigs – Post, Turnover,
Chanel, latch, box, pot, angular post jigs – Indexing jigs – General principles of miling, Lathe, boring,
broaching and grinding fixtures – Asembly, Inspection and Welding fixtures – Modular fixturing
systems- Quick change fixtures.
UNIT I PRESS WORKING TERMINOLOGIES AND ELEMENTS OF CUTTING DIES 10
Pres Working Terminologies - operations – Types of preses – pres acesories – Computation of
pres capacity – Strip layout – Material Utilzation – Shearing action – Clearances – Pres Work
Materials – Center of presure- Design of various elements of dies – Die Block – Punch holder, Die
set, guide plates – Stops – Stripers – Pilots – Selection of Standard parts – Design and preparation
of our standard views of simple blanking, piercing, compound and progresive dies.
UNIT IV BENDING AND DRAWING DIES 10
Diference betwen bending and drawing – Blank development for above operations – Types of
Bending dies – Pres capacity – Spring back – knockouts – direct and indirect – presure pads – Ejectors – Variables afecting Metal flow in drawing operations – draw die inserts – draw beadsironing
– Design and development of bending, forming, drawing, reverse redrawing and combination
dies – Blank development for axisymmetric, rectangular and eliptic parts – Single and double action
dies.
UNIT V OTHER FORMING TECHNIQUES 7
Bulging, Swaging, Embosing, coining, curling, hole flanging, shaving and sizing, asembly, fine
Blanking dies – recent trends in tol design- computer Aids for shet metal forming Analysis – basic
introduction - toling for numericaly controled machines- setup reduction for work holding – Single
minute exchange of dies – Poka Yoke.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: (Use of P S G Design Data Bok is permited in the University examination)
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to design jigs, fixtures and pres tols.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joshi, P.H. “Jigs and Fixtures”, Second Editon, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Co., Ltd., New
Delhi, 204.
2. Joshi P.H “Pres tols - Design and Construction”, whels publishing, 196
REFERENCES:
1. Venkataraman. K., “Design of Jigs Fixtures & Pres Tols”, Tata McGraw Hil, New Delhi,
205.
2. Donaldson, Lecain and Gold “Tol Design”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw Hil, 200.
3. Kempster, “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Third Editon, Hodes and Stoughton, 1974.
4. Hofman “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Thomson Delmar Learning, Singapore, 204.
5. ASTME Fundamentals of Tol Design Prentice Hal of India.
6. Design Data Hand Bok, PSG Colege of Technology, Coimbatore.85
ME607 COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND MECHANICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the fundamentals of composite material strength and its mechanical behavior
Understanding the analysis of iber reinforced Laminate design for diferent combinations of plies with diferent orientations of the fiber. Thermo-mechanical behavior and study of residual streses in Laminates during procesing.
Implementation of Clasical Laminate Theory (CLT) to study and analysis for residual streses
in an isotropic layered structure such as electronic chips.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION, LAMINA CONSTITUTIVE EQUATIONS & MANUFACTURING 12
Definiton –Ned – General Characteristics, Aplications. Fibers – Glas, Carbon, Ceramic and
Aramid fibers. Matrices – Polymer, Graphite, Ceramic and Metal Matrices – Characteristics of fibers
and matrices. Lamina Constiutive Equations: Lamina Asumptions – Macroscopic Viewpoint.
Generalized Hoke’s Law. Reduction to Homogeneous Orthotropic Lamina – Isotropic limit case,
Orthotropic Stifnes matrix (Qij), Typical Commercial material properties, Rule of Mixtures. Generaly
Orthotropic Lamina –Transformation Matrix, Transformed Stifnes. Manufacturing: Bag Moulding
Compresion Moulding – Pultrusion – Filament Winding – Other Manufacturing Proceses
UNIT I FLAT PLATE LAMINATE CONSTITUTE EQUATIONS 10
Definiton of stres and Moment Resultants. Strain Displacement relations. Basic Asumptions of
Laminated anisotropic plates. Laminate Constiutive Equations – Coupling Interactions, Balanced
Laminates, Symmetric Laminates, Angle Ply Laminates, Cros Ply Laminates. Laminate Structural
Moduli. Evaluation of Lamina Properties from Laminate Tests. Quasi-Isotropic Laminates.
Determination of Lamina streses within Laminates. UNIT I LAMINA STRENGTH ANALYSIS 5
Introduction - Maximum Stres and Strain Criteria. Von-Mises Yield criterion for Isotropic Materials.
Generalized Hil’s Criterion for Anisotropic materials. Tsai-Hil’s Failure Criterion for Composites.
Tensor Polynomial (Tsai-Wu) Failure criterion. Prediction of laminate Failure
UNIT IV THERMAL ANALYSIS 8
Asumption of Constant C.T.E’s. Modifcation of Hoke’s Law. Modifcation of Laminate Constiutive
Equations. Orthotropic Lamina C.T.E’s. C.T.E’s for special Laminate Configurations – Unidirectional,
Of-axis, Symmetric Balanced Laminates, Zero C.T.E laminates, Thermaly Quasi-Isotropic Laminates
UNIT V ANALYSIS OF LAMINATED FLAT PLATES 10
Equilbrium Equations of Motion. Energy Formulations. Static Bending Analysis. Buckling Analysis.
Fre Vibrations – Natural Frequencies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyse the fiber reinforced Laminate
for optimum design
Aply clasical aminate theory to study and analyse the residual streses in Laminate. TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gibson, R.F., "Principles of Composite Material Mechanics", Second Editon, McGraw-Hil,
CRC pres in progres, 194, -. 2. Hyer, M.W., “Stres Analysis of Fiber – Reinforced Composite Materials”, McGraw Hil, 19886
REFERENCES:
1. Isac M. Daniel and Ori Ishai, “Enginering Mechanics of Composite Materials”, Oxford
University Pres-206, First Indian Editon - 207
2. Malick, P.K., Fiber, ”Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing and Design”, Manel
Deker Inc, 193.
3. Halpin, J.C., “Primer on Composite Materials, Analysis”, Technomic Publishing Co., 1984.
4. Agarwal, B.D., and Broutman L.J., “Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites”, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 190.
5. Malick, P.K. and Newman, S., (editon), “Composite Materials Technology: Proceses and
Properties”, Hansen Publisher, Munish, 190.
ME608 WELDING TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To understand the basics of welding and to know about the various types of welding
proceses
UNIT I GAS AND ARC WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Fundamental principles – Air Acetylene welding, Oxyacetylene welding, Carbon arc welding, Shielded
metal arc welding, Submerged arc welding, TIG & MIG welding, Plasma arc welding and Electroslag
welding proceses - advantages, limitations and aplications.
UNIT I RESISTANCE WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Spot welding, Seam welding, Projection welding, Resistance But welding, Flash But welding,
Percusion welding and High frequency resistance welding proceses - advantages, limitations and
aplications.
UNIT I SOLID STATE WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Cold welding, Difusion bonding, Explosive welding, Ultrasonic welding, Friction welding, Forge
welding, Rol welding and Hot presure welding proceses - advantages, limitations and aplications.
UNIT IV OTHER WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Thermit welding, Atomic hydrogen welding, Electron beam welding, Laser Beam welding, Friction stir
welding, Under Water welding, Welding automation in aerospace, nuclear and surface transport
vehicles.
UNIT V DESIGN OF WELD JOINTS, WELDABILITY AND TESTING OF WELDMENTS 9
Various weld joint designs – Weldabilty of Aluminium, Coper, and Stainles stels. Destructive and
non destructive testing of weldments.
TOTAL : 45 HOURS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to compare diferent types of Welding
proces for efective Welding of Structural components.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Parmer R.S., “Welding Enginering and Technology”, 1
st editon, Khana Publishers, New
Delhi, 208.
2. Parmer R.S., “Welding Proceses and Technology”, Khana Publishers, New Delhi, 192.87
3. Litle R.L., “Welding and welding Technology”, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Co., Ltd., New
Delhi, 34th reprint, 208.
REFERENCES:
1. Schwartz M.M. “Metals Joining Manual”. McGraw Hil Boks, 1979.
2. Tylecote R.F. “The Solid Phase Welding of Metals”. Edward Arnold Publishers Ltd. London,
1968.
3. AWS- Welding Hand Bok. 8th Editon. Vol- 2. “Welding Proces”
4. Nadkarni S.V. “Modern Arc Welding Technology”, 1st editon, Oxford IBH Publishers, 205.
5. Christopher Davis. “Laser Welding- Practical Guide”. Jaico Publishing House, 194. 6. Davis A.C., “The Science and Practice of Welding”, Cambridge University Pres, Cambridge,
193
ME609 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
At he end of the course, the student is expected to
understand and analyse the energy data of industries
caryout energy acounting and balancing
conduct energy audit and sugest methodologies for energy savings and
utilse the available resources in optimal ways
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data – Environmental aspects asociated with energy utilzation –Energy Auditng: Ned, Types,
Methodology and Bariers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy auditng.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12
Components of EB biling – HT and LT suply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of Capacitors,
Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Eficiency Computation, Energy
Eficient Motors, Ilumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Eficacy, LED Lighting and scope of
Encon in Ilumination.
UNIT I THERMAL SYSTEMS 12
Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Eficiency computation and encon
measures. Steam: Distribution &U sage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash Steam
Utilzation, Insulators & Refractories
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MAJOR UTILITIES 8
Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compresed Air Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditoning Systems – Coling Towers – D.G. sets
UNIT V ECONOMICS 5
Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal Rate of Return, Net Present Value, Life
Cycle Costing –ESCO concept
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyse the energy data of industries. Can caryout energy acounting and balancing8
Can sugest methodologies for energy savings
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at www.energymanager training.com,
a website administered by Bureau of Energy Eficiency (BEE), a statutory body under Ministry
of Power, Government of India, 204.
REFERENCES:
1. Wite. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and Utilsation”
Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 198.
2. Calaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon Pres, Oxford,
1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Eficient Use of Energy” Buterworths, London, 1982
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand bok”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Buterworths, London 1987.
ME6010 ROBOTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the functions of the basic components of a Robot. To study the use of various types of End of Efectors and Sensors
To impart knowledge in Robot Kinematics and Programming
To learn Robot safety isues and economics.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 6
Robot - Definiton - Robot Anatomy - Co ordinate Systems, Work Envelope Types and Clasifcation- Specifcations-Pitch, Yaw, Rol, Joint Notations, Sped of Motion, Pay Load- Robot Parts and their
Functions-Ned for Robots-Diferent Aplications.
UNIT I ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9
Pneumatic Drives-Hydraulic Drives-Mechanical Drives-Electrical Drives-D.C. Servo Motors, Steper
Motors, A.C. Servo Motors-Salient Features, Aplications and Comparison of al these Drives, End
Efectors-Gripers-Mechanical Gripers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic- Gripers, Magnetic Gripers,
Vacum Gripers; Two Fingered and Thre Fingered Gripers; Internal Gripers and External
Gripers; Selection and Design Considerations.
UNIT I SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION 12
Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Aplications of the folowing types of sensors- Positon
sensors - Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers, Optical Encoders, pneumatic Positon Sensors,
Range Sensors Triangulations Principles, Structured, Lighting Aproach, Time of Flight, Range
Finders, Laser Range Meters, Touch Sensors ,binary Sensors., Analog Sensors, Wrist Sensors,
Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors, Camera, Frame Graber, Sensing and Digitzing Image Data- Signal Conversion, Image Storage, Lighting Techniques, Image Procesing and Analysis-Data
Reduction, Segmentation, Feature Extraction, Object Recogniton, Other Algorithms, AplicationsInspection,
Identifcation, Visual Serving and Navigation.
UNIT IV ROBOT KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING 13
Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Diference; Forward Kinematics and Reverse Kinematics
of manipulators with Two, Thre Degres of Fredom (in 2 Dimension), Four Degres of fredom (in
3 Dimension) Jacobians, Velocity and Forces-Manipulator Dynamics, Trajectory Generator,89
Manipulator Mechanism Design-Derivations and problems. Lead through Programming, Robot
programming Languages-VAL Programming-Motion Commands, Sensor Commands, End Efector
commands and simple Programs.
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION AND ROBOT ECONOMICS 5
RGV, AGV; Implementation of Robots in Industries-Various Steps; Safety Considerations for Robot
Operations - Economic Analysis of Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the basic enginering
knowledge for the design of robotics
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Klafter R.D., Chmielewski T.A and Negin M., “Robotic Enginering - An Integrated Aproach”,
Prentice Hal, 203.
2. Grover M.P., “Industrial Robotics -Technology Programming and Aplications”, McGraw Hil,
201.
REFERENCES:
1. Craig J.J., “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education, 208.
2. Deb S.R., “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation” Tata McGraw Hil Bok Co., 194.
3. Koren Y., “Robotics for Enginers", Mc Graw Hil Bok Co., 192.
4. Fu.K.S.,Gonzalz R.C. and Le C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Inteligence”,
McGraw Hil Bok Co., 1987.
5. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Procesing”, Tata McGraw Hil, 195.
6. Rajput R.K., “Robotics and Industrial Automation”, S.Chand and Company, 208.
7. Surender Kumar, “Industrial Robots and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Oxford and IBH
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 191.
GE6081 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and aplication
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Enginering- Clasifcations of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-ultra-thinfilms- multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and efect on properties: Mechanical, Electronic,
Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to properties and motivation for study
(qualitative only).
UNIT I GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9
Botom-up Synthesis-Top-down Aproach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical Miling,
Coloidal routes, Self-asembly, Vapour phase depositon, MOCVD, Sputering, Evaporation,
Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
UNIT I NANOMATERIALS 12
Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fulerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wal carbon
Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wal carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of synthesis(arc-growth,90
laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property Relationships aplications- Nanometal
oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, nanoalumina, CaO, AgTiO2, Ferites, Nanoclaysfunctionalization
and aplications-Quantum wires, Quantum dots-preparation, properties and
aplications
UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
X-ray difraction technique, Scaning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques, Transmision
Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques- AFM, SPM,
STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
NanoInfoTech: Information storage- nanocomputer, molecular switch, super chip, nanocrystal,
Nanobiotechlogy: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano medicines, Targeted
drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), Nano Electro Mechanical
Systems (NEMS)- Nanosensors, nano crystaline silver for bacterial inhibiton, Nanoparticles for
sunbarier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cel, batery
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Wil familarize about he science of nanomaterials
Wil demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
Wil develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial
TEXT BOOKS
1. Edelstein. A.S. and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
Aplications”, Instiute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 196.
2. John Dinardo. N, “Nanoscale charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd editon, Weinheim
Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 200
REFERENCES
1. Timp .G, “Nanotechnology”, AIP pres/Springer, 199.
2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia (Editor),“The Hand Bok of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure,
Theory, Modeling and Simulations”. Prentice-Hal of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 207.
ME601 THERMAL TURBO MACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the various systems, principles, operations and aplications of diferent ypes of
turbo machinery components.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES 9
Energy transfer betwen fluid and rotor-clasifcation of fluid machinery,-dimensionles parameters- specifc sped-aplications-stage velocity triangles-work and eficiency.
UNIT I CENTRIFUGAL FANS AND BLOWERS 9
Types- stage and design parameters-flow analysis in impeler blades-volute and difusers, loses,
characteristic curves and selection, fan drives and fan noise.91
UNIT I CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR 9
Construction details, impeler flow loses, slip factor, difuser analysis, loses and performance
curves.
UNIT IV AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSOR 9
Stage velocity diagrams, enthalpy-entropy diagrams, stage loses and eficiency, work done simple
stage design problems and performance characteristics.
UNIT V AXIAL AND RADIAL FLOW TURBINES 9
Stage velocity diagrams, reaction stages, loses and coeficients, blade design principles, testing and
performance characteristics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to explain the various systems, principles and aplications and diferent ypes of turbo machinery components.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Yahya, S.H., Turbines, Compresor and Fans, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Company, 196.
REFERENCES:
1. Bruneck, Fans, Pergamom Pres, 1973.
2. Earl Logan, Jr., Hand bok of Turbomachinery, Marcel Deker Inc., 192.
3. Dixon, S.I, "Fluid Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Turbomachinery", Pergamon Pres,
190.
4. Shepherd, D.G., "Principles of Turbomachinery", Macmilan, 1969.
5. Ganesan, V., "Gas Turbines", Tata McGraw Hil Pub. Co., 199.
6. Gopalakrishnan .G and Prithvi Raj .D, "A Treatise on Turbo machines", Scifech Publications
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 202.
ME6012 MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enable the student to understand the principles, functions and practices adapted in industry for
the sucesful management of maintenance activites. To explain the diferent maintenance categories like Preventive maintenance, conditon monitoring
and repair of machine elements. To ilustrate some of the simple instruments used for conditon monitoring in industry.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MAINTENANCE PLANNING 9
Basic Principles of maintenance planing – Objectives and principles of planed maintenance activity – Importance and benefits of sound Maintenance systems – Reliabilty and machine availabilty – MTBF, MTTR and MWT – Factors of availabilty – Maintenance organization – Maintenance
economics.
UNIT I MAINTENANCE POLICIES – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 992
Maintenance categories – Comparative merits of each category – Preventive maintenance,
maintenance schedules, repair cycle - Principles and methods of lubrication – TPM.
UNIT I CONDITION MONITORING 9
Conditon Monitoring – Cost comparison with and without CM – On-load testing and ofload testing – Methods and instruments for CM – Temperature sensitve tapes – Pistol thermometers – wear-debris
analysis
UNIT IV REPAIR METHODS FOR BASIC MACHINE ELEMENTS 10
Repair methods for beds, slide ways, spindles, gears, lead screws and bearings – Failure analysis – Failures and their development – Logical fault location methods – Sequential fault location.
UNIT V REPAIR METHODS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT 8
Repair methods for Material handling equipment - Equipment records –Job order systems -Use of
computers in maintenance.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the programme, the students can able to implement the maintenance
function and diferent practices in industries for the sucesful management of maintenance
activites
To identify the diferent maintenance categories like Preventive maintenance, conditon
monitoring and repair of machine elements.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Srivastava S.K., “Industrial Maintenance Management”, S. Chand and Co., 1981
2. Venkataraman .K “Maintancence Enginering and Management”, PHI Learning, Pvt. Ltd.,
207
REFERENCES:
1. Bhatacharya S.N., “Instalation, Servicing and Maintenance”, S. Chand and Co., 195
2. White E.N., “Maintenance Planing”, IDocumentation, Gower Pres, 1979.
2. Garg M.R., “Industrial Maintenance”, S. Chand & Co., 1986.
3. Higins L.R., “Maintenance Enginering Hand bok”, 5th Editon, McGraw Hil, 198.
4. Armstrong, “Conditon Monitoring”, BSIRSA, 198.
5. Davies, “Handbok of Conditon Monitoring”, Chapman & Hal, 196.
6. “Advances in Plant Enginering and Management”, Seminar Procedings - IPE, 196.
EE607 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To provide knowledge of semiconductors and solid mechanics to fabricate MEMS devices. To educate on the rudiments of Micro fabrication techniques. To introduce various sensors and actuators
To introduce diferent materials used for MEMS
To educate on the aplications of MEMS to disciplines beyond Electrical and Mechanical
enginering.93
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS – Energy Domains and Transducers- Sensors and Actuators –
Introduction to Micro fabrication - Silcon based MEMS proceses – New Materials – Review of
Electrical and Mechanical concepts in MEMS – Semiconductor devices – Stres and strain analysis – Flexural beam bending- Torsional deflection.
UNIT I SENSORS AND ACTUATORS-I 9
Electrostatic sensors – Paralel plate capacitors – Aplications – Interdigitated Finger capacitor – Comb drive devices – Micro Gripers – Micro Motors - Thermal Sensing and Actuation – Thermal
expansion – Thermal couples – Thermal resistors – Thermal Bimorph - Aplications – Magnetic
Actuators – Micromagnetic components – Case studies of MEMS in magnetic actuators- Actuation
using Shape Memory Aloys
UNIT I SENSORS AND ACTUATORS-I 9
Piezoresistive sensors – Piezoresistive sensor materials - Stres analysis of mechanical elements – Aplications to Inertia, Presure, Tactile and Flow sensors – Piezoelectric sensors and actuators –
piezoelectric efects – piezoelectric materials – Aplications to Inertia , Acoustic, Tactile and Flow
sensors.
UNIT IV MICROMACHINING 9
Silcon Anisotropic Etching – Anisotrophic Wet Etching – Dry Etching of Silcon – Plasma Etching – Dep Reaction Ion Etching (DRIE) – Isotropic Wet Etching – Gas Phase Etchants – Case studies - Basic surface micro machining proceses – Structural and Sacrifcial Materials – Aceleration of
sacrifcial Etch – Striction and Antistriction methods – LIGA Proces - Asembly of 3D MEMS – Foundry proces.
UNIT V POLYMER AND OPTICAL MEMS 9
Polymers in MEMS– Polimide - SU-8 - Liquid Crystal Polymer (LCP) – PDMS – PMMA – Parylene – Fluorocarbon - Aplication to Aceleration, Presure, Flow and Tactile sensors- Optical MEMS –
Lenses and Mirors – Actuators for Active Optical MEMS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Abilty to understand and aply basic science, circuit theory, Electro-magnetic field theory
control theory and aply them to electrical enginering problems. Abilty to understand and analyse, linear and digital electronic circuits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chang Liu, "Foundations of MEMS", Pearson Education Inc., 206.
2. Stephen D Senturia, "Microsystem Design", Springer Publication, 200.
3. Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture” Tata McGraw Hil, New
Delhi, 202.
REFERENCES:
1. Nadim Maluf,“ An Introduction to Micro Electro Mechanical System Design”, Artech House,
200.
2. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “ The MEMS Handbok”, CRC pres Baco Raton, 200
3. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan, Osama O. Awadelkarim, "Micro Sensors MEMS and
Smart Devices", John Wiley & Son LTD,202
4. James J.Alen, "Micro Electro Mechanical System Design", CRC Pres Publisher, 2010
5. Thomas M.Adams and Richard A.Layton, “Introduction MEMS, Fabrication and Aplication,”
Springer 2012.94
IE605 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the various components and functions of production planing and control such
as work study, product planing, proces planing, production scheduling, Inventory Control. To know the recent trends like manufacturing requirement Planing (MRP I) and Enterprise
Resource Planing (ERP).
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Objectives and benefits of planing and control-Functions of production control-Types of productionjob-
batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect - Functional aspects- Operational aspect-Durabilty and dependabilty aspect aesthetic aspect. Profit consideration- Standardization, Simplifcation & specialization- Break even analysis-Economics of a new design.
UNIT I WORK STUDY 9
Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of proces - Critcal analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement - Techniques of work
measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard data - Predetermined motion time standards.
UNIT I PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9
Product planing-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack of
product planing-Proces planing and routing-Pre requisite information neded for proces planing- Steps in proces planing-Quantiy determination in batch production-Machine capacity, balancing- Analysis of proces capabilties in a multi product system.
UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9
Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Gant
charts-Perpetual oading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance – Flow production scheduling- Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing – Production Control systems-Periodic batch
control-Material requirement planing kanban – Dispatching-Progres reporting and expeditng- Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.
UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9
Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Efect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures. Two
bin system -Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantiy and economic lot size- ABC analysis-Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production planing systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP I and ERP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to prepare production planing and
control activites such as work study, product planing, production scheduling, Inventory
Control. They can plan manufacturing requirements manufacturing requirement Planing (MRP I) and
Enterprise Resource Planing (ERP).
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Enginering and Production Management”, First editon, S.
Chand and Company, 200.
2. James.B.Dilworth,”Operations management – Design, Planing and Control for manufacturing
and services” Mcgraw Hil International editon 192.
REFERENCES:95
1. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planing and Control”, Universal Bok Corpn.1984
2. Elwod S.Bufa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, 8th
Editon, John Wiley and Sons, 200.
3. Kanishka Bedi, “ Production and Operations management”, 2
nd Editon, Oxford university
pres, 207.
4. Melynk, Denzler, “ Operations management – A value driven aproach” Irwin Mcgraw hil.
5. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management”, 9th editon, Thomson learning IE,
207
6. Jain. K.C & L.N. Agarwal, “Production Planing Control and Industrial Management”, Khana
Publishers, 190.
7. Chary. S.N. “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata McGraw
Hil, 195.
8. Upendra Kachru, “Production and Operations Management – Text and cases”, 1st Editon, Excel boks 207.
MG6071 ENTERPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To develop and strengthen entrepreneurial quality and motivation in students and to impart
basic entrepreneurial skils and understanding to run a busines eficiently and efectively.
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Entrepreneur – Types of Entrepreneurs – Diference betwen Entrepreneur and Intrapreneur
Entrepreneurship in Economic Growth, Factors Afecting Entrepreneurial Growth.
UNIT I MOTIVATION 9
Major Motives Influencing an Entrepreneur – Achievement Motivation Training, Self Rating, Busines
Games, Thematic Aperception Test – Stres Management, Entrepreneurship Development
Programs – Ned, Objectives.
UNIT I BUSINESS 9
Smal Enterprises – Definiton, Clasifcation – Characteristics, Ownership Structures – Project
Formulation – Steps involved in seting up a Busines – identifying, selecting a God Busines
oportunity, Market Survey and Research, Techno Economic Feasibilty Asesment – Preparation of
Preliminary Project Reports – Project Apraisal – Sources of Information – Clasifcation of Neds
and Agencies.
UNIT IV FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING 9
Ned – Sources of Finance, Term Loans, Capital Structure, Financial Instiution, Management of
working Capital, Costing, Break Even Analysis, Taxation – Income Tax, Excise Duty – Sales Tax.
UNIT V SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS 9
Sicknes in smal Busines – Concept, Magnitude, Causes and Consequences, Corective Measures
- Busines Incubators – Government Policy for Smal Scale Enterprises – Growth Strategies in smal
industry – Expansion, Diversifcation, Joint Venture, Merger and Sub Contracting.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : Upon completion of the course, students wil be able to gain knowledge and skils neded to
run a busines sucesfuly.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Khanka. S.S., “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd., Ram Nagar, New Delhi,
2013.96
2. Donald F Kuratko, “Entreprenuership – Theory, Proces and Practice”, 9
th Editon, Cengage
Learning, 2014.
REFERENCES :
1. Hisrich R D, Peters M P, “Entrepreneurship” 8th Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 2013.
2. Mathew J Manimala, "Enterprenuership theory at cros roads: paradigms and praxis” 2
nd
Editon Dream tech, 205.
3. Rajev Roy, "Entrepreneurship" 2
nd Editon, Oxford University Pres, 201.
4. EDI “Faulty and External Experts – A Hand Bok for New Entrepreneurs Publishers:
Entrepreneurship Development”, Instiute of India, Ahmadabad, 1986.
ME6013 DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSELS AND PIPING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the Mathematical knowledge to design presure vesels and piping
To understand the abilty to cary of stres analysis in presure vesels and piping
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 3
Methods for determining streses – Terminology and Ligament Eficiency – Aplications.
UNIT I STRESSES IN PRESSURE VESSELS 15
Introduction – Streses in a circular ring, cylinder –Dilation of presure vesels, Membrane stres
Analysis of Vesel – Cylindrical, spherical and, conical heads – Thermal Streses – Discontinuity
streses in presure vesels.
UNIT I DESIGN OF VESSELS 15
Design of Tal cylindrical self suporting proces columns – Suports for short vertical vesels – Stres concentration at a variable Thicknes transiton section in a cylindrical vesel, about a circular
hole, eliptical openings. Theory of Reinforcement – Presure Vesel Design.
UNIT IV BUCKLING AND FRACTURE ANALYSIS IN VESSELS 8
Buckling phenomenon – Elastic Buckling of circular ring and cylinders under external presure –
colapse of thick waled cylinders or tubes under external presure – Efect of suports on Elastic
Buckling of Cylinders – Buckling under combined External presure and axial oading.
UNIT V PIPING 4
Introduction – Flow diagram – piping layout and piping stres Analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the mathematical fundamental
for the design of presure vesels and pipes. Further they can able to analyse and design of
presure vesels and piping.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John F. Harvey, "Theory and Design of Presure Vesels", CBS Publishers and
Distributors,1987.
REFERENCES:97
1. Henry H. Bedner, “Presure Vesels, Design Hand Bok", CBS publishers and Distributors,
1987.
2. Stanley, M. Wales, “Chemical proces equipment, selection and Design". Buterworths series
in Chemical Enginering, 198.
3. Wiliam. J., Bes, “Aproximate Methods in the Design and Analysis of Presure Vesels and
Piping”, Pre ASME Presure Vesels and Piping Conference, 197.
4. Sam Kanapan, “Introduction to Pipe Stres Analysis”. John Wiley and Sons, 1985.
ME6014 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To introduce Governing Equations of viscous fluid flows
To introduce numerical modeling and its role in the field of luid flow and heat ransfer To enable the students to understand the various discretization methods, solution procedures
and turbulence modeling. To create confidence to solve complex problems in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer by
using high sped computers.
UNIT I GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 8
Basics of computational fluid dynamics – Governing equations of fluid dynamics – Continuity,
Momentum and Energy equations – Chemical species transport – Physical boundary conditons – Time-averaged equations for Turbulent Flow – Turbulent–Kinetic Energy Equations – Mathematical
behaviour of PDEs on CFD - Eliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations.
UNIT I FINITE DIFFERENCE AND FINITE VOLUME METHODS FOR DIFFUSION 9
Derivation of finite diference equations – Simple Methods – General Methods for first and second
order acuracy – Finite volume formulation for steady state One, Two and Thre -dimensional
difusion problems –Parabolic equations – Explicit and Implicit schemes – Example problems on
eliptic and parabolic equations – Use of Finite Diference and Finite Volume methods.
UNIT I FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION DIFFUSION 10
Steady one-dimensional convection and difusion – Central, upwind diferencing schemes properties
of discretization schemes – Conservativenes, Boundednes, Transportivenes, Hybrid, Power-law,
QUICK Schemes.
UNIT IV FLOW FIELD ANALYSIS 9
Finite volume methods -Representation of the presure gradient term and continuity equation – Stagered grid – Momentum equations – Presure and Velocity corections – Presure Corection
equation, SIMPLE algorithm and its variants – PISO Algorithms.
UNIT V TURBULENCE MODELS AND MESH GENERATION 9
Turbulence models, mixing length model, Two equation (k-Є) models – High and low Reynolds
number models – Structured Grid generation – Unstructured Grid generation – Mesh refinement – Adaptive mesh – Software tols.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS98
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able
To create numerical modeling and its role in the field of luid flow and heat ransfer To use the various discretization methods, solution procedures and turbulence modeling to
solve flow and heat ransfer problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Versteg, H.K., and Malalasekera, W., "An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The
finite volume Method", Pearson Education Ltd.Second Editon, 207.
2. Ghoshdastidar, P.S., "Computer Simulation of flow and heat transfer", Tata McGraw Hil
Publishing Company Ltd., 198.
REFERENCES:
1. Patankar, S.V. "Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow", Hemisphere Publishing Corporation,
204.
2. Chung, T.J. "Computational Fluid Dynamics", Cambridge University, Pres, 202.
3. Ghoshdastidar P.S., "Heat Transfer", Oxford University Pres, 205
4. Muralidhar, K., and Sundararajan, T., "Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer", Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi, 195.
5. ProdipNiyogi, Chakrabarty, S.K., Laha, M.K. "Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics", Pearson Education, 205.
6. Anil W. Date "Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics" Cambridge University Pres,
205.
ME6015 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To provide knowledge and training in using optimization techniques under limited resources for
the enginering and busines problems.
UNIT I LINEAR MODELS 15
The phase of an operation research study – Linear programming – Graphical method– Simplex
algorithm – Duality formulation – Sensitvity analysis.
UNIT I TRANSPORTATION MODELS AND NETWORK MODELS 8
Transportation Asignment Models –Traveling Salesman problem-Networks models – Shortest route
– Minimal spaning tre – Maximum flow models –Project network – CPM and PERT networks – Critcal path scheduling – Sequencing models.
UNIT I INVENTORY MODELS 6
Inventory models – Economic order quantiy models – Quantiy discount models – Stochastic
inventory models – Multi product models – Inventory control models in practice.
UNIT IV QUEUEING MODELS 6
Queueing models - Queueing systems and structures – Notation parameter – Single server and multi
server models – Poison input – Exponential service – Constant rate service – Infinite population – Simulation.
UNIT V DECISION MODELS 109
Decision models – Game theory – Two person zero sum games – Graphical solution- Algebraic
solution– Linear Programming solution – Replacement models – Models based on service life – Economic life– Single /Multi variable search technique – Dynamic Programming – Simple Problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to use the optimization techniques for
use enginering and Busines problems
TEXT BOOK:
1. Taha H.A., “Operations Research”, Sixth Editon, Prentice Hal of India, 203.
REFERENCES:
1. Shenoy G.V. and Srivastava U.K., “Operation Research for Management”, Wiley Eastern,
194.
2. Bazara M.J., Jarvis and Sherali H., “Linear Programming and Network Flows”, John Wiley,
190.
3. Philp D.T. and Ravindran A., “Operations Research”, John Wiley, 192.
4. Hilier and Libeberman, “Operations Research”, Holden Day, 1986
5. Budnick F.S., “Principles of Operations Research for Management”, Richard D Irwin, 190.
6. Tulsian and Pasdey V., “Quantiative Techniques”, Pearson Asia, 202.
ME6016 ADVANCED I.C ENGINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the underlying principles of operation of diferent IC Engines and components. To provide knowledge on polutant formation, control, alternate fuel etc. UNIT I SPARK IGNITION ENGINES 9
Mixture requirements – Fuel injection systems – Monopoint, Multipoint & Direct injection - Stages of
combustion – Normal and Abnormal combustion – Knock - Factors afecting knock – Combustion
chambers.
UNIT I COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES 9
Diesel Fuel Injection Systems - Stages of combustion – Knocking – Factors afecting knock – Direct
and Indirect injection systems – Combustion chambers – Fuel Spray behaviour – Spray structure and
spray penetration – Air motion - Introduction to Turbocharging.
UNIT I POLLUTANT FORMATION AND CONTROL 9
Polutant – Sources – Formation of Carbon Monoxide, Unburnt hydrocarbon, Oxides of Nitrogen, Smoke and Particulate mater – Methods of controling Emisions – Catalytic converters, Selective
Catalytic Reduction and Particulate Traps – Methods of measurement – Emision norms and Driving
cycles.
UNIT IV ALTERNATIVE FUELS 9
Alcohol, Hydrogen, Compresed Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas and Bio Diesel - Properties,
Suitabilty, Merits and Demerits - Engine Modifcations.10
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9
Air asisted Combustion, Homogeneous charge compresion igniton engines – Variable Geometry
turbochargers – Common Rail Direct Injection Systems - Hybrid Electric Vehicles – NOx Adsorbers - Onboard Diagnostics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to compare the operations of diferent
IC Engine and components and can evaluate the polutant formation, control, alternate fuel
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ramalingam. K.K., "Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals", Scitech Publications, 202.
2. Ganesan, "Internal Combustion Engines", I Editon, TMH, 202.
REFERENCES:
1. Mathur. R.B. and R.P. Sharma, "Internal Combustion Engines"., Dhanpat Rai & Sons 207.
2. Dufy Smith, "Auto Fuel Systems", The God Heart Wilcox Company, Inc., 1987.
3. Eric Chowenitz, "Automobile Electronics", SAE Publications, 195
ME6017 DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To learn the thermal and stres analysis on various parts of the heat exchangers
To analyze the sizing and rating of the heat exchangers for various aplications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Types of heat exchangers, shel and tube heat exchangers – regenerators and recuperators - Temperature distribution and its implications - Parts description, Clasifcation as per Tubular
Exchanger Manufacturers Asociation (TEMA)
UNIT I PROCESS DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS 9
Heat transfer corelations, Overal heat transfer coeficient, analysis of heat exchangers – LMTD and
efectivenes method. Sizing of ined tube heat exchangers, U tube heat exchangers, Design of shel
and tube heat exchangers, fouling factors, presure drop calculations.
UNIT I STRESS ANALYSIS 9
Stres in tubes – header shets and presure vesels – thermal streses, shear streses - types of
failures, buckling of tubes, flow induced vibration.
UNIT IV COMPACT AND PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER 9
Types- Merits and Demerits- Design of compact heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers,
performance influencing parameters, limitations.
UNIT V CONDENSERS AND COOLING TOWERS 9
Design of surface and evaporative condensers – coling tower – performance characteristics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the mathematical knowledge
for thermal and stres analysis on various parts of the heat exchangers components.101
TEXT BOOKS:
1. SadikKakac and Hongtan Liu, "Heat Exchangers Selection", Rating and Thermal Design, CRC
Pres, 202.
2. Shah,R. K., Dušan P. Sekulić, "Fundamentals of heat exchanger design", John Wiley & Sons,
203.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert W. Serth, "Proces heat transfer principles and aplications", Academic pres,
Elesevier, 207.
2. Sarit Kumar Das, "Proces heat ransfer", Alpha Science International, 205
3. John E. Heselgreaves, "Compact heat exchangers: selection, design, and operation", Elsevier science Ltd, 201.
4. Kupan. T., "Heat exchanger design hand bok", New York :Marcel Deker, 200.
5. Eric M. Smith, "Advances in thermal design of heat exchangers: a numerical aproach: direct- sizing, step-wise rating, and transients", John Wiley & Sons, 199.
ME6018 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To know the principle methods, areas of usage, posibilties and limitations as wel as
environmental efects of the Aditve Manufacturing technologies
To be familar with the characteristics of the diferent materials those are used in Aditve
Manufacturing.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10
Overview – History - Ned-Clasifcation -Aditve Manufacturing Technology in product development- Materials for Aditve Manufacturing Technology – Toling - Aplications.
UNIT I CAD & REVERSE ENGINEERING 10
Basic Concept – Digitzation techniques – Model Reconstruction – Data Procesing for Aditve
Manufacturing Technology: CAD model preparation – Part Orientation and suport generation – Model Slicing –Tol path Generation – Softwares for Aditve Manufacturing Technology: MIMICS,
MAGICS.
UNIT I LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 10
Clasifcation – Liquid based system – Stereolithography Aparatus (SLA)- Principle, proces,
advantages and aplications - Solid based system –Fused Depositon Modeling - Principle, proces,
advantages and aplications, Laminated Object Manufacturing
UNIT IV POWDER BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 10
Selective Laser Sintering – Principles of SLS proces - Proces, advantages and aplications, Thre
Dimensional Printing - Principle, proces, advantages and aplications- Laser Enginered Net
Shaping (LENS), Electron Beam Melting.
UNIT V MEDICAL AND BIO-ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 5
Customized implants and prosthesis: Design and production. Bio-Aditve Manufacturing- Computer
Aided Tisue Enginering (CATE) – Case studies102
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to compare diferent method and
discus the efects of the Aditve Manufacturing technologies and analyse the characteristics
of the diferent materials in Aditve Manufacturing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and aplications”, Third
Editon, World Scientifc Publishers, 2010.
2. Gebhardt A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 203.
REFERENCES:
1. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Enginering aplications : A tol box for
prototype development”, CRC Pres, 207.
2. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 206.
3. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., “Rapid Toling: Technologies and Industrial Aplications”, CRC
pres, 200.
ME6019 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING AND MATERIALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To study and understand the various Non Destructive Evaluation and Testing methods, theory
and their industrial aplications.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF NDT 7
NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Overview of the Non Destructive Testing Methods for the detection of
manufacturing defects as wel as material characterisation. Relative merits and limitations, Various
physical characteristics of materials and their aplications in NDT., Visual inspection – Unaided and
aided.
UNIT I SURFACE NDE METHODS 8
Liquid Penetrant Testing - Principles, types and properties of liquid penetrants, developers,
advantages and limitations of various methods, Testing Procedure, Interpretation of results. Magnetic
Particle Testing- Theory of magnetism, inspection materials Magnetisation methods, Interpretation
and evaluation of test indications, Principles and methods of demagnetization, Residual magnetism.
UNIT I THERMOGRAPHY AND EDDY CURRENT TESTING (ET) 10
Thermography- Principles, Contact and non contact inspection methods, Techniques for aplying
liquid crystals, Advantages and limitation - infrared radiation and infrared detectors, Instrumentations
and methods, aplications.Edy Curent Testing-Generation of edy curents, Properties of edy
curents, Edy curent sensing elements, Probes, Instrumentation, Types of arangement, Aplications, advantages, Limitations, Interpretation/Evaluation.
UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING (UT) AND ACOUSTIC EMISSION (AE) 10
Ultrasonic Testing-Principle, Transducers, transmision and pulse-echo method, straight beam and
angle beam, instrumentation, data representation, A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Phased Aray Ultrasound,
Time of Flight Difraction. Acoustic Emision Technique –Principle, AE parameters, Aplications
UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY (RT) 10103
Principle, interaction of X-Ray with mater, imaging, film and film les techniques, types and use of
filters and screns, geometric factors, Inverse square, law, characteristics of films - grainines,
density, sped, contrast, characteristic curves, Penetrameters, Exposure charts, Radiographic
equivalence. Fluoroscopy- Xero-Radiography, Computed Radiography, Computed Tomography
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to use the various Non Destructive
Testing and Testing methods understand for defects and characterization of industrial
components
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T.Jayakumar, M.Thavasimuthu “Practical Non-Destructive Testing”, Narosa
Publishing House, 209.
2. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised editon, New Age
International Publishers, 2010
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbok,”Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, American Society of
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 20, Volume-17.
2. Paul E Mix, “Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide”, Wiley, 2nd Editon New
Jersey, 205
3. Charles, J. Helier,“ Handbok of Nondestructive evaluation”, McGraw Hil, New York 201.
4. ASNT, American Society for Non Destructive Testing, Columbus, Ohio, NDT Handbok,Vol. 1,
Leak Testing, Vol. 2, Liquid Penetrant Testing, Vol. 3, Infrared and Thermal Testing Vol. 4,
Radiographic Testing, Vol. 5, Electromagnetic Testing, Vol. 6, Acoustic Emision Testing, Vol.
7, Ultrasonic Testing
ME6020 VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: The student wil be able to understand the sources of vibration and noise in automobiles and
make design modifcations to reduce the vibration and noise and improve the life of the
components
UNIT I BASICS OF VIBRATION 9
Introduction, clasifcation of vibration: fre and forced vibration, undamped and damped vibration,
linear and non linear vibration, response of damped and undamped systems under harmonic force,
analysis of single degre and two degre of fredom systems, torsional vibration, determination of
natural frequencies.
UNIT I BASICS OF NOISE 9
Introduction, amplitude, frequency, wavelength and sound presure level, aditon, subtraction and
averaging decibel levels, noise dose level, legislation, measurement and analysis of noise,
measurement environment, equipment, frequency analysis, tracking analysis, sound quality analysis.
UNIT I AUTOMOTIVE NOISE SOURCES 9
Noise Characteristics of engines, engine overal noise levels, asesment of combustion noise,
asesment of mechanical noise, engine radiated noise, intake and exhaust noise, engine necesary
contributed noise, transmision noise, aerodynamic noise, tire noise, brake noise.104
UNIT IV CONTROL TECHNIQUES 9
Vibration isolation, tuned absorbers, un-tuned viscous dampers, damping treatments, aplication
dynamic forces generated by IC engines, engine isolation, crank shaft damping, modal analysis of the
mas elastic model shock absorbers.
UNIT V SOURCE OF NOISE AND CONTROL 9
Methods for control of engine noise, combustion noise, mechanical noise, predictive analysis,
paliative treatments and enclosures, automotive noise control principles, sound in enclosures, sound
energy absorption, sound transmision through bariers
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS105
OUTCOMES: Understanding causes, source and types of vibrations in machineries
Gaining knowledge in sources and measurement standard of noise
Abilty to design and develop vibrations and noise control systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Singiresu S.Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations”, 5th Editon, Pearson Education, 2010
REFERENCES:
1. Benson H. Tongue, “Principles of Vibrations”, 2nd Editon, Oxford University, 207
2. David Bies and Colin Hansen, “Enginering Noise Control – Theory and Practice”,4th Editon,
E and FN Spon, Taylore & Francise e-Library, 209
3. Wiliam T. Thomson, Marie Dilon Dahleh, Chandramouli Padmanabhan, “Theory of
Vibration with Application”, 5
th Editon Pearson Education, 201
4. Grover. G.T., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Nem Chand and Bros., 196
5. Bernard Chalen and Rodica Baranescu - “Diesel Engine Reference Bok”, Second Editon,
SAE International, 199.
6. Julian Hapian-Smith - “An Introduction to Modern Vehicle Design”- Buterworth-Heineman,
204
7. Rao, J.S and Gupta, K., “Introductory course on Theory and Practice of Mechanical
Vibration”, 2nd Editon, New Age International Publications, 2010
8. Shabana. A.A., “Theory of vibrations – An introduction”, 2nd Editon, Springer, 2010
9. Balakumar Balachandran and Edward B. Magrab, “Fundamentals of Vibrations”, 1st Editon,
Cengage Learning, 209
10. John Fenton, “Handbok of Automotive body Construction and Design Analysis – Profesional
Enginering Publishing, 198
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
R - 2013
B.E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
I – VI SEMESTERS CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS
SEMESTER I
SL. No. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. HS6151 Technical English – I 3 1 0 4
2. MA6151 Mathematics – I 3 1 0 4
3. PH6151 Engineering Physics – I 3 0 0 3
4. CY6151 Engineering Chemistry – I 3 0 0 3
5. GE6151 Computer Programming 3 0 0 3
6. GE6152 Engineering Graphics 2 0 3 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE6161 Computer Practices Laboratory 0 0 3 2
8. GE6162 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 3 2
9. GE6163 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory - I 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 17 2 1 26
SEMESTER II
SL. No. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. HS6251 Technical English – II 3 1 0 4
2. MA6251 Mathematics – II 3 1 0 4
3. PH6251 Engineering Physics – II 3 0 0 3
4. CY6251 Engineering Chemistry – II 3 0 0 3
5. GE6252 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering 4 0 0 4
6. GE6253 Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE6261 Computer Aided Drafting and Modelling Laboratory 0 1 2 2
8. GE6262 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory - I 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 19 4 4 252
SEMESTER III
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. MA6351 Transforms and Partial Differential Equations 3 1 0 4
2. CE6306 Strength of Materials 3 1 0 4
3. ME6301 Engineering Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
4. CE6451 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery 3 0 0 3
5. ME6302 Manufacturing Technology - I 3 0 0 3
6. EE6351 Electrical Drives and Controls 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME631 Manufacturing Technology Laboratory - I 0 0 3 2
8. CE6461 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery Laboratory 0 0 3 2
9. EE6365 Electrical Engineering Laboratory 0 0 3 2
TOTAL 18 2 9 26
SEMESTER IV
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. MA6452 Statistics and Numerical Methods 3 1 0 4
2. ME6401 Kinematics of Machinery 3 0 0 3
3. ME6402 Manufacturing Technology– II 3 0 0 3
4. ME6403 Engineering Materials and Metallurgy 3 0 0 3
5. GE6351 Environmental Science and Engineering 3 0 0 3
6. ME6404 Thermal Engineering 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME641 Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–I 0 0 3 2
8. ME6412 Thermal Engineering Laboratory - I 0 0 3 2
9. CE6315 Strength of Materials Laboratory 0 0 3 2
TOTAL 18 1 9 253
SEMESTER V SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. ME6501 Computer Aided Design 3 0 0 3
2. ME6502 Heat and Mas Transfer 3 0 0 3
3. ME6503 Design of Machine Elements 3 0 0 3
4. ME6504 Metrology and Measurements 3 0 0 3
5. ME6505 Dynamics of Machines 3 0 0 3
6. GE6075 Professional Ethics in Engineering 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME651 Dynamics Laboratory 0 0 3 2
8. ME6512 Thermal Engineering Laboratory-I 0 0 3 2
9. ME6513 Metrology and Measurements Laboratory 0 0 3 2
SEMESTER VI
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. ME601 Design of Transmission Systems 3 0 0 3
2. MG6851 Principles of Management 3 0 0 3
3. ME602 Automobile Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. ME603 Finite Element Analysis 3 0 0 3
5. ME604 Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion 3 0 0 3
6. Elective - I 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME61 C.A.D. /C.A.M. Laboratory 0 0 3 2
8. ME612 Design and Fabrication Project 0 0 4 2
9. GE6563 Communication Skills - Laboratory Based 0 0 4 2
SEMESTER VI
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. ME6701 Power Plant Engineering 3 0 0 3
2. ME6702 Mechatronics 3 0 0 3
3. ME6703 Computer Integrated Manufacturing Systems 3 0 0 3
4. GE6757 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3
5. Elective – I 3 0 0 3
6. Elective – I 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME671 Simulation and Analysis Laboratory 0 0 3 2
8. ME6712 Mechatronics Laboratory 0 0 3 2
9. ME6713 Comprehension 0 0 2 1
SEMESTER VI
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
THEORY
1. MG6863 Engineering Economics 3 0 0 3
2. Elective – IV 3 0 0 3
3. Elective – V 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
4. ME681 Project Work 0 0 12 6
TOTAL 9 0 12 15
TOTAL NUMBER OF CREDITS TO BE EARNED FOR AWARD OF THE DEGREE = 18
ELECTIVES FOR B.E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SEMESTER VI
Elective I
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. MG6072 Marketing Management 3 0 0 3
2. ME601 Quality Control and Reliability Engineering 3 0 0 3
3. ME602 Refrigeration and Air conditioning 3 0 0 3
4. ME603 Renewable Sources of Energy 3 0 0 3
5. ME604 Unconventional Machining Processes 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VI
Elective I
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. ME605 Process Planing and Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3
2. ME606 Design of Jigs, Fixtures and Press Tools 3 0 0 3
3. ME607 Composite Materials and Mechanics 3 0 0 3
4. ME608 Welding Technology 3 0 0 3
5. ME609 Energy Conservation and Management 3 0 0 3
Elective I
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. ME6010 Robotics 3 0 0 3
2. GE6081 Fundamentals of Nano-science 3 0 0 3
3. ME601 Thermal Turbo Machines 3 0 0 3
4. ME6012 Maintenance Engineering 3 0 0 3
5. EE607 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 3 0 0 35
SEMESTER-VI
Elective IV
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. IE605 Production Planing and Control 3 0 0 3
2. MG6071 Entrepreneurship Development 3 0 0 3
3. ME6013 Design of Pressure Vessels and Piping 3 0 0 3
4. ME6014 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3
5. ME6015 Operations Research 3 0 0 3
Elective V
SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C
1. ME6016 Advanced I.C. Engines 3 0 0 3
2. ME6017 Design of Heat Exchangers 3 0 0 3
3. ME6018 Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
4. ME6019 Non Destructive Testing and Materials 3 0 0 3
5. ME6020 Vibration and Noise Control 3 0 0 36
HS6151 TECHNICAL ENGLISH – I L T P C 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
1. To enable learners of Engineering and Technology develop their basic communication skills in
English.
2. To emphasize specially the development of speaking skills amongst learners of Engineering and
Technology.
3. To ensure that learners use the electronic media such as internet and supplement the learning
materials used in the classroom.
4. To inculcate the habit of reading and writing leading to effective and efficient communication.
UNIT I 9+3Listening - Introducing learners to GIE - Types of listening - Listening to audio (verbal & sounds);
Speaking - Speaking about one’s place, important festivals etc. – Introducing oneself, one’s family /
friend; Reading - Skimming a reading passage – Scanning for specifc information - Note-making;
Writing - Fre writng on any given topic (My favourite place / Hobies / Schol ife, etc.) - Sentence
completion - Autobiographical writng (writng about one’s leisure time activites, hometown, etc.);
Grammar - Prepositons - Reference words - Wh-questions - Tenses (Simple); Vocabulary - Word
formation - Word expansion (rot words / etymology); E-materials - Interactive exercises for Grammar
& Vocabulary - Reading comprehension exercises - Listening to audio files and answering questions.
UNIT I 9+3
Listening - Listening and responding to video lectures / talks; Speaking - Describing a simple process
(filing a form, etc.) - Asking and answering questions - Telephone skils – Telephone etiquete;
Reading – Critcal reading - Finding key information in a given text - Sifting facts from opinions;
Writng - Biographical writng (place, people) - Proces descriptions (general/specifc) - Definitons - Recommendations – Instructions; Grammar - Use of imperatives - Subject-verb agreement;
Vocabulary - Compound words - Word Asociation (conotation); E-materials - Interactive exercises
for Grammar and Vocabulary - Listening exercises with sample telephone conversations / lectures – Picture-based activites.
UNIT I 9+3
Listening - Listening to specifc task - focused audio tracks; Speaking - Role-play – Simulation - Group interaction - Speaking in formal situations (teachers, oficials, foreigners); Reading - Reading
and interpreting visual material; Writng - Jumbled sentences - Coherence and cohesion in writng - Chanel conversion (flowchart into proces) - Types of paragraph (cause and efect / compare and
contrast / narative / analytical) - Informal writng (leter/e-mail/blogs) - Paraphrasing; Grammar - Tenses (Past) - Use of sequence words - Adjectives; Vocabulary - Diferent forms and uses of
words, Cause and efect words; E-materials - Interactive exercises for Grammar and Vocabulary - Excerpts from films related to the theme and folow up exercises - Pictures of flow charts and tables
for interpretations.
UNIT IV 9+3
Listening - Watching videos / documentaries and responding to questions based on them; Speaking - Responding to questions - Diferent forms of interviews - Speaking at diferent types of interviews;
Reading - Making inference from the reading pasage - Predicting the content of a reading pasage;
Writng - Interpreting visual materials (line graphs, pie charts etc.) - Esay writng – Diferent types of
esays; Grammar - Adverbs – Tenses – future time reference; Vocabulary - Single word substiutes - Use of abreviations and acronyms; E-materials - Interactive exercises for Grammar and Vocabulary - Sample interviews - film scenes - dialogue writng.7
UNIT V 9+3
Listening - Listening to diferent acents, Listening to Speches/Presentations, Listening to broadcast
and telecast from Radio and TV; Speaking - Giving impromptu talks, Making presentations on given
topics; Reading - Email communication - Reading the atachment files having a poem/joke/proverb - Sending their responses through email; Writng - Creative writng, Poster making; Grammar - Direct
and indirect spech; Vocabulary - Lexical items (fixed / semi fixed expresions); E-materials -
Interactive exercises for Grammar and Vocabulary - Sending emails with atachment – Audio / video
excerpts of diferent acents - Interpreting posters.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Learners should be able to
Speak clearly, confidently, comprehensibly, and communicate with one or many listeners
using apropriate communicative strategies. Write cohesively and coherently and flawlesly avoiding grammatical erors, using a wide
vocabulary range, organizing their ideas logicaly on a topic. Read diferent genres of texts adopting various reading strategies. Listen/view and comprehend diferent spoken discourses/excerpts in diferent acents
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Department of English, Ana University. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and
Enginers. Orient Blackswan, Chenai. 2012
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and Communication Skils for Students of Science and Enginering.
Orient Blackswan, Chenai. 201
REFERENCES:
1. Raman, Menakshi & Sangetha Sharma. Technical Communication: Principles and Practice.
Oxford University Pres, New Delhi. 201.
2. Regional Instiute of English. English for Enginers. Cambridge University Pres, New Delhi.
206.
3. Rizvi, Ashraf. M. Efective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi. 205
4. Rutherford, Andrea. J Basic Communication Skils for Technology. Pearson, New Delhi. 201.
5. Viswamohan, Aysha. English for Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi.
208.
EXTENSIVE Reading (Not for Examination)
1. Kalam, Abdul. Wings of Fire. Universites Pres, Hyderabad. 199.
WEBSITES:
1. htp:/www.usingenglish.com
2. htp:/www.uefap.com
TEACHING METHODS: Lectures
Activites conducted individualy, in pairs and in groups like self introduction, per introduction,
group poster making, grammar and vocabulary games, etc. Discusions
Role play activites
Short presentations
Listening and viewing activites with folow up activites like discusion, filing up workshets,
writng exercises (using language lab wherever necesary/posible) etc.8
EVALUATION PATTERN:
Internal asesment: 20%
3 tests of which two are pen and paper tests and the other is a combination of diferent modes of
asesment like
Project Asignment Reviews
Creative writng
Poster making, etc.
Al the four skils are to be tested with equal weightage given to each.
Speaking asesment: Individual speaking activites, Pair work activites like role play,
Interview, Group discusions
Reading asesment: Reading pasages with comprehension questions graded from simple to
complex, from direct o inferential
Writng asesment: Writng paragraphs, esays etc. Writng should include grammar and
vocabulary.
Listening/Viewing asesment: Lectures, dialogues, film clipings with questions on verbal as
wel as audio/visual content.
End Semester Examination: 80%
MA6151 MATHEMATICS – I L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques this is neded by enginers for practical
aplications. To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their convergence so that
he/ she wil be familar with limitations of using infinite series aproximations for solutions arising
in mathematical modeling. To familarize the student with functions of several variables. This is neded in many branches
of enginering. To introduce the concepts of improper integrals, Gamma, Beta and Eror functions which are
neded in enginering aplications. To acquaint he student with mathematical tols neded in evaluating multiple integrals and their
usage.
UNIT I MATRICES 9+3
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of eigenvalues
and eigenvectors – Statement and aplications of Cayley-Hamilton Theorem – Diagonalization of
matrices – Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of
quadratic forms.
UNIT I SEQUENCES AND SERIES 9+3
Sequences: Definiton and examples – Series: Types and Convergence – Series of positve terms – Tests of convergence: Comparison test, Integral test and D’Alembert’s ratio test – Alternating series –
Leibnitz’s test – Series of positve and negative terms – Absolute and conditonal convergence.9
UNIT I APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3
Curvature in Cartesian co-ordinates – Centre and radius of curvature – Circle of curvature – Evolutes – Envelopes - Evolute as envelope of normals.
UNIT IV DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3
Limits and Continuity – Partial derivatives – Total derivative – Diferentiation of implicit functions –
Jacobian and properties – Taylor’s series for functions of two variables – Maxima and minima of
functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.
UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3
Double integrals in cartesian and polar cordinates – Change of order of integration – Area enclosed
by plane curves – Change of variables in double integrals – Area of a curved surface - Triple integrals – Volume of Solids.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: This course equips students to have basic knowledge and understanding in one fields of
materials, integral and diferential calculus.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “A Text bok of Enginering Mathematics”, Eighth Editon, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd., 201.
2. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Enginering Mathematics”, 41
st Editon, Khana Publications, Delhi,
201.
REFERENCES:
1. Das, H.K., and Er. Rajnish Verma,” Higher Enginering Mathematics”, S. Chand Private Ltd.,
201.
2. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Enginering Mathematics”, 3rd Editon, Pearson Education,
2012.
3. Peter V. O’Neil,” Advanced Enginering Mathematics”, 7th Editon, Cengage learning, 2012.
4. Ramana B.V, “Higher Enginering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing
Company, New Delhi, 208.
5. Sivarama Krishna Das P. and Rukmangadachari E., “Enginering Mathematics”, Volume I,
Second Editon, PEARSON Publishing, 201.
PH6151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS – I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its aplications relevant to various
streams of Enginering and Technology.
UNIT I CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9
Latice – Unit cel – Bravais latice – Latice planes – Miler indices – d spacing in cubic latice – Calculation of number of atoms per unit cel – Atomic radius – Cordination number – Packing factor
for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures – Diamond and graphite structures (qualitative treatment) - Crystal growth techniques –solution, melt (Bridgman and Czochralski) and vapour growth techniques
(qualitative)10
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER AND THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Elasticity- Hoke’s law - Relationship betwen thre moduli of elasticity (qualitative) – stres -strain
diagram – Poison’s ratio –Factors afecting elasticity –Bending moment – Depresion of a cantilever –Young’s modulus by uniform bending- I-shaped girders
Modes of heat transfer- thermal conductivity- Newton’s law of coling - Linear heat flow – Le’s disc
method – Radial heat flow – Ruber tube method – conduction through compound media (series and
paralel)
UNIT I QUANTUM PHYSICS 9
Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien’s displacement law and
Rayleigh – Jeans’ Law from Planck’s theory – Compton efect. Theory and experimental verifcation – Properties of Mater waves – G.P Thomson experiment -Schrödinger’s wave equation – Time
independent and time dependent equations – Physical signifcance of wave function – Particle in a
one dimensional box - Electron microscope - Scaning electron microscope - Transmision electron
microscope.
UNIT IV ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9
Clasifcation of Sound- decibel- Weber–Fechner law – Sabine’s formula- derivation using growth and
decay method – Absorption Coeficient and its determination –factors afecting acoustics of buildings
and their remedies.
Production of ultrasonics by magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - acoustic grating -Non
Destructive Testing – pulse echo system through transmision and reflection modes - A,B and C –
scan displays, Medical aplications - Sonogram
UNIT V PHOTONICS AND FIBRE OPTICS 9
Spontaneous and stimulated emision- Population inversion -Einstein’s A and B coeficients - derivation. Types of lasers – Nd:YAG, CO2, Semiconductor lasers (homojunction & heterojunction)-
Industrial and Medical Aplications.
Principle and propagation of light in optical fibres – Numerical aperture and Aceptance angle - Types
of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – atenuation, dispersion, bending - Fibre Optical
Communication system (Block diagram) - Active and pasive fibre sensors- Endoscope.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The students wil have knowledge on the basics of physics related to properties of mater,
optics, acoustics etc., and they wil aply these fundamental principles to solve practical
problems related to materials used for enginering aplications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arumugam M. Enginering Physics. Anuradha publishers, 2010
2. Gaur R.K. and Gupta S.L. Enginering Physics. Dhanpat Rai publishers, 209
3. Mani Naidu S. Enginering Physics, Second Editon, PEARSON Publishing, 201.
REFERENCES:
1. Searls and Zemansky. University Physics, 209
2. Mani P. Enginering Physics I. Dhanam Publications, 201
3. Marikani A. Enginering Physics. PHI Learning Pvt., India, 209
4. Palanisamy P.K. Enginering Physics. SCITECH Publications, 201
5. Rajagopal K. Enginering Physics. PHI, New Delhi, 201
6. Senthilkumar G. Enginering Physics I. VRB Publishers, 201.1
CY6151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY - I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To make the students conversant with basics of polymer chemistry. To make the student acquire sound knowledge of second law of thermodynamics and
second law based derivations of importance in enginering aplications in al disciplines. To acquaint the student with concepts of important photophysical and photochemical
proceses and spectroscopy. To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its aplications to
single and two component systems and apreciate the purpose and signifcance of aloys. To acquaint the students with the basics of nano materials, their properties and
aplications.
UNIT I POLYMER CHEMISTRY 9
Introduction: Clasifcation of polymers – Natural and synthetic; Thermoplastic and Thermoseting.
Functionality – Degre of polymerization. Types and mechanism of polymerization: Aditon (Fre
Radical, cationic and anionic); condensation and copolymerization. Properties of polymers: Tg,
Tacticity, Molecular weight – weight average, number average and polydispersity index.
Techniques of polymerization: Bulk, emulsion, solution and suspension. Preparation, properties
and uses of Nylon 6,6, and Epoxy resin.
UNIT I CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS 9
Terminology of thermodynamics - Second law: Entropy - entropy change for an ideal gas,
reversible and ireversible proceses; entropy of phase transitons; Clausius inequality. Fre
energy and work function: Helmholtz and Gibs fre energy functions (problems); Criteria of
spontaneity; Gibs-Helmholtz equation (problems); Clausius-Clapeyron equation; Maxwel
relations – Van’t Hof isotherm and isochore(problems).
UNIT I PHOTOCHEMISTRY AND SPECTROSCOPY 9
Photochemistry: Laws of photochemistry - Grothus–Draper law, Stark–Einstein law and Lambert- Ber Law. Quantum eficiency – determination- Photo proceses - Internal Conversion, Inter- system crosing, Fluorescence, Phosphorescence, Chemiluminescence and Photo-sensitzation.
Spectroscopy: Electromagnetic spectrum - Absorption of radiation – Electronic, Vibrational and
rotational transitons. UV-visible and IR spectroscopy – principles, instrumentation (Block diagram
only).
UNIT IV PHASE RULE AND ALLOYS 9
Phase rule: Introduction, definiton of terms with examples, One Component System- water system
- Reduced phase rule - Two Component Systems- clasifcation – lead-silver system, zinc- magnesium system. Aloys: Introduction- Definiton- Properties of aloys- Signifcance of aloying,
Functions and efect of aloying elements- Ferous aloys- Nichrome and Stainles stel – heat
treatment of stel; Non-ferous aloys – bras and bronze.
UNIT V NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics - distinction betwen molecules, nanoparticles and bulk materials; size-dependent
properties. Nanoparticles: nano cluster, nano rod, nanotube(CNT) and nanowire. Synthesis:
precipitation, thermolysis, hydrothermal, solvothermal, electrode positon, chemical vapour
depositon, laser ablation; Properties and aplications
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The knowledge gained on polymer chemistry, thermodynamics. spectroscopy, phase rule
and nano materials wil provide a strong platform to understand the concepts on these
subjects for further learning.12
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain P.C. and Monica Jain, “Enginering Chemistry”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P)
Ltd., New Delhi, 2010
2. Kanan P., Ravikrishnan A., “Enginering Chemistry”, Sri Krishna Hi-tech Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. Chenai, 209
REFERENCES:
1. Dara S.S, Umare S.S, “Enginering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi
2010
2. Sivasankar B., “Enginering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hil Publishing Company, Ltd., New
Delhi, 208.
3. Gowariker V.R. , Viswanathan N.V. and JayadevSredhar, “Polymer Science”, New Age
International P (Ltd.,), Chenai, 206.
4. Ozin G. A. and Arsenault A. C., “Nanochemistry: A Chemical Aproach to Nanomaterials”,
RSC Publishing, 205.
GE6151 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to: Learn the organization of a digital computer. Be exposed to the number systems. Learn to think logicaly and write pseudo code or draw flow charts for problems. Be exposed to the syntax of C. Be familar with programming in C. Learn to use arays, strings, functions, pointers, structures and unions in C.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Generation and Clasifcation of Computers- Basic Organization of a Computer –Number System – Binary – Decimal – Conversion – Problems. Ned for logical analysis and thinking – Algorithm – Pseudo code – Flow Chart.
UNIT I C PROGRAMMING BASICS 10
Problem formulation – Problem Solving - Introduction to ‘C’ programming –fundamentals – structure
of a ‘C’ program – compilation and linking proceses – Constants, Variables – Data Types – Expresions using operators in ‘C’ – Managing Input and Output operations – Decision Making and
Branching – Loping statements – solving simple scientifc and statistical problems.
UNIT I ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9
Arays – Initalization – Declaration – One dimensional and Two dimensional arays. String- String
operations – String Arays. Simple programs- sorting- searching – matrix operations.
UNIT IV FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 9
Function – definiton of function – Declaration of function – Pas by value – Pas by reference – Recursion – Pointers - Definiton – Initalization – Pointers arithmetic – Pointers and arays- Example
Problems.13
UNIT V STRUCTURES AND UNIONS 9
Introduction – ned for structure data type – structure definiton – Structure declaration – Structure
within a structure - Union - Programs using structures and Unions – Storage clases, Pre-procesor
directives.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to: Design C Programs for problems. Write and execute C programs for simple aplications.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anita Goel and Ajay Mital, “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C”, Dorling
Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education in South Asia, 201.
2. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First
Editon, Oxford University Pres, 209
3. Yashavant P. Kanetkar. “ Let Us C”, BPB Publications, 201.
REFERENCES:
1. Byron S Gotfried, “Programming with C”, Schaum’s Outlines, Second Editon, Tata McGraw- Hil, 206.
2. Dromey R.G., “How to Solve it by Computer”, Pearson Education, Fourth Reprint, 207.
3. Kernighan,B.W and Ritchie,D.M, “The C Programming language”, Second Editon, Pearson
Education, 206.
GE6152 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
2 0 3 4
OBJECTIVES: To develop in students, graphic skils for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
Enginering products. T o expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings. CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1
Importance of graphics in engine ring ap lications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specif cations – Size, layout and folding of drawing she ts – Letering and
dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREE HAND SKETCHING 5+9
Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engine ring practices: Conics – Construction of
elipse, parabola and hyperbola by ec entricity method – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves, Scales:
Construction of Diagonal and Vernier scales.
Visualization concepts and Fre Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of Thre
Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Fre hand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of
objects
UNIT I PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 5+9
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes - Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces Projection of
planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT I PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+914
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the axis is
inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method and auxilary plane method.
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF
SURFACES 5+9
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical posit on when the cut ing plane is inclined to the one of
the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section. Development of
lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones. Development of
lateral surfaces of solids with cut-outs and holes
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6 +9
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positons and miscelaneous problems. Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method .
COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING (Demonstration Only) 3
Introduction to drafting packages and demonstration of their use.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course the student wil be able to
perform fre hand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of
objects. do orthographic projection of lines and plane surfaces. draw projections and solids and development of surfaces. prepare isometric and perspective sections of simple solids. demonstrate computer aided drafting.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Bhat N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Enginering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 50th
Editon, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Enginering Drawing” (Vol. I&I combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore,
207.
2. Luzader, Waren.J. and Duf,John M., “Fundamentals of Enginering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Editon, Prentice Hal of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 205.
3. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engine ring Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Editon, 209.
4. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Enginering Graphics”, New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008. 5. Natrajan K.V., “A text bok of Engine ring Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chenai, 209.
6. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Enginering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 208.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 1071 – 201: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets. 2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 201: Technical products Documentation – Let ering. 3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 20 1 & SP 46 – 20 3: Lines for technical drawings. 4. IS 1 6 9 – 1986 & SP 46 – 203: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.15
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 201: Technical drawings – Projection Methods. Special points applicable to University Examinations on Enginering Graphics:
1. There wil be five questions, each of either or type covering al units of the syl abus. 2. Al questions wil cary equal marks of 20 each making a total of 10 . 3. The answer paper shal consist of drawing she ts of A3 size only. The
students wil be permit ed to use apropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size. 4. The examination wil be conducted in apropriate sesions on the same day
GE6161 COMPUTER PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to: Be familar with the use of Ofice software. Be exposed to presentation and visualization tols. Be exposed to problem solving techniques and flow charts. Be familar with programming in C. Learn to use Arays, strings, functions, structures and unions.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Search, generate, manipulate data using MS ofice/ Open Ofice
2. Presentation and Visualization – graphs, charts, 2D, 3D
3. Problem formulation, Problem Solving and Flowcharts
4. C Programming using Simple statements and expresions
5. Scientifc problem solving using decision making and loping.
6. Simple programming for one dimensional and two dimensional arays.
7. Solving problems using String functions
8. Programs with user defined functions – Includes Parameter Pasing
9. Program using Recursive Function and conversion from given program to flow chart.
10. Program using structures and unions.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to: Aply god programming design methods for program development. Design and implement C programs for simple aplications. Develop recursive programs.
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
Standalone desktops with C compiler 30 Nos.
(or)
Server with C compiler suporting 30 terminals or more.16
GE6162 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic enginering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Enginering.
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 9
Buildings:
(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings. Safety
aspects.
Plumbing Works:
(a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers,
elbows in household fitings.
(b) Study of pipe conections requirements for pumps and turbines.
(c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water suply and sewage works.
(d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe conections – Mixed pipe material conection – Pipe conections with diferent
joining components.
(e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
(a) Study of the joints in rofs, dors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wod work, joints by sawing, planing and cuting.
I MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Welding:
(a) Preparation of arc welding of but joints, lap joints and te joints.
(b) Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
(a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
(b) Driling Practice
Shet Metal Work:
(a) Forming & Bending:
(b) Model making – Trays, funels, etc.
(c) Diferent ype of joints.
Machine asembly practice:
(a) Study of centrifugal pump
(b) Study of air conditoner
Demonstration on:
(a) Smithy operations, upseting, swaging, seting down and bending. Example – Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.17
(b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone puley.
(c) Fiting – Exercises – Preparation of square fiting and ve – fiting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)
I ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 10
1. Residential house wirng using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wirng.
3. Stair case wirng
4. Measurement of electrical quanties – voltage, curent, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement
of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CR.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EOR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose
PCB.
5. Measurement of riple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: abilty to fabricate carpentry components and pipe conections including plumbing works. abilty to use welding equipments to join the structures. abilty to fabricate electrical and electronics circuits.
REFERENCES:
1. Jeyachandran K., Natarajan S. & Balasubramanian S., “A Primer on Enginering
Practices Laboratory”, Anuradha Publications, 207.
2. Jeyapovan T., Saravanapandian M. & Pranitha S., “Enginering Practices Lab Manual”,
Vikas Puplishing House Pvt.Ltd, 206.
3. Bawa H.S., “Workshop Practice”, Tata McGraw – Hil Publishing Company Limited, 207.
4. Rajendra Prasad A. & Sarma P.M.M.S., “Workshop Practice”, Sre Sai Publication, 202.
5. Kanaiah P. & Narayana K.L., “Manual on Workshop Practice”, Scitech Publications, 199.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
CIVIL
1. Asorted components for plumbing consisting of metalic pipes,
plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and
other fitings. 15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fited to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard wodworking tols 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial truses, dor joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tols: (a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
(b) Demoliton Hammer 2 Nos
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer 2 Nos
(e) Hand Driling Machine 2 Nos
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos18
MECHANICAL
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding both with exhaust facilty 5 Nos.
3. Welding acesories like welding shield, chiping hammer,
wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tols 2 Sets.
7. Moulding table, foundry tols 2 Sets.
8. Power Tol: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditoner One each.
ELECTRICAL
1. Asorted electrical components for house wirng 15 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Meger (250V/50V) 1 No.
5. Power Tols: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Asorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Smal PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power
suply
GE6163 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 2 1
PHYSICS LABORATORY – I
OBJECTIVES: To introduce diferent experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts aplied in
optics, thermal physics and properties of mater.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Any FIVE Experiments)
1. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of aceptance angle in an optical fiber.
2. Determination of velocity of sound and compresibilty of liquid – Ultrasonic
interferometer.
3. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Le’s Disc method.
5. Determination of Young’s modulus by Non uniform bending method
6. Determination of specifc resistance of a given coil of wire – Carey Foster’s Bridge19
OUTCOMES: The hands on exercises undergone by the students wil help them to aply physics principles
of optics and thermal physics to evaluate enginering properties of materials.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Diode laser, lycopodium powder, glas plate, optical fiber.
2. Ultrasonic interferometer
3. Spectrometer, mercury lamp, grating
4. Le’s Disc experimental set up
5. Traveling microscope, meter scale, knife edge, weights
6. Carey foster’s bridge set up
(vernier Caliper, Screw gauge, reading lens are required for most of the experiments)
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY- I
OBJECTIVES: To make the student to acquire practical skils in the determination of water quality
parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis. To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
vacometry.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Any FIVE Experiments)
1 Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
2 Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
3 Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
4 Determination of strength of acids in a mixture using conductivity meter.
5 Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer.
(1,10- phenanthroline /thiocyanate method).
6 Determination of molecular weight of polyvinylalcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
7 Conductometric tiration of strong acid vs strong base.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The students wil be outfited with hands-on knowledge in the quantiative chemical analysis of
water quality related parameters.
REFERENCES:
1. Daniel R. Paleros, “Experimental organic chemistry” John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York 201.
2. Furnis B.S. Hanaford A.J, Smith P.W.G and Tatchel A.R., “Vogel’s Textbok of practical
organic chemistry”, LBS Singapore 194.
3. Jefery G.H., Baset J., Mendham J.and Deny vogel’s R.C, “Text bok of quantiative
analysis chemical analysis”, ELBS 5th Edn. Longman, Singapore publishers, Singapore, 196.
4. Kolthof I.M., Sandel E.B. et al. “Quantiative chemical analysis”, Mcmilan, Madras 1980.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Iodine flask - 30 Nos
2. pH meter - 5 Nos
3. Conductivity meter - 5 Nos
4. Spectrophotometer - 5 Nos
5. Ostwald Viscometer - 10 Nos
Common Apparatus : Pipete, Burete, conical flask, percelain tile, dropper (each 30 Nos.)20
HS6251 TECHNICAL ENGLISH I L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To make learners acquire listening and speaking skils in both formal and informal contexts. To help them develop their reading skils by familarizing them with diferent types of reading
strategies. To equip them with writng skils neded for academic as wel as workplace contexts. To make them acquire language skils at heir own pace by using e-materials and language lab
components.
UNIT I 9+3
Listening - Listening to informal conversations and participating; Speaking - Opening a conversation
(gretings, comments on topics like weather) - Turn taking - Closing a conversation (excuses,
general wish, positve comment, thanks); Reading - Developing analytical skils, Deductive and
inductive reasoning - Extensive reading; Writng - Efective use of SMS for sending short notes and
mesages - Using ‘emoticons’ as symbols in email mesages; Grammar - Regular and iregular
verbs - Active and pasive voice; Vocabulary - Homonyms (e.g. ‘can’) - Homophones (e.g. ‘some’,
‘sum’); E-materials - Interactive exercise on Grammar and vocabulary – bloging; Language Lab - Listening to diferent ypes of conversation and answering questions.
UNIT I 9+3
Listening - Listening to situation based dialogues; Speaking - Conversation practice in real life
situations, asking for directions (using polite expresions), giving directions (using imperative
sentences), Purchasing gods from a shop, Discusing various aspects of a film (they have already
sen) or a bok (they have already read); Reading - Reading a short story or an article from
newspaper, Critcal reading, Comprehension skils; Writng - Writng a review / summary of a story /
article, Personal eter (Invitng your friend to a function, congratulating someone for his /her suces,
thanking one’s friends / relatives); Grammar - modal verbs, Purpose expresions; Vocabulary - Phrasal verbs and their meanings, Using phrasal verbs in sentences; E-materials - Interactive
exercises on Grammar and vocabulary, Extensive reading activity (reading stories / novels), Posting
reviews in blogs - Language Lab - Dialogues (Fil up exercises), Recording students’ dialogues.
UNIT I 9+3
Listening - Listening to the conversation - Understanding the structure of conversations; Speaking - Conversation skils with a sense of stres, intonation, pronunciation and meaning - Seking
information – expresing felings (afection, anger, regret, etc.); Reading - Sped reading – reading
pasages with time limit - Skimming; Writng - Minutes of meting – format and practice in the
preparation of minutes - Writng summary after reading articles from journals - Format for journal
articles – elements of technical articles (abstract, introduction, methodology, results, discusion,
conclusion, apendices, references) - Writng strategies; Grammar - Conditonal clauses - Cause
and efect expresions; Vocabulary - Words used as nouns and verbs without any change in the
speling (e.g. ‘rock’, ‘train’, ‘ring’); E-materials - Interactive exercise on Grammar and vocabulary - Sped Reading practice exercises; Language Lab - Intonation practice using EFLU and RIE materials – Atending a meting and writng minutes.
UNIT IV 9+3
Listening - Listening to a telephone conversation, Viewing model interviews (face-to-face, telephonic
and video conferencing); Speaking - Role play practice in telephone skils - listening and responding, -asking questions, -note taking – pasing on mesages, Role play and mock interview for grasping
interview skils; Reading - Reading the job advertisements and the profile of the company concerned –
scaning; Writng - Aplying for a job – cover leter - résumé preparation – vision, mision and goals
of the candidate; Grammar - Numerical expresions - Conectives (discourse markers); Vocabulary -
Idioms and their meanings – using idioms in sentences; E-materials - Interactive exercises on21
Grammar and Vocabulary - Diferent forms of résumés- Filing up a résumé / cover leter; Language
Lab - Telephonic interview – recording the responses - e-résumé writng.
UNIT V 9+3
Listening - Viewing a model group discusion and reviewing the performance of each participant -
Identifying the characteristics of a god listener; Speaking - Group discusion skils – initating the
discusion – exchanging sugestions and proposals – expresing disent/agrement – asertivenes
in expresing opinions – mind maping technique; Reading - Note making skils – making notes from
boks, or any form of writen materials - Intensive reading; Writng – Checklist - Types of reports – Feasibilty / Project report – report format – recommendations / sugestions – interpretation of data
(using charts for efective presentation); Grammar - Use of clauses; Vocabulary – Colocation; E- materials - Interactive grammar and vocabulary exercises - Sample GD - Pictures for discusion,
Interactive grammar and vocabulary exercises; Language Lab - Diferent models of group discusion.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Learners should be able to
Speak convincingly, expres their opinions clearly, initate a discusion, negotiate, argue using
apropriate communicative strategies. Write efectively and persuasively and produce diferent types of writng such as naration,
description, expositon and argument as wel as creative, critcal, analytical and evaluative
writng. Read diferent genres of texts, infer implied meanings and critcaly analyse and evaluate them
for ideas as wel as for method of presentation. Listen/view and comprehend diferent spoken excerpts critcaly and infer unspoken and
implied meanings.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Department of English, Ana University. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and
Enginers. Orient Blackswan, Chenai. 2012
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and Communication Skils for Students of Science and Enginering.
Orient Blackswan, Chenai. 201
REFERENCES:
1. Anderson, Paul V. Technical Communication: A Reader-Centered Aproach. Cengage. New
Delhi. 208
2. Muralikrishna, & Sunita Mishra. Communication Skils for Enginers. Pearson, New Delhi.
201
3. Riordan, Daniel. G. Technical Communication. Cengage Learning, New Delhi. 205
4. Sharma, Sangetha & Binod Mishra. Communication Skils for Enginers and Scientists. PHI
Learning, New Delhi. 209
5. Smith-Worthington, Darlene & Sue Jeferson. Technical Writng for Suces. Cengage, Mason
USA. 207
EXTENSIVE Reading (Not for Examination)
1. Khera, Shiv. You can Win. Macmilan, Delhi. 198.
Websites
1. htp:/www.englishclub.com
2. htp:/owl.english.purdue.edu2
TEACHING METHODS: Lectures
Activites conducted individualy, in pairs and in groups like individual writng and
presentations, group discusions, interviews, reporting, etc
Long presentations using visual aids
Listening and viewing activites with folow up activites like discusions, filing up workshets,
writng exercises (using language lab wherever necesary/posible) etc
Projects like group reports, mock interviews etc using a combination of two or more of the
language skils
EVALUATION PATTERN:
Internal asesment: 20%
3 tests of which two are pen and paper tests and the other is a combination of diferent modes
of asesment like
Project Asignment Report Creative writng, etc.
Al the four skils are to be tested with equal weightage given to each.
Speaking asesment: Individual presentations, Group discusions
Reading asesment: Reading pasages with comprehension questions graded folowing
Blom’s taxonomy
Writng asesment: Writng esays, CVs, reports etc. Writng should include grammar and
vocabulary.
Listening/Viewing asesment: Lectures, dialogues, film clipings with questions on verbal as
wel as audio/visual content graded folowing Blom’s taxonomy.
End Semester Examination: 80%
MA6251 MATHEMATICS – I L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary diferential
equations that model enginering problems. To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus neded for problems in al
enginering disciplines. To develop an understanding of the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to
enable the student to aply them with confidence, in aplication areas such as heat
conduction, elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow the of electric curent. To make the student apreciate the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in
which it is easier to handle the problem that is being investigated.23
UNIT I VECTOR CALCULUS 9+3
Gradient, divergence and curl – Directional derivative – Irotational and solenoidal vector fields – Vector integration – Gren’s theorem in a plane, Gaus divergence theorem and Stokes’ theorem
(excluding profs) – Simple aplications involving cubes and rectangular paralelopipeds.
UNIT I ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Higher order linear diferential equations with constant coeficients – Method of variation of
parameters – Cauchy’s and Legendre’s linear equations – Simultaneous first order linear equations
with constant coeficients.
UNIT I LAPLACE TRANSFORM 9+3
Laplace transform – Suficient conditon for existence – Transform of elementary functions – Basic
properties – Transforms of derivatives and integrals of functions - Derivatives and integrals of
transforms - Transforms of unit step function and impulse functions – Transform of periodic functions.
Inverse Laplace transform -Statement of Convolution theorem – Inital and final value theorems – Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coeficients using Laplace transformation
techniques.
UNIT IV ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 9+3
Functions of a complex variable – Analytic functions: Necesary conditons – Cauchy-Rieman
equations and suficient conditons (excluding profs) – Harmonic and orthogonal properties of
analytic function – Harmonic conjugate – Construction of analytic functions – Conformal maping: w =
z+k, kz, 1/z, z2
, ez and bilnear transformation.
UNIT V COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9+3
Complex integration – Statement and aplications of Cauchy’s integral theorem and Cauchy’s integral
formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series expansions – Singular points – Residues – Cauchy’s residue
theorem – Evaluation of real definite integrals as contour integrals around unit circle and semi-circle
(excluding poles on the real axis).
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The subject helps the students to develop the fundamentals and basic concepts in vector
calculus, ODE, Laplace transform and complex functions. Students wil be able to solve
problems related to enginering aplications by using these techniques.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “A Text bok of Enginering Mathematics”, Eighth Editon, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd.,201.
2. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Enginering Mathematics”, 41
st
Editon, Khana Publications, Delhi,
201.
REFERENCES:
1. Das, H.K., and Er. Rajnish Verma,” Higher Enginering Mathematics”,
S. Chand Private Ltd., 201
2. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Enginering Mathematics”, 3rd Editon, Pearson Education,
2012.
3. Peter V. O’Neil,” Advanced Enginering Mathematics”, 7th Editon, Cengage learning, 2012.
4. Ramana B.V, “Higher Enginering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Company, New
Delhi, 208.
5. Sivarama Krishna Das P. and Rukmangadachari E., “Enginering Mathematics” Volume I,
Second Editon, PEARSON Publishing, 201.24
PH6251 ENGINEERING PHYSICS – I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enrich the understanding of various types of materials and their aplications in enginering
and technology.
UNIT I CONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Conductors – clasical fre electron theory of metals – Electrical and thermal conductivity – Wiedeman – Franz law – Lorentz number – Draw backs of clasical theory – Quantum theory – Fermi distribution function – Efect of temperature on Fermi Function – Density of energy states –
carier concentration in metals.
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Intrinsic semiconductor – carier concentration derivation – Fermi level – Variation of Fermi level with
temperature – electrical conductivity – band gap determination – compound semiconductors -direct
and indirect band gap- derivation of carier concentration in n-type and p-type semiconductor –
variation of Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration – Hal efect –Determination of
Hal coeficient – Aplications.
UNIT I MAGNETIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Origin of magnetic moment – Bohr magneton – comparison of Dia, Para and Fero magnetism – Domain theory – Hysteresis – soft and hard magnetic materials – antiferomagnetic materials – Ferites and its aplications
Superconductivity: properties – Type I and Type I superconductors – BCS theory of
superconductivity(Qualitative) - High Tc superconductors – Aplications of superconductors – SQUID,
cryotron, magnetic levitation.
UNIT IV DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9
Electrical susceptibilty – dielectric constant – electronic, ionic, orientational and space charge
polarization – frequency and temperature dependence of polarisation – internal field – Clausius – Mosoti relation (derivation) – dielectric los – dielectric breakdown – uses of dielectric materials
(capacitor and transformer) – feroelectricity and aplications.
UNIT V ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Metalic glases: preparation, properties and aplications. Shape memory aloys (SMA):
Characteristics, properties of NiTi aloy, aplication, Nanomaterials– Preparation -pulsed laser
depositon – chemical vapour depositon – Aplications – NLO materials –Birefringence- optical Ker
efect – Clasifcation of Biomaterials and its aplications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The students wil have the knowledge on physics of materials and that knowledge wil be used
by them in diferent enginering and technology aplications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arumugam M., Materials Science. Anuradha publishers, 2010
2. Pilai S.O., Solid State Physics. New Age International(P) Ltd., publishers, 209
REFERENCES:
1. Palanisamy P.K. Materials Science. SCITECH Publishers, 201
2. Senthilkumar G. Enginering Physics I. VRB Publishers, 201
3. Mani P. Enginering Physics I. Dhanam Publications, 201
4. Marikani A. Enginering Physics. PHI Learning Pvt., India, 20925
CY6251 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY - I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To make the students conversant with boiler fed water requirements, related problems
and water treatment echniques. Principles of electrochemical reactions, redox reactions in corosion of materials and
methods for corosion prevention and protection of materials. Principles and generation of energy in bateries, nuclear reactors, solar cels, wind mils
and fuel cels. Preparation, properties and aplications of enginering materials. Types of uels, calorifc value calculations, manufacture of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9
Introduction to boiler fed water-requirements-formation of deposits in steam boilers and heat
exchangers- disadvantages (wastage of fuels, decrease in eficiency, boiler explosion) prevention
of scale formation -softening of hard water -external treatment zeolite and demineralization -
internal treatment- boiler compounds (phosphate, calgon, carbonate, coloidal) - caustic
embritlement -boiler corosion-priming and foaming- desalination of brackish water –reverse
osmosis.
UNIT I ELECTROCHEMISTRY AND CORROSION 9
Electrochemical cel - redox reaction, electrode potential- origin of electrode potential- oxidation
potential- reduction potential, measurement and aplications - electrochemical series and its
signifcance - Nernst equation (derivation and problems). Corosion- causes- factors- types- chemical, electrochemical corosion (galvanic, diferential aeration), corosion control - material
selection and design aspects - electrochemical protection – sacrifcial anode method and
impresed curent cathodic method. Paints- constiuents and function. Electroplating of Coper
and electroles plating of nickel.
UNIT I ENERGY SOURCES 9
Introduction- nuclear energy- nuclear fision- controled nuclear fision- nuclear fusion- diferences
betwen nuclear fision and fusion- nuclear chain reactions- nuclear reactor power generator- clasifcation of nuclear reactor- light water reactor- breder reactor- solar energy conversion- solar cels- wind energy. Bateries and fuel cels:Types of bateries- alkaline batery- lead storage
batery- nickel-cadmium batery- lithium batery- fuel cel H2 -O2 fuel cel- aplications.
UNIT IV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Abrasives: definiton, clasifcation or types, grinding whel, abrasive paper and cloth.
Refractories: definiton, characteristics, clasifcation, properties – refractorines and RUL,
dimensional stabilty, thermal spaling, thermal expansion, porosity; Manufacture of alumina,
magnesite and silcon carbide, Portland cement- manufacture and properties - seting and
hardening of cement, special cement- waterprof and white cement–properties and uses. Glas - manufacture, types, properties and uses.
UNIT V FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuel: Introduction- clasifcation of fuels- calorifc value- higher and lower calorifc values- coal- analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate)- carbonization- manufacture of metalurgical coke (Oto
Hofman method) - petroleum- manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius proces)- knocking- octane number - diesel oil- cetane number - natural gas- compresed natural gas(CNG)- liquefied
petroleum gases(LPG)- producer gas- water gas. Power alcohol and bio diesel. Combustion of
fuels: introduction- theoretical calculation of calorifc value- calculation of stoichiometry of fuel and
air ratio- igniton temperature- explosive range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS26
OUTCOMES: The knowledge gained on enginering materials, fuels, energy sources and water
treatment techniques wil faciltate beter understanding of enginering proceses and
aplications for further learning.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vairam S, Kalyani P and SubaRamesh.,“Enginering Chemistry”., Wiley India PvtLtd.,New
Delhi., 201
2. DaraS.S,UmareS.S.“Enginering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi ,2010
REFERENCES:
1 Kanan P. and Ravikrishnan A., “Enginering Chemistry”, Sri Krishna Hi-tech Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. Chenai, 209
2. AshimaSrivastava and Janhavi N N., “Concepts of Enginering Chemistry”, ACME
Learning Private Limited., New Delhi., 2010.
3. RenuBapna and Renu Gupta., “Enginering Chemistry”, Macmilan India Publisher Ltd.,
2010.
4 Pahari A and Chauhan B., “Enginering Chemistry”., Firewal Media., New Delhi., 2010
GE6252 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To explain the basic theorems used in Electrical circuits and the diferent components and
function of electrical machines. To explain the fundamentals of semiconductor and aplications. To explain the principles of digital electronics
To impart knowledge of communication.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASURMENTS 12
Ohm’s Law – Kirchof’s Laws – Steady State Solution of DC Circuits – Introduction to AC Circuits – Waveforms and RMS Value – Power and Power factor – Single Phase and Thre Phase Balanced
Circuits.
Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron Instruments (Ammeters and Voltmeters),
Dynamometer type Wat meters and Energy meters.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL MECHANICS 12
Construction, Principle of Operation, Basic Equations and Aplications of DC Generators, DC Motors,
Single Phase Transformer, single phase induction Motor.
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS 12
Characteristics of PN Junction Diode – Zener Efect – Zener Diode and its Characteristics – Half wave
and Ful wave Rectifers – Voltage Regulation.
Bipolar Junction Transistor – CB, CE, CC Configurations and Characteristics – Elementary Treatment
of Smal Signal Amplifer.27
UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 12
Binary Number System – Logic Gates – Bolean Algebra – Half and Ful Aders – Flip-Flops – Registers and Counters – A/D and D/A Conversion (single concepts)
UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 12
Types of Signals: Analog and Digital Signals – Modulation and Demodulation: Principles of Amplitude
and Frequency Modulations.
Communication Systems: Radio, TV, Fax, Microwave, Satelite and Optical Fibre (Block Diagram
Aproach only).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: abilty to identify the electrical components explain the characteristics of electrical machines. abilty to identify electronics components and use of them to design circuits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mitle N., “Basic Electrical Enginering”, Tata McGraw Hil Editon, New Delhi, 190.
2. Sedha R.S., “Aplied Electronics”, S. Chand & Co., 206.
REFERENCES:
1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S and Muraledharan K A, “Basic Electrical, Electronics
and Computer Enginering”, Tata McGraw Hil, Second Editon, 206.
2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Enginering”, Oxford pres 205.
3. Mehta V K, “Principles of Electronics”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, 194.
4. Mahmod Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline Series,
McGraw Hil, 202.
5. Premkumar N, “Basic Electrical Enginering”, Anuradha Publishers, 203.
GE6253 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To develop capacity to predict the efect of orce and motion in the course of carying out the
design functions of enginering.
UNIT I BASICS AND STATICS OF PARTICLES 12
Introduction – Units and Dimensions – Laws of Mechanics – Lami’s theorem, Paralelogram and
triangular Law of forces – Vectorial representation of forces – Vector operations of forces -aditons,
subtraction, dot product, cros product – Coplanar Forces – rectangular components – Equilbrium of
a particle – Forces in space – Equilbrium of a particle in space – Equivalent systems of forces – Principle of transmisibilty .
UNIT I EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 12
Fre body diagram – Types of suports –Action and reaction forces –stable equilbrium – Moments
and Couples – Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial representation of
moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment – Varignon’s theorem – Single equivalent
force -Equilbrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions – Equilbrium of Rigid bodies in thre dimensions
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 12
Centroids and centre of mas– Centroids of lines and areas - Rectangular, circular, triangular areas
by integration – T section, I section, - Angle section, Holow section by using standard formula –28
Theorems of Papus - Area moments of inertia of plane areas – Rectangular, circular, triangular
areas by integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Holow section by using standard formula – Paralel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem –Principal moments of inertia of plane areas – Principal axes of inertia-Mas moment of inertia –mas moment of inertia for prismatic, cylindrical and
spherical solids from first principle – Relation to area moments of inertia.
UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 12
Displacements, Velocity and aceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilnear motion - Newton’s laws of motion – Work Energy Equation– Impulse and Momentum – Impact of elastic
bodies.
UNIT V FRICTION AND ELEMENTS OF RIGID BODY DYNAMICS 12
Friction force – Laws of sliding friction – equilbrium analysis of simple systems with sliding friction – wedge friction-. Roling resistance -Translation and Rotation of Rigid Bodies – Velocity and
aceleration – General Plane motion of simple rigid bodies such as cylinder, disc/whel and sphere.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: abilty to explain the diferential principles aplies to solve enginering problems dealing with
force, displacement, velocity and aceleration. abilty to analyse the forces in any structures. abilty to solve rigid body subjected to dynamic forces.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ber, F.P and Johnston Jr. E.R., “Vector Mechanics for Enginers (In SI Units): Statics and
Dynamics”, 8th Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Publishing company, New Delhi (204).
2. Vela Murali, “Enginering Mechanics”, Oxford University Pres (2010)
REFERENCES:
1. Hibeler, R.C and Ashok Gupta, “Enginering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics”, 1th Editon,
Pearson Education 2010.
2. Irving H. Shames and Krishna Mohana Rao. G., “Enginering Mechanics – Statics and
Dynamics”, 4th Editon, Pearson Education 206.
3. Meriam J.L. and Kraige L.G., “ Enginering Mechanics- Statics - Volume 1, Dynamics- Volume
2”, Third Editon, John Wiley & Sons,193.
4. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G., “Enginering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics”,
3
rd Editon, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 205.
5. Bhavikati, S.S and Rajashekarapa, K.G., “Enginering Mechanics”, New Age International
(P) Limited Publishers, 198.
6. Kumar, K.L., “Enginering Mechanics”, 3rd Revised Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Publishing
company, New Delhi 208.
GE6261 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND MODELING LABORATORY L T P C
0 1 2 2
OBJECTIVES: To develop skil to use software to create 2D and 3D models.
LIST OF EXERCISES USING SOFTWARE CAPABLE OF DRAFTING AND MODELING
1. Study of capabilties of software for Drafting and Modeling – Cordinate systems (absolute,
relative, polar, etc.) – Creation of simple figures like polygon and general multi-line figures.
2. Drawing of a Title Block with necesary text and projection symbol.29
3. Drawing of curves like parabola, spiral, involute using Bspline or cubic spline.
4. Drawing of ront view and top view of simple solids like prism, pyramid, cylinder, cone, etc, and
dimensioning.
5. Drawing front view, top view and side view of objects from the given pictorial views (eg. V- block, Base of a mixie, Simple stol, Objects with hole and curves).
6. Drawing of a plan of residential building ( Two bed roms, kitchen, hal, etc.)
7. Drawing of a simple stel trus.
8. Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid, cylinder, cone, etc,
9. Drawing isometric projection of simple objects.
10. Creation of 3-D models of simple objects and obtaining 2-D multi-view drawings from 3-D
model.
Note: Ploting of drawings must be made for each exercise and atached to the records writen by
students.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: abilty to use the software packers for drafting and modeling
abilty to create 2D and 3D models of Enginering Components
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
Sl.No Description of Equipment Quantity
1. Pentium IV computer or beter hardware, with
suitable graphics facilty
30 No.
2. Licensed software for Drafting and Modeling. 30 Licenses
3. Laser Printer or Ploter to print /plot drawings 2 No.
GE6262 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 2 1
PHYSICS LABORATORY – I
OBJECTIVES: To introduce diferent experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts aplied in
optics, thermal physics and properties of mater.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Any FIVE Experiments)
1. Determination of Young’s modulus by uniform bending method
2. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
3. Determination of Coeficient of viscosity of a liquid –Poiseuile’s method
4. Determination of Dispersive power of a prism - Spectrometer
5. Determination of thicknes of a thin wire – Air wedge method
6. Determination of Rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum
OUTCOMES: The students wil have the abilty to test materials by using their knowledge of aplied physics
principles in optics and properties of mater.30
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Traveling microscope, meter scale, Knife edge, weights
2. Band gap experimental set up
3. Burete, Capilary tube, ruber tube, stop clock, beaker and weighing balance
4. spectrometer, prism, sodium vapour lamp.
5. Air-wedge experimental set up.
6. Torsion pendulum set up.
(vernier Caliper, Screw gauge, reading lens are required for most of the experiments)
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY - I
OBJECTIVES: To make the student acquire practical skils in the wet chemical and instrumental
methods for quantiative estimation of hardnes, alkalinity, metal ion content, corosion
in metals and cement analysis.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Any FIVE Experiments)
1 Determination of alkalinity in water sample
2 Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardnes of water by EDTA method
3 Estimation of coper content of the given solution by EDTA method
4 Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer
5 Estimation of sodium present in water using flame photometer
6 Corosion experiment – weight los method
7 Conductometric precipitation tiration using BaCl2 and Na2SO4
8 Determination of CaO in Cement.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The students wil be conversant with hands-on knowledge in the quantiative chemical analysis
of water quality related parameters, corosion measurement and cement analysis.
REFERENCES:
1. Daniel R. Paleros, “Experimental organic chemistry” John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
New York, 201.
2. Furnis B.S. Hanaford A.J, Smith P.W.G and Tatchel A.R., “Vogel’s Textbok of
practical organic chemistry, LBS Singapore ,194.
3. Jefery G.H, Baset J., Mendham J. and Deny R.C., “Vogel’s Text bok of
quantiative analysis chemical analysis”, ELBS 5th Edn. Longman, Singapore
publishers, Singapore, 196.
4. Kolthof I.M. and Sandel E.B. et al. Quantiative chemical analysis, McMilan, Madras
1980
• Laboratory clases on alternate weks for Physics and Chemistry.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Potentiometer - 5 Nos
2. Flame photo meter - 5 Nos
3. Weighing Balance - 5 Nos
4. Conductivity meter - 5 Nos
Common Apparatus : Pipete, Burete, conical flask, percelain tile, dropper (30 Nos each)31
MA6351 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES
To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many aplications in enginering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems. To acquaint he student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations. To introduce the efective mathematical tols for the solutions of partial diferential equations
that model several physical proceses and to develop Z transform techniques for discrete time
systems.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 + 3
Formation of partial diferential equations – Singular integrals - Solutions of standard types of first
order partial diferential equations - Lagrange’s linear equation - Linear partial diferential equations of
second and higher order with constant coeficients of both homogeneous and non-homogeneous
types.
UNIT I FOURIER SERIES 9 + 3
Dirchlet’s conditons – General Fourier series – Od and even functions – Half range sine series – Half range cosine series – Complex form of Fourier series – Parseval’s identiy – Harmonic analysis.
UNIT I APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 + 3
Clasifcation of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Solutions of one dimensional wave
equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution of two dimensional
equation of heat conduction (excluding insulated edges).
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9 + 3
Statement of Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s
identiy.
UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9 + 3
Z- transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z - transform (using partial fraction and residues) – Convolution theorem - Formation of diference equations – Solution of diference equations using
Z - transform.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
The understanding of the mathematical principles on transforms and partial diferential
equations would provide them the abilty to formulate and solve some of the physical problems
of enginering.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Verarajan. T., "Transforms and Partial Diferential Equations", Tata McGraw Hil Education
Pvt. Ltd., Second reprint, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Grewal. B.S., "Higher Enginering Mathematics", 42nd Editon, Khana Publishers, Delhi,
2012.
3. Narayanan.S., Manicavachagom Pilay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Enginering Students" Vol. I & I, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt Ltd. 198.
REFERENCES
1. Bali.N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbok of Enginering Mathematics", 7th Editon, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd, 207.32
2. Ramana.B.V., "Higher Enginering Mathematics", Tata Mc-Graw Hil Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 208.
3. Glyn James, "Advanced Modern Enginering Mathematics", 3rd Editon, Pearson Education,
207.
4. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Enginering Mathematics", 8
th Editon, Wiley India, 207.
5. Ray Wylie. C and Baret.L.C, "Advanced Enginering Mathematics", Sixth Editon, Tata
McGraw Hil Education Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
6. Data.K.B., "Mathematical Methods of Science and Enginering", Cengage Learning India Pvt
Ltd, Delhi, 2013.
CE6306 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the streses developed in bars, compounds bars, beams, shafts, cylinders and
spheres.
UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 9
Rigid bodies and deformable solids – Tension, Compresion and Shear Streses – Deformation of
simple and compound bars – Thermal streses – Elastic constants – Volumetric strains –Streses on
inclined planes – principal streses and principal planes – Mohr’s circle of stres.
UNIT I TRANSVERSE LOADING ON BEAMS AND STRESSES IN BEAM 9
Beams – types transverse loading on beams – Shear force and bending moment in beams – Cantilevers – Simply suported beams and over – hanging beams. Theory of simple bending–
bending stres distribution – Load carying capacity – Proportioning of sections – Flitched beams – Shear stres distribution.
UNIT I TORSION 9
Torsion formulation streses and deformation in circular and holows shafts – Steped shafts– Deflection in shafts fixed at the both ends – Streses in helical springs – Deflection of helical springs,
cariage springs.
UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9
Double Integration method – Macaulay’s method – Area moment method for computation of slopes
and deflections in beams - Conjugate beam and strain energy – Maxwel’s reciprocal theorems.
UNIT V THIN CYLINDERS, SPHERES AND THICK CYLINDERS 9
Streses in thin cylindrical shel due to internal presure circumferential and longitudinal streses and
deformation in thin and thick cylinders – spherical shels subjected to internal presure –Deformation
in spherical shels – Lame’s theorem.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply mathematical knowledge to
calculate the deformation behavior of simple structures. Critcaly analyse problem and solve the problems related to mechanical elements and analyse
the deformation behavior for diferent ypes of loads.3
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bansal, R.K., "Strength of Materials", Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., 207
2. Jindal U.C., "Strength of Materials", Asian Boks Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 207
REFERENCES:
1. Egor. P.Popov “Enginering Mechanics of Solids” Prentice Hal of India, New Delhi, 201
2. Subramanian R., "Strength of Materials", Oxford University Pres, Oxford Higher Education Series,
207.
3. Hibeler, R.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Pearson Education, Low Price Editon, 207
4. Ferdinand P. Ben, Rusel Johnson, J.r. and John J. Dewole "Mechanics of Materials", Tata
McGraw Hil Publishing ‘co. Ltd., New Delhi, 205.
ME6301 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To familarize the students to understand the fundamentals of thermodynamics and to perform
thermal analysis on their behavior and performance.
(Use of Standard and aproved Steam Table, Molier Chart, Compresibilty Chart and
Psychrometric Chart permited)
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND FIRST LAW 9
Basic concepts - concept of continum, comparison of microscopic and macroscopic aproach. Path
and point functions. Intensive and extensive, total and specifc quanties. System and their types.
Thermodynamic Equilbrium State, path and proces. Quasi-static, reversible and ireversible
proceses. Heat and work transfer, definiton and comparison, sign convention. Displacement work
and other modes of work .P-V diagram. Zeroth law of thermodynamics – concept of temperature and
thermal equilbrium– relationship betwen temperature scales –new temperature scales. First law of
thermodynamics –aplication to closed and open systems – steady and unsteady flow proceses.
UNIT I SECOND LAW AND AVAILABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Heat Reservoir, source and sink. Heat Engine, Refrigerator, Heat pump. Statements of second law
and its corolaries. Carnot cycle Reversed Carnot cycle, Performance. Clausius inequality. Concept of
entropy, T-s diagram, Tds Equations, entropy change for - pure substance, ideal gases - diferent
proceses, principle of increase in entropy. Aplications of I Law. High and low grade energy.
Available and non-available energy of a source and finite body. Energy and ireversibilty. Expresions
for the energy of a closed system and open systems. Energy balance and entropy generation.
Ireversibilty. Iand I law Eficiency.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCE AND STEAM POWER CYCLE 9
Formation of steam and its thermodynamic properties, p-v, p-T, T-v, T-s, h-s diagrams. p-v-T surface.
Use of Steam Table and Molier Chart. Determination of drynes fraction. Aplication of I and I law
for pure substances. Ideal and actual Rankine cycles, Cycle Improvement Methods - Reheat and
Regenerative cycles, Economiser, preheater, Binary and Combined cycles.
UNIT IV IDEAL AND REAL GASES, THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS 9
Properties of Ideal gas- Ideal and real gas comparison- Equations of state for ideal and real gases- Reduced properties-.Compresibilty factor-.Principle of Coresponding states. -Generalised
Compresibilty Chart and its use-. Maxwel relations, Tds Equations, Diference and ratio of heat34
capacites, Energy equation, Joule-Thomson Coeficient, Clausius Clapeyron equation, Phase
Change Proceses. Simple Calculations.
UNIT V GAS MIXTURES AND PSYCHROMETRY 9
Mole and Mas fraction, Dalton’s and Amagat’s Law. Properties of gas mixture – Molar mas, gas
constant, density, change in internal energy, enthalpy, entropy and Gibs function. Psychrometric
properties, Psychrometric charts. Property calculations of air vapour mixtures by using chart and
expresions. Psychrometric proces – adiabatic saturation, sensible heating and coling,
humidifcation, dehumidifcation, evaporative coling and adiabatic mixing. Simple Aplications
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the Thermodynamic Principles
to Mechanical Enginering Aplication. Aply mathematical fundamentals to study the properties of steam, gas and gas mixtures.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Nag.P.K., “Enginering Thermodynamics”, 4thEditon, Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi, 208.
2. Natarajan E., "Enginering Thermodynamics: Fundamentals and Aplications", Anuragam
Publications, 2012.
REFERENCES :
1. Cengel. Y and M.Boles, "Thermodynamics - An Enginering Aproach", 7th Editon, Tata
McGraw Hil, 2010.
2. Holman.J.P., "Thermodynamics", 3rd Editon, McGraw-Hil, 195.
3. Rathakrishnan. E., "Fundamentals of Enginering Thermodynamics", 2nd Editon, Prentice- Hal of India Pvt. Ltd, 206
4. Chatopadhyay, P, "Enginering Thermodynamics", Oxford University Pres, 2010.
5. Arora C.P, “Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi, 203.
6. Van Wylen and Sontag, “Clasical Thermodynamics”, Wiley Eastern, 1987
7. Venkatesh. A, “Basic Enginering Thermodynamics”, Universites Pres (India) Limited, 207.
8. Kau-Fui Vincent Wong, "Thermodynamics for Enginers", CRC Pres, 2010 Indian Reprint.
9. Prasana Kumar: Thermodynamics "Enginering Thermodynamics" Pearson Education, 2013
CE6451 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: The aplications of the conservation laws to flow through pipes and hydraulic machines are
studied
To understand the importance of dimensional analysis. To understand the importance of various types of low in pumps and turbines.
UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLOW CHARACTERISTICS 8
Units and dimensions- Properties of fluids- mas density, specifc weight, specifc volume, specifc
gravity, viscosity, compresibilty, vapor presure, surface tension and capilarity. Flow characteristics – concept of control volume - aplication of continuity equation, energy equation and momentum
equation.35
UNIT I FLOW THROUGH CIRCULAR CONDUITS 8
Hydraulic and energy gradient - Laminar flow through circular conduits and circular anuli-Boundary
layer concepts – types of boundary layer thicknes – Darcy Weisbach equation –friction factor- Mody
diagram- commercial pipes- minor loses – Flow through pipes in series and paralel.
UNIT I DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 9
Ned for dimensional analysis – methods of dimensional analysis – Similtude –types of similtude - Dimensionles parameters- aplication of dimensionles parameters – Model analysis.
UNIT IV PUMPS 10
Impact of jets - Euler’s equation - Theory of roto-dynamic machines – various eficiencies– velocity
components at entry and exit of the rotor- velocity triangles - Centrifugal pumps– working principle - work done by the impeler - performance curves - Reciprocating pump- working principle – Rotary
pumps –clasifcation.
UNIT V TURBINES 10
Clasifcation of turbines – heads and eficiencies – velocity triangles. Axial, radial and mixed flow
turbines. Pelton whel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbines- working principles - work done by water
on the runer – draft tube. Specifc sped - unit quanties – performance curves for turbines –
governing of turbines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply mathematical knowledge to
predict he properties and characteristics of a fluid. Can critcaly analyse the performance of pumps and turbines.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Bok House, New Delhi
204.
REFERENCES:
1. Streter, V. L. and Wylie E. B., "Fluid Mechanics", McGraw Hil Publishing Co. 2010
2. Kumar K. L., "Enginering Fluid Mechanics", Eurasia Publishing House(p) Ltd., New Delhi
204
3. Robert W.Fox, Alan T. McDonald, Philp J.Pritchard, “Fluid Mechanics and Machinery”, 201.
4. Graebel. W.P, "Enginering Fluid Mechanics", Taylor & Francis, Indian Reprint, 201
ME6302 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY – I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To introduce the concepts of basic manufacturing proceses and fabrication techniques, such
as metal casting, metal joining, metal forming and manufacture of plastic components.
UNIT I METAL CASTING PROCESSES 9
Sand Casting : Sand Mould – Type of paterns - Patern Materials – Patern alowances –Moulding
sand Properties and testing – Cores –Types and aplications – Moulding machines– Types and
aplications; Melting furnaces : Blast and Cupola Furnaces; Principle of special casting
proceses : Shel - investment – Ceramic mould – Presure die casting - Centrifugal Casting - CO2
proces – Stir casting; Defects in Sand casting36
UNIT I JOINING PROCESSES 9
Operating principle, basic equipment, merits and applications of : Fusion welding proceses :
Gas welding - Types – Flame characteristics; Manual metal arc welding – Gas Tungsten arc welding
- Gas metal arc welding – Submerged arc welding – Electro slag welding; Operating principle and
applications of : Resistance welding - Plasma arc welding – Thermit welding – Electron beam
welding – Friction welding and Friction Stir Welding; Brazing and soldering; Weld defects: types,
causes and cure.
UNIT I METAL FORMING PROCESSES 9
Hot working and cold working of metals – Forging proceses – Open, impresion and closed die
forging – forging operations. Roling of metals– Types of Roling – Flat strip roling – shape roling
operations – Defects in roled parts. Principle of rod and wire drawing – Tube drawing – Principles of
Extrusion – Types – Hot and Cold extrusion. UNIT IV SHEET METAL PROCESSES 9
Shet metal characteristics – shearing, bending and drawing operations – Stretch forming operations – Formabilty of shet metal – Test methods –special forming proceses-Working principle and
aplications – Hydro forming – Ruber pad forming – Metal spining– Introduction of Explosive
forming, magnetic pulse forming, pen forming, Super plastic forming – Micro forming
UNIT V MANUFACTURE OF PLASTIC COMPONENTS 9
Types and characteristics of plastics – Moulding of thermoplastics – working principles and typical
aplications – injection moulding – Plunger and screw machines – Compresion moulding, Transfer
Moulding – Typical industrial aplications – introduction to blow moulding –Rotational moulding – Film
blowing – Extrusion – Thermoforming – Bonding of Thermoplastics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the diferent manufacturing
proces and use this in industry for component production
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hajra Chouldhary S.K and Hajra Choudhury. AK., "Elements of workshop Technology", volume Iand I, Media promoters and Publishers Private Limited, Mumbai, 197
2. Kalpakjian. S, “Manufacturing Enginering and Technology”, Pearson Education India Editon,
206
REFERENCES:
1. Gowri P. Hariharan, A.Suresh Babu, "Manufacturing Technology I", Pearson Education, 208
2. Roy. A. Lindberg, "Proceses and Materials of Manufacture", PHI /Pearson education, 206
3. Paul Degarma E, Black J.T and Ronald A. Kosher, "Materials and Proceses, in
Manufacturing" Eight Editon, Prentice – Hal of India, 197.
4. Sharma, P.C., "A Text bok of production Technology", S.Chand and Co. Ltd., 204.
5. Rao, P.N. "Manufacturing Technology Foundry, Forming and Welding", 2ndEditon, TMH-203;
20337
EE6351 ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the basic concepts of diferent types of electrical machines and their
performance. To study the diferent methods of starting D.C motors and induction motors. To study the conventional and solid-state drives
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Basic Elements – Types of Electric Drives – factors influencing the choice of electrical drives –
heating and coling curves – Loading conditons and clases of duty – Selection of power rating for
drive motors with regard to thermal overloading and Load variation factors
UNIT I DRIVE MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 9
Mechanical characteristics – Sped-Torque characteristics of various types of load and drive motors – Braking of Electrical motors – DC motors: Shunt, series and compound - single phase and thre
phase induction motors. UNIT I STARTING METHODS 8
Types of D.C Motor starters – Typical control circuits for shunt and series motors – Thre phase
squirel cage and slip ring induction motors.
UNIT IV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF D.C. DRIVES 10
Sped control of DC series and shunt motors – Armature and field control, Ward-Leonard control
system - Using controled rectifers and DC chopers –aplications.
UNIT V CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF A.C. DRIVES 10
Sped control of thre phase induction motor – Voltage control, voltage /frequency control, slip power
recovery scheme – Using inverters and AC voltage regulators – aplications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon Completion of this subject, the students can able to explain diferent types of electrical
machines and their performance
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vedam Subrahmaniam, “Electric Drives (Concepts and Aplications”, Tata McGraw-Hil, 201
2. Nagrath .IJ. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines”, Tata McGraw-Hil, 198
REFERENCES:
1. Pilai.S.K “A First Course on Electric Drives”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 198
2. Singh. M.D., K.B.Khanchandani, “Power Electronics”, Tata McGraw-Hil, 198
3. Partab. H., “Art and Science and Utilsation of Electrical Energy”, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 19438
ME631 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: To Study and practice the various operations that can be performed in lathe, shaper, driling,
miling machines etc. and to equip with the practical knowledge required in the core industries.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Machining and Machining time estimations for :
1. Taper Turning
2. External Thread cuting
3. Internal Thread Cuting
4. Ecentric Turning
5. Knurling
6. Square Head Shaping
7. Hexagonal Head Shaping
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to demonstrate and fabricate diferent
types of components using the machine tols
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Centre Lathes 7 Nos.
2 Horizontal Miling Machine 1 No
3 Vertical Miling Machine 1 No
4 Shaper 1 Nos.
CE6461 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: Upon Completion of this subject, the students can able to have hands on experience in flow
measurements using diferent devices and also perform calculation related to loses in pipes
and also perform characteristic study of pumps, turbines etc.,
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of the Coeficient of discharge of given Orifce meter.
2. Determination of the Coeficient of discharge of given Venturi meter.
3. Calculation of the rate of low using Rota meter.
4. Determination of riction factor for a given set of pipes.
5. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of centrifugal pump/
submergible pump
6. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating pump.
7. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump.
8. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton whel.
9. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine.
10. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Kaplan turbine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS39
OUTCOMES: Abilty to use the measurement equipments for flow measurement Abilty to do performance trust on diferent fluid machinery
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Orifce meter setup 1
2 Venturi meter setup 1
3 Rotameter setup 1
4 Pipe Flow analysis setup 1
5 Centrifugal pump/submergible pump setup 1
6 Reciprocating pump setup 1
7 Gear pump setup 1
8 Pelton whel setup 1
9 Francis turbine setup 1
10 Kaplan turbine setup 1
EE6365 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: • To validate the principles studied in theory by performing experiments in the laboratory
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Load test on DC Shunt & DC Series motor
2. O.C.C & Load characteristics of DC Shunt and DC Series generator
3. Sped control of DC shunt motor (Armature, Field control)
4. Load test on single phase transformer
5. O.C & S.C Test on a single phase transformer
6. Regulation of an alternator by EMF & MMF methods.
7. V curves and inverted V curves of synchronous Motor
8. Load test on thre phase squirel cage Induction motor
9. Sped control of thre phase slip ring Induction Motor
10. Load test on single phase Induction Motor.
1. Study of DC & AC Starters
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Abilty to perform sped characteristic of diferent electrical machine
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 DC Shunt motor 2
2 DC Series motor 1
3 DC shunt motor-DC Shunt Generator set 1
4 DC Shunt motor-DC Series Generator set 140
5 Single phase transformer 2
6 Thre phase alternator 2
7 Thre phase synchronous motor 1
8 Thre phase Squirel cage Induction motor 1
9 Thre phase Slip ring Induction motor 1
10 Single phase Induction motor 1
MA6452 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: This course aims at providing the necesary basic concepts of a few statistical and numerical
methods and give procedures for solving numericaly diferent kinds of problems ocuring in
enginering and technology.
UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9+3
Large sample test based on Normal distribution for single mean and diference of means - Tests
based on t, 2 and F distributions for testing means and variances – Contingency table (Test for
Independency) – Godnes of it.
UNIT I DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9+3
One way and two way clasifcations - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design –
Latin square design - 2
2
factorial design.
UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3
Newton Raphson method – Gaus elimination method – pivoting – Gaus Jordan methods – Iterative
methods of Gaus Jacobi and Gaus Seidel – Matrix inversion by Gaus Jordan method – Eigen
values of a matrix by power method.
UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL
INTEGRATION 9+3
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided diference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
diference interpolation – Aproximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.
UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Taylor’s series method – Euler’s method – Modifed Euler’s method – Fourth order Runge-Kuta
method for solving first order equations – Milne’s predictor corector methods for solving first order
equations – Finite diference methods for solving second order equations.
TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
It helps the students to have a clear perception of the power of statistical and numerical
techniques, ideas and would be able to demonstrate the aplications of these techniques to
problems drawn from industry, management and other enginering fields.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Johnson. R.A., and Gupta. C.B., "Miler and Freund’s Probabilty and Statistics for Enginers",
1th Editon, Pearson Education, Asia, 201.
2. Grewal. B.S., and Grewal. J.S., "Numerical Methods in Enginering and Science", 9
th Editon,
Khana Publishers, New Delhi, 207.41
REFERENCES
1. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L., and Ye. K., "Probabilty and Statistics for Enginers
and Scientists", 8
th Editon, Pearson Education, Asia, 207.
2. Spiegel. M.R., Schiler. J., and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probabilty and
Statistics", Tata McGraw Hil Editon, 204.
3. Chapra. S.C., and Canale. R.P, "Numerical Methods for Enginers", 5
th Editon, Tata McGraw
Hil, New Delhi, 207.
4. Gerald. C.F., and Wheatley. P.O. "Aplied Numerical Analysis" Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 206.
ME6401 KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the basic components and layout of linkages in the asembly of a system /
machine. To understand the principles in analyzing the asembly with respect to the displacement,
velocity, and aceleration at any point in a link of a mechanism. To understand the motion resulting from a specifed set of linkages, design few linkage
mechanisms and cam mechanisms for specifed output motions. To understand the basic concepts of tothed gearing and kinematics of gear trains and the
efects of riction in motion transmision and in machine components.
UNIT I BASICS OF MECHANISMS 9
Clasifcation of mechanisms – Basic kinematic concepts and definitons – Degre of fredom,
Mobilty – Kutzbach criterion, Gruebler’s criterion – Grashof’s Law – Kinematic inversions of four-bar
chain and slider crank chains – Limit positons – Mechanical advantage – Transmision Angle – Description of some common mechanisms – Quick return mechanisms, Straight line generators,
Universal Joint – rocker mechanisms.
UNIT I KINEMATICS OF LINKAGE MECHANISMS 9
Displacement, velocity and aceleration analysis of simple mechanisms – Graphical method– Velocity
and aceleration polygons – Velocity analysis using instantaneous centres – kinematic analysis of
simple mechanisms – Coincident points – Coriolis component of Aceleration – Introduction to linkage
synthesis problem.
UNIT I KINEMATICS OF CAM MECHANISMS 9
Clasifcation of cams and folowers – Terminology and definitons – Displacement diagrams –Uniform
velocity, parabolic, simple harmonic and cycloidal motions – Derivatives of folower motions – Layout
of plate cam profiles – Specifed contour cams – Circular arc and tangent cams – Presure angle and
undercuting – sizing of cams.
UNIT IV GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 9
Law of tothed gearing – Involutes and cycloidal toth profiles –Spur Gear terminology and definitons –Gear toth action – contact ratio – Interference and undercuting. Helical, Bevel, Worm, Rack and
Pinion gears [Basics only]. Gear trains – Sped ratio, train value – Paralel axis gear trains – Epicyclic
Gear Trains.42
UNIT V FRICTION IN MACHINE ELEMENTS 9
Surface contacts – Sliding and Roling friction – Friction drives – Friction in screw threads –Bearings
and lubrication – Friction clutches – Belt and rope drives – Friction in brakes- Band and Block brakes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply fundamentals of mechanism for
the design of new mechanisms and analyse them for optimum design.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Uicker, J.J., Penock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, 3
rd
Editon, Oxford University Pres, 209.
2. Ratan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 209.
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Bevan, "Theory of Machines", 3rd Editon, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 205.
2. Cleghorn. W. L, “Mechanisms of Machines”, Oxford University Pres, 205
3. Robert L. Norton, "Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery", Tata McGraw-Hil, 209.
4. Alen S. Hal Jr., “Kinematics and Linkage Design”, Prentice Hal, 1961
5. Ghosh. A and Malick, A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", Afilated East-West Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 198.
6. Rao.J.S. and Dukipati.R.V. "Mechanisms and Machine Theory", Wiley-Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi, 192.
7. John Hanah and Stephens R.C., "Mechanics of Machines", Viva Low-Prices Student Editon,
199.
8. Ramamurthi. V, "Mechanics of Machines", Narosa Publishing House, 202.
9. Khurmi, R.S., ”Theory of Machines”,14th Editon, S Chand Publications, 205
10. Sadhu Sigh : Theory of Machines, "Kinematics of Machine", Third Editon, Pearson Education,
2012
ME6402 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY – I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the concept and basic mechanics of metal cuting, working of standard
machine tols such as lathe, shaping and alied machines, miling, driling and alied machines,
grinding and alied machines and broaching. To understand the basic concepts of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) of machine tols and
CNC Programming
UNIT I THEORY OF METAL CUTTING 9
Mechanics of chip formation, single point cuting tol, forces in machining, Types of chip, cuting tols – nomenclature, orthogonal metal cuting, thermal aspects, cuting tol materials, tol wear, tol ife,
surface finish, cuting fluids and Machinabilty.
UNIT I TURNING MACHINES 9
Centre lathe, constructional features, specifcation, operations – taper turning methods, thread cuting
methods, special atachments, machining time and power estimation. Capstan and turet lathes- tol
layout – automatic lathes: semi automatic – single spindle : Swis type, automatic screw type – multi
spindle:43
UNIT I SHAPER, MILLING AND GEAR CUTTING MACHINES 9
Shaper - Types of operations. Driling ,reaming, boring, Taping. Miling operations-types of miling
cuter. Gear cuting – forming and generation principle and construction of gear miling ,hobing and
gear shaping proceses –finishing of gears.
UNIT IV ABRASIVE PROCESS AND BROACHING 9
Abrasive proceses: grinding whel – specifcations and selection, types of grinding proces–
cylindrical grinding, surface grinding, centreles grinding and internal grinding- Typical aplications –
concepts of surface integrity, broaching machines: broach construction – push, pul, surface and
continuous broaching machines
UNIT V CNC MACHINING 9
Numerical Control (NC) machine tols – CNC types, constructional details, special features,
machining centre, part programming fundamentals CNC – manual part programming – micromachining – wafer machining
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to understand and compare the
functions and aplications of diferent metal cuting tols and also demonstrate the
programming in CNC machining.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hajra Choudhury, "Elements of Workshop Technology", Vol.I., Media Promoters
2. Rao. P.N “Manufacturing Technology - Metal Cuting and Machine Tols", Tata McGraw-Hil,
New Delhi, 203.
REFERENCES:
1. Richerd R Kibe, John E. Nely, Roland O. Merges and Waren J.White “Machine Tol
Practices”, Prentice Hal of India, 198
2. HMT, "Production Technology", Tata McGraw Hil, 198.
3. Geofrey Bothroyd, "Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tols", Mc Graw Hil,
1984
4. Roy. A.Lindberg, “Proces and Materials of Manufacture,” Fourth Editon, PHI/Pearson
Education 206.
ME6403 ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND METALLURGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge on the structure, properties, treatment, testing and aplications of metals
and non-metalic materials so as to identify and select suitable materials for various
enginering aplications.
UNIT I ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS 9
Constiution of aloys – Solid solutions, substiutional and interstial – phase diagrams, Isomorphous,
eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic, and peritectoid reactions, Iron – carbon equilbrium diagram.
Clasifcation of stel and cast Iron microstructure, properties and aplication.
UNIT I HEAT TREATMENT 10
Definiton – Ful anealing, stres relief, recrystalisation and spheroidising – normalising, hardening
and Tempering of stel. Isothermal transformation diagrams – coling curves superimposed on I.T.4
diagram CCR – Hardenabilty, Jominy end quench test - Austempering, martempering – case
hardening, carburizing, Nitriding, cyaniding, carbonitriding – Flame and Induction hardening – Vacum
and Plasma hardening. . UNIT I FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS METALS 9
Efect of aloying aditons on stel- α and β stabilsers– stainles and tol stels – HSLA, Maraging
stels – Cast Iron - Grey, white, maleable, spheroidal – aloy cast irons, Coper and coper aloys – Bras, Bronze and Cupronickel – Aluminium and Al-Cu – precipitation strengthening treatment – Bearing aloys, Mg-aloys, Ni-based super aloys and Titanium aloys. UNIT IV NON-METALLIC MATERIALS 9
Polymers – types of polymer, commodity and enginering polymers – Properties and aplications of
various thermoseting and thermoplastic polymers (PP, PS, PVC, PMMA, PET,PC, PA, ABS, PI, PAI,
PPO, PPS, PEEK, PTFE, Polymers – Urea and Phenol formaldehydes)- Enginering Ceramics – Properties and aplications of Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4, PSZ and SIALON –Composites-Clasifcations- Metal
Matrix and FRP - Aplications of Composites.
UNIT V MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND DEFORMATION MECHANISMS 8
Mechanisms of plastic deformation, slip and twining – Types of fracture – Testing of materials under
tension, compresion and shear loads – Hardnes tests (Brinel, Vickers and Rockwel), hardnes
tests, Impact est lzod and charpy, fatigue and crep failure mechanisms.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the diferent materials, their
procesing, heat reatments in suitable aplication in mechanical enginering fields. TEXT BOOKS:
1. Avner, S.H., “Introduction to Physical Metalurgy”, McGraw Hil Bok Company,194.
2. Wiliams D Calister, “Material Science and Enginering” Wiley India Pvt Ltd, Revised Indian
Editon 207
REFERENCES:
1. Raghavan.V, “Materials Science and Enginering”, Prentice Hal of India Pvt. Ltd., 199.
2. Keneth G.Budinski and Michael K. Budinski, “Enginering Materials”, Prentice Hal of India
Private Limited, 4th Indian Reprint 202.
3. Upadhyay. G.S. and Anish Upadhyay, “Materials Science and Enginering”, Viva Boks Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 206.
4. U.C.Jindal : Material Science and Metalurgy, "Enginering Materials and Metalurgy", First
Editon, Dorling Kindersley, 2012
GE6351 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To the study of nature and the facts about environment. To finding and implementing scientifc, technological, economic and politcal solutions to
environmental problems. To study the interelationship betwen living organism and environment. To apreciate the importance of environment by asesing its impact on the human world;
envision the surounding environment, its functions and its value.45
To study the dynamic proceses and understand the features of the earth’s interior and
surface. To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, polution control and waste
management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 12
Definiton, scope and importance of Risk and hazards; Chemical hazards, Physical hazards,
Biological hazards in the environment – concept of an ecosystem – structure and function of an
ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers-Oxygen cycle and Nitrogen cycle – energy flow
in the ecosystem – ecological sucesion proceses – Introduction, types, characteristic features,
structure and function of the (a) forest ecosystem (b) grasland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d)
aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity
definiton: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – biogeographical clasifcation of India – value of
biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, national and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of
biodiversity – threats to biodiversity: habitat los, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts –
endangered and endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity. Field study of common plants, insects, birds Field study of simple
ecosystems – pond, river, hil slopes, etc.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 10
Definiton – causes, efects and control measures of: (a) Air polution (Atmospheric chemistry- Chemical compositon of the atmosphere; Chemical and photochemical reactions in the atmosphere -
formation of smog, PAN, acid rain, oxygen and ozone chemistry;- Mitgation procedures- Control of
particulate and gaseous emision, Control of SO2, NOX, CO and HC) (b) Water polution : Physical
and chemical properties of terestrial and marine water and their environmental signifcance; Water
quality parameters – physical, chemical and biological; absorption of heavy metals - Water treatment
proceses. (c) Soil polution - soil waste management: causes, efects and control measures of
municipal solid wastes – (d) Marine polution (e) Noise polution (f) Thermal polution (g) Nuclear
hazards–role of an individual in prevention of polution – polution case studies – Field study of local
poluted site – Urban /Rural /Industrial /Agricultural.
UNIT I NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their efects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and overutilzation of
surface and ground water, dams-benefits and problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation,
environmental efects of extracting and using mineral resources, case studies – Fod resources:
World fod problems, changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing, efects of modern agriculture,
fertilzer-pesticide problems, water loging, salinity, case studies – Energy resources: Growing energy
neds, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy sources. Energy
Conversion proceses – Biogas – production and uses, anaerobic digestion; case studies – Land
resources: Land as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and
desertifcation – role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of resources
for sustainable lifestyles. Introduction to Environmental Biochemistry: Proteins –Biochemical
degradation of polutants, Bioconversion of polutants. Field study of local area to document
environmental asets – river /forest /grasland /hil / mountain.
UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resetlement and rehabiltation of
people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental organization- environmental ethics: Isues and posible solutions – 12 Principles of gren chemistry- nuclear46
acidents and holocaust, case studies. – wasteland reclamation – consumerism and waste products –
environment production act – Air act – Water act – Wildlife protection act – Forest conservation act – The Biomedical Waste (Management and Handling) Rules; 198 and amendments- scheme of
labeling of environmentaly friendly products (Ecomark). enforcement machinery involved in
environmental legislation- central and state polution control boards- disaster management: flods,
earthquake, cyclone and landslides. Public awarenes.
UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and child
welfare –Environmental impact analysis (EIA)- -GIS-remote sensing-role of information technology in
environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Environmental Polution or problems canot be solved by mere laws. Public participation is an
important aspect which serves the environmental Protection. One wil obtain knowledge on the
folowing after completing the course. Public awarenes of environmental is at infant stage. Ignorance and incomplete knowledge has lead to misconceptions
Development and improvement in std. of living has lead to serious environmental disasters
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Gilbert M.Masters, "Introduction to Environmental Enginering and Science", 2nd editon,
Pearson Education, 204. 2. Beny Joseph, "Environmental Science and Enginering", Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi, 206. REFERENCES :
1. Trivedi.R.K., "Handbok of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards", Vol. Iand I, Enviro Media, 3rd editon, BPB publications, 2010. 2. Cuningham, W.P. Coper, T.H. Gorhani, "Environmental Encyclopedia", Jaico Publ., House,
Mumbai, 201.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, "Environmental law", Prentice hal of India PVT LTD, New Delhi,
207.
4. Rajagopalan, R, "Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure", Oxford University Pres, 205.
ME6404 THERMAL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To integrate the concepts, laws and methodologies from the first course in thermodynamics
into analysis of cyclic proceses
To aply the thermodynamic concepts into various thermal aplication like IC engines, Steam
Turbines, Compresors and Refrigeration and Air conditoning systems
(Use of standard refrigerant property data bok, Steam Tables, Molier diagram and Psychrometric
chart permited)
UNIT I GAS POWER CYCLES 8
Oto, Diesel, Dual, Brayton cycles, Calculation of mean efective presure, and air standard eficiency
- Comparison of cycles.47
UNIT I INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES 10
Clasifcation - Components and their function. Valve timing diagram and port timing diagram - actual
and theoretical p-V diagram of four stroke and two stroke engines. Simple and complete Carburetor. MPFI, Diesel pump and injector system. Batery and Magneto Igniton System - Principles of
Combustion and knocking in SI and CI Engines. Lubrication and Coling systems. Performance
calculation.
UNIT I STEAM NOZZLES AND TURBINES 9
Flow of steam through nozles, shapes of nozles, efect of friction, critcal presure ratio,
supersaturated flow. Impulse and Reaction principles, compounding, velocity diagram for simple and
multi-stage turbines, sped regulations –Governors.
UNIT IV AIR COMPRESSOR 9
Clasifcation and working principle of various types of compresors, work of compresion with and
without clearance, Volumetric eficiency, Isothermal eficiency and Isentropic eficiency of
reciprocating compresors, Multistage air compresor and inter coling –work of multistage air
compresor
UNIT V REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9
Refrigerants - Vapour compresion refrigeration cycle- super heat, sub coling – Performance
calculations - working principle of vapour absorption system, Ammonia –Water, Lithium bromide – water systems (Description only) . Air conditoning system - Proceses, Types and Working
Principles. - Concept of RSHF, GSHF, ESHF- Coling Load calculations.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the diferent gas power cycles
and use of them in IC and R&AC aplications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rajput. R. K., “Thermal Enginering” S.Chand Publishers, 200
2. Kothandaraman.C.P., Domkundwar. S,Domkundwar. A.V., “A course in thermal Enginering", Fifth Editon, ”Dhanpat Rai & sons ,202
REFERENCES:
1. Sarkar, B.K,”Thermal Enginering” Tata McGraw-Hil Publishers, 207
2. Arora.C.P, ”Refrigeration and Air Conditoning ,” Tata McGraw-Hil Publishers 194
3. Ganesan V.” Internal Combustion Engines” ,Third Editon, Tata Mcgraw-Hil 207
4. Rudramorthy, R, “Thermal Enginering “,Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi,203
5. Ramalingam. K.K., "Thermal Enginering", SCITECH Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., 209.
ME641 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: To Study and acquire knowledge on various basic machining operations in special purpose
machines and its aplications in real ife manufacture of components in the industry
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Contour miling using vertical miling machine
2. Spur gear cuting in miling machine
3. Helical Gear Cuting in miling machine48
4. Gear generation in hobing machine
5. Gear generation in gear shaping machine
6. Plain Surface grinding
7. Cylindrical grinding
8. Tol angle grinding with tol and Cuter Grinder
9. Measurement of cuting forces in Miling /Turning Proces
10. CNC Part Programming.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Abilty to use diferent machine tols to manufacturing gears. Abilty to use diferent machine tols for finishing operations
Abilty to manufacture tols using cuter grinder Develop CNC part programming
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Turet and Capstan Lathes 1 No each
2 Horizontal Miling Machine 2 No
3 Vertical Miling Machine 1 No
4 Surface Grinding Machine 1 No.
5 Cylinderical Grinding Machine 1 No.
6 Radial Driling Machine 1 No.
7 lathe Tol Dynamometer 1 No
8 Miling Tol Dynamometer 1 No
9 Gear Hobing Machine 1 No
10 Tol Makers Microscope 1 No
1 CNC Lathe 1 No
12 CNC Miling machine 1 No
13 Gear Shaping machine 1 No
14 Centerles grinding machine 1 No
15 Tol and cuter grinder 1 No
ME6412 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: To study the value timing-V diagram and performance of IC Engines
To Study the characteristics of uels/Lubricates used in IC Engines
To study the Performance of steam generator/ turbine
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I.C. ENGINE LAB 30
1. Valve Timing and Port Timing diagrams.
2. Actual p-v diagrams of IC engines.
3. Performance Test on 4 – stroke Diesel Engine.
4. Heat Balance Test on 4 – stroke Diesel Engine.49
5. Morse Test on Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine.
7. Retardation Test on a Diesel Engine.
8. Determination of Flash Point and Fire Point of various fuels /lubricants.
STEAM LAB 15
1. Study on Steam Generators and Turbines.
2. Performance and Energy Balance Test on a Steam Generator.
3. Performance and Energy Balance Test on Steam Turbine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Abilty to conduct experiment on IC engine to study the characteristic and performance of IC
design/ steam turbines.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 I.C Engine – 2 stroke and 4 stroke model 1 set
2 Aparatus for Flash and Fire Point 1 No.
3 4-stroke Diesel Engine with mechanical oading. 1 No
4 4-stroke Diesel Engine with hydraulic loading. 1 No.
5 4-stroke Diesel Engine with electrical oading. 1 No.
6 Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine 1 No.
7 Single cylinder Petrol Engine 1 No.
8 Data Acquisiton system with any one of the above engines 1 No.
9 Steam Boiler with turbine setup 1 No.
CE6315 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES
To suplement the theoretical knowledge gained in Mechanics of Solids with practical testing for
determining the strength of materials under externaly aplied loads. This would enable the student to
have a clear understanding of the design for strength and stifnes
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tension test on a mild stel rod
2. Double shear test on Mild stel and Aluminium rods
3. Torsion test on mild stel rod
4. Impact est on metal specimen
5. Hardnes test on metals - Brinel and Rockwel Hardnes Number
6. Deflection test on beams
7. Compresion test on helical springs
8. Strain Measurement using Rosete strain gauge
9. Efect of hardening- Improvement in hardnes and impact resistance of stels.
10. Tempering- Improvement Mechanical properties Comparison
(i) Unhardened specimen
(i) Quenched Specimen and
(i) Quenched and tempered specimen.
1. Microscopic Examination of
(i) Hardened samples and
(i) Hardened and tempered samples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS50
OUTCOMES: Abilty to perform diferent destructive testing
Abilty to characteristic materials
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Universal Tensile Testing machine with double 1 shear atachment –
40 Ton Capacity
1
2 Torsion Testing Machine (60 NM Capacity) 1
3 Impact Testing Machine (30 J Capacity) 1
4 Brinel Hardnes Testing Machine 1
5 Rockwel Hardnes Testing Machine 1
6 Spring Testing Machine for tensile and compresive loads (250 N) 1
7 Metalurgical Microscopes 3
8 Mufle Furnace (80 C) 1
ME6501 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: • To provide an overview of how computers are being used in mechanical component design
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9
Product cycle- Design proces- sequential and concurent enginering- Computer aided design – CAD system architecture- Computer graphics – co-ordinate systems- 2D and 3D transformations- homogeneous cordinates - Line drawing -Cliping- viewing transformation
UNIT I GEOMETRIC MODELING 9
Representation of curves- Hermite curve- Bezier curve- B-spline curves-rational curves-Techniques
for surface modeling – surface patch- Cons and bicubic patches- Bezier and B-spline surfaces. Solid
modeling techniques- CSG and B-rep
UNIT I VISUAL REALISM 9
Hiden – Line-Surface-Solid removal algorithms – shading – colouring – computer animation.
UNIT IV ASSEMBLY OF PARTS 9
Asembly modeling – interferences of positons and orientation – tolerance analysis-masproperty
calculations – mechanism simulation and interference checking.
UNIT V CAD STANDARDS 9
Standards for computer graphics- Graphical Kernel System (GKS) - standards for exchangeimages- Open Graphics Library (OpenGL) - Data exchange standards - IGES, STEP, CALSetc. - communication standards.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to use computer and CAD software's for
modeling of mechanical components51
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Zeid “Mastering CAD CAM” Tata McGraw-Hil Publishing Co.207
REFERENCES:
1. Chris McMahon and Jimmie Browne “CAD/CAM Principles", "Practice and Manufacturing
management “ Second Editon, Pearson Education, 199.
2. Wiliam M Neuman and Robert F.Sproul “Principles of Computer Graphics”, McGraw Hil
Bok Co. Singapore, 1989.
3. Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker “Computer Graphics”’. Prentice Hal, Inc, 192.
4. Foley, Wan Dam, Feiner and Hughes - "Computer graphics principles & practice" Pearson
Education - 203.
ME6502 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the mechanisms of heat ransfer under steady and transient conditons. To understand the concepts of heat ransfer through extended surfaces. To learn the thermal analysis and sizing of heat exchangers and to understand the basic
concepts of mas transfer.
(Use of standard HMT data bok permited)
UNIT I CONDUCTION 9
General Diferential equation of Heat Conduction– Cartesian and Polar Cordinates – One
Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction – plane and Composite Systems – Conduction with
Internal Heat Generation – Extended Surfaces – Unsteady Heat Conduction – Lumped Analysis – Semi Infinite and Infinite Solids –Use of Heisler’s charts.
UNIT I CONVECTION 9
Fre and Forced Convection - Hydrodynamic and Thermal Boundary Layer. Fre and Forced
Convection during external flow over Plates and Cylinders and Internal flow through tubes . UNIT I PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT EXCHANGERS 9
Nuselt’s theory of condensation - Regimes of Pol boilng and Flow boilng. Corelations in boilng
and condensation. Heat Exchanger Types - Overal Heat Transfer Coeficient – Fouling Factors - Analysis – LMTD method - NTU method.
UNIT IV RADIATION 9
Black Body Radiation – Grey body radiation - Shape Factor – Electrical Analogy – Radiation Shields.
Radiation through gases.
UNIT V MASS TRANSFER 9
Basic Concepts – Difusion Mas Transfer – Fick’s Law of Difusion – Steady state Molecular Difusion
– Convective Mas Transfer – Momentum, Heat and Mas Transfer Analogy –Convective Mas
Transfer Corelations.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to understand and aply diferent heat
and mas transfer principles of diferent aplications.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Yunus A. Cengel, "Heat Transfer A Practical Aproach", Tata McGraw Hil, 201052
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewit, "Fundamentals of Heat and Mas Transfer", John
Wiley & Sons, 198.
2. Venkateshan. S.P., "Heat Transfer", Ane Boks, New Delhi, 204.
3. Ghoshdastidar, P.S, "Heat Transfer", Oxford, 204,
4. Nag, P.K., "Heat Transfer", Tata McGraw Hil, New Delhi, 202
5. Holman, J.P., "Heat and Mas Transfer", Tata McGraw Hil, 200
6. Ozisik, M.N., "Heat Transfer", McGraw Hil Bok Co., 194.
7. Kothandaraman, C.P., "Fundamentals of Heat and Mas Transfer", New Age International,
New Delhi, 198.
8. Yadav, R., "Heat and Mas Transfer", Central Publishing House, 195.
9. M.Thirumaleshwar : Fundamentals of Heat and Mas Transfer, "Heat and Mas Transfer",
First Editon, Dorling Kindersley, 209
ME6503 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
• To familarize the various steps involved in the Design Proces
• To understand the principles involved in evaluating the shape and dimensions of a component
to satisfy functional and strength requirements. • To learn to use standard practices and standard data
• To learn to use catalogues and standard machine components
(Use of P S G Design Data Bok is permited)
UNIT I STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE MEMBERS 10
Introduction to the design proces - factors influencing machine design, selection of materials based
on mechanical properties - Prefered numbers, fits and tolerances – Direct, Bending and torsional
stres equations – Impact and shock loading – calculation of principle streses for various load
combinations, ecentric loading – curved beams – crane hok and ‘C’ frame- Factor of safety -
theories of failure – Design based on strength and stifnes – stres concentration – Design for
variable loading.
UNIT I SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS 8
Design of solid and holow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critcal sped – Keys, keyways and
splines - Rigid and flexible couplings.
UNIT I TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT JOINTS 9
Threaded fastners - Bolted joints including ecentric loading, Knuckle joints, Coter joints – Welded
joints, riveted joints for structures - theory of bonded joints.
UNIT IV ENERGY STORING ELEMENTS AND ENGINE COMPONENTS 9
Various types of springs, optimization of helical springs - ruber springs - Flywhels considering
streses in rims and arms for engines and punching machines- Conecting Rods and crank shafts.
UNIT V BEARINGS 9
Sliding contact and roling contact bearings - Hydrodynamic journal bearings, Sommerfeld Number,
Raimondi and Boyd graphs, - Selection of Roling Contact bearings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS53
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to sucesfuly design machine
components
TEXT BOOK:
1. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Bok Co, 2010.
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbet “Mechanical
Enginering Design”, 8th Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 208.
REFERENCES:
1. Sundararajamorthy T. V. Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publications,
Chenai, 203.
2. Robert C. Juvinal and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Design”, 4
th Editon, Wiley,
205
3. Alfred Hal, Halowenko, A and Laughlin, H., “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hil
BokCo.(Schaum’s Outline), 2010
4. Bernard Hamrock, Steven Schmid,Bo Jacobson, “Fundamentals of Machine Elements”,2nd
Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Bok Co., 206.
5. Orthwein W, “Machine Component Design”, Jaico Publishing Co, 203.
6. Ansel Ugural, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Aproach", 1st Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Bok
Co, 203.
7. Merhyle F. Spots, Tery E. Shoup and Le E. Hornberger, “Design of Machine Elements”
8th Editon, Printice Hal, 203.
ME6504 METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To provide knowledge on various Metrological equipments available to measure the dimension
of the components. To provide knowledge on the corect procedure to be adopted to measure the dimension of
the components.
UNIT I .BASICS OF METROLOGY 5
Introduction to Metrology – Ned – Elements – Work piece, Instruments – Persons – Environment –
their efect on Precision and Acuracy – Erors – Erors in Measurements – Types – Control – Types
of standards.
UNIT I LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENTS 10
Linear Measuring Instruments – Evolution – Types – Clasifcation – Limit gauges – gauge design –
terminology – procedure – concepts of interchange abilty and selective asembly – Angular
measuring instruments – Types – Bevel protractor clinometers angle gauges, spirt levels sine bar – Angle alignment elescope – Autocolimator – Aplications.
UNIT I ADVANCES IN METROLOGY 12
Basic concept of lasers Advantages of lasers – laser Interferometers – types – DC and AC Lasers
interferometer – Aplications – Straightnes – Alignment. Basic concept of CMM – Types of CMM – Constructional features – Probes – Acesories – Software – Aplications – Basic concepts of
Machine Vision System – Element – Aplications.54
UNIT IV FORM MEASUREMENT 10
Principles and Methods of straightnes – Flatnes measurement – Thread measurement, gear
measurement, surface finish measurement, Roundnes measurement – Aplications.
UNIT V MEASUREMENT OF POWER, FLOW AND TEMPERATURE 8
Force, torque, power - mechanical , Pneumatic, Hydraulic and Electrical type. Flow measurement:
Venturimeter, Orifce meter, rotameter, pitot tube – Temperature: bimetalic strip, thermocouples,
electrical resistance thermometer – Reliabilty and Calibration – Readabilty and Reliabilty.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the Students can demonstrate diferent measurement
technologies and use of them in Industrial Components
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K. “Enginering Metrology”, Khana Publishers, 205.
2. Gupta. I.C., “Enginering Metrology”, Dhanpatrai Publications, 205.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles Reginald Shotbolt, “Metrology for Enginers”, 5
th editon, Cengage Learning
EMEA,190.
2. Backwith, Marangoni, Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements”, Pearson Education ,206.
ME6505 DYNAMICS OF MACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the force-motion relationship in components subjected to external forces and
analysis of standard mechanisms. To understand the undesirable efects of unbalances resulting from prescribed motions in
mechanism. To understand the efect of Dynamics of undesirable vibrations. To understand the principles in mechanisms used for sped control and stabilty control. UNIT I FORCE ANALYSIS 9
Dynamic force analysis – Inertia force and Inertia torque– D Alembert’s principle –Dynamic Analysis in
reciprocating engines – Gas forces – Inertia efect of conecting rod– Bearing loads – Crank shaft
torque – Turning moment diagrams –Fly Whels – Flywhels of punching preses- Dynamics of Camfolower
mechanism.
UNIT I BALANCING 9
Static and dynamic balancing – Balancing of rotating mases – Balancing a single cylinder engine – Balancing of Multi-cylinder inline, V-engines – Partial balancing in engines – Balancing of linkages – Balancing machines-Field balancing of discs and rotors.
UNIT I SINGLE DEGREE FREE VIBRATION 9
Basic features of vibratory systems – Degres of redom – single degre of redom – Fre vibration
– Equations of motion – Natural frequency – Types of Damping – Damped vibration– Torsional
vibration of shaft – Critcal speds of shafts – Torsional vibration – Two and thre rotor torsional
systems.5
UNIT IV FORCED VIBRATION 9
Response of one degre fredom systems to periodic forcing – Harmonic disturbances –Disturbance
caused by unbalance – Suport motion –transmisibilty – Vibration isolation vibration measurement.
UNIT V MECHANISM FOR CONTROL 9
Governors – Types – Centrifugal governors – Gravity controled and spring controled centrifugal
governors – Characteristics – Efect of friction – Controling force curves. Gyroscopes –Gyroscopic
forces and torques – Gyroscopic stabilzation – Gyroscopic efects in Automobiles, ships and
airplanes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the Students can able to predict the force analysis in
mechanical system and related vibration isues and can able to solve the problem
TEXT BOOK:
1. Uicker, J.J., Penock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms” ,3rd
Editon, Oxford University Pres, 209.
2. Ratan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 209
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Bevan, "Theory of Machines", 3rd Editon, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 205.
2. Cleghorn. W. L, “Mechanisms of Machines”, Oxford University Pres, 205
3. Benson H. Tongue, ”Principles of Vibrations”, Oxford University Pres, 2nd Editon, 207
4. Robert L. Norton, "Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery", Tata McGraw-Hil, 209.
5. Alen S. Hal Jr., “Kinematics and Linkage Design”, Prentice Hal, 1961
6. Ghosh. A and Malick, A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", Afilated East-West Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 198.
7. Rao.J.S. and Dukipati.R.V. "Mechanisms and Machine Theory", Wiley-Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi, 192.
8. John Hanah and Stephens R.C., "Mechanics of Machines", Viva Low-Prices Student Editon,
199.
9. Grover. G.T., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Nem Chand and Bros., 196
10. Wiliam T. Thomson, Marie Dilon Dahleh, Chandramouli Padmanabhan, “Theory of Vibration
with Aplication”, 5th editon, Pearson Education, 201
1. V.Ramamurthi, "Mechanics of Machines", Narosa Publishing House, 202.
12. Khurmi, R.S.,”Theory of Machines”, 14th Editon, S Chand Publications, 205.
GE6075 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enable the students to create an awarenes on Enginering Ethics and Human Values, to
instil Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to apreciate the rights of others.
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10
Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefuly – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Coperation – Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirtuality – Introduction to Yoga and
meditation for profesional excelence and stres management.56
UNIT I ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Senses of ‘Enginering Ethics’ – Variety of moral isues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral
Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Giligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
profesional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories
UNIT I ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Enginering as Experimentation – Enginers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics – A Balanced Outlok on Law.
UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Safety and Risk – Asesment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk - Respect for Authority – Colective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Ocupational
Crime – Profesional Rights – Employe Rights – Intelectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development – Enginers as Managers – Consulting Enginers – Enginers as Expert Witneses and Advisors – Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibilty
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to aply ethics in society, discus
the ethical isues related to enginering and realize the responsibilties and rights in the
society
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Enginering”, Tata McGraw Hil, New Delhi,
203.
2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Enginering Ethics”, Prentice Hal of India,
New Delhi, 204.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Flederman, “Enginering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hal, New Jersey, 204.
2. Charles E. Haris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Enginering Ethics – Concepts
and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 209
3. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Busines”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 203
4. Edmund G Sebauer and Robert L Bary, “Fundametals of Ethics for Scientists and
Enginers”, Oxford University Pres, Oxford, 201
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Busines Ethics: Decision Making for Personal
Integrity and Social Responsibilty” Mc Graw Hil education, India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, " Value Education", Vethathir publications, Erode, 201
Web sources:
1. www.onlinethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org57
ME651 DYNAMICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: • To suplement he principles learnt in kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery. • To understand how certain measuring devices are used for dynamic testing.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. a) Study of gear parameters.
b) Experimental study of velocity ratios of simple, compound, Epicyclic and diferential gear trains.
2. a) Kinematics of Four Bar, Slider Crank, Crank Rocker, Double crank, Double rocker, Oscilating
cylinder Mechanisms.
b) Kinematics of single and double universal joints.
3. a) Determination of Mas moment of inertia of Fly whel and Axle system.
b) Determination of Mas Moment of Inertia of axisymmetric bodies using Turn Table aparatus.
c) Determination of Mas Moment of Inertia using biflar suspension and compound
pendulum.
4. Motorized gyroscope – Study of gyroscopic efect and couple.
5. Governor - Determination of range sensitvity, efort etc., for Wats, Porter, Proel, and
Hartnel Governors.
6. Cams – Cam profile drawing, Motion curves and study of jump phenomenon
7. a) Single degre of redom Spring Mas System – Determination of natural
Frequency and verifcation of Laws of springs – Damping coeficient determination.
b) Multi degre fredom suspension system – Determination of influence coeficient.
8. a) Determination of torsional natural frequency of single and Double Rotor systems.- Undamped and Damped Natural frequencies.
b) Vibration Absorber – Tuned vibration absorber.
9. Vibration of Equivalent Spring mas system – undamped and damped vibration.
10. Whirling of shafts – Determination of critcal speds of shafts with concentrated loads.
1. a) Balancing of rotating mases. (b) Balancing of reciprocating mases.
12. a) Transverse vibration of Fre-Fre beam – with and without concentrated mases.
b) Forced Vibration of Cantilever beam – Mode shapes and natural frequencies.
c) Determination of transmisibilty ratio using vibrating table.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
Abilty to demonstrate the principles of kinematics and dynamics of machinery
Abilty to use the measuring devices for dynamic testing.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Cam folower setup. 1 No.
2 Motorised gyroscope. 1 No.
3 Governor aparatus - Wat, Porter, Proel and Hartnel governors. 1 No.
4 Whirling of shaft aparatus. 1 No.
5 Dynamic balancing machine. 1 No.
6 Two rotor vibration setup. 1 No.
7 Spring mas vibration system. 1 No.
8 Torsional Vibration of single rotor system setup. 1 No.
9 Gear Models 1 No.
10 Kinematic Models to study various mechanisms. 1 No.
1 Turn table aparatus. 1 No.
12 Transverse vibration setup of
a) cantilever
1 No.58
b) Fre-Fre beam
c) Simply suported beam.
ME6512 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY – I L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES
To study the heat ransfer phenomena predict he relevant coeficient using implementation
To study the performance of refrigeration cycle / components
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
HEAT TRANSFER LAB: 30
1. Thermal conductivity measurement using guarded plate aparatus.
2. Thermal conductivity measurement of pipe insulation using laged pipe aparatus.
3. Determination of heat ransfer coeficient under natural convection from a vertical cylinder.
4. Determination of heat ransfer coeficient under forced convection from a tube.
5. Determination of Thermal conductivity of composite wal.
6. Determination of Thermal conductivity of insulating powder.
7. Heat ransfer from pin-fin aparatus (natural & forced convection modes)
8. Determination of Stefan – Boltzman constant.
9. Determination of emisivity of a grey surface.
10. Efectivenes of Paralel /counter flow heat exchanger.
REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING LAB 15
1. Determination of COP of a refrigeration system
2. Experiments on Psychrometric proceses
3. Performance test on a reciprocating air compresor
4. Performance test in a HC Refrigeration System
5. Performance test in a fluidized Bed Coling Tower
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Abilty to demonstrate the fundamentals of heat and predict he coeficient used in that ransfer
aplication and also design refrigeration cycle.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Guarded plate aparatus 1 No.
2 Laged pipe aparatus 1 No.
3 Natural convection-vertical cylinder aparatus 1 No.
4 Forced convection inside tube aparatus 1 No.
5 Composite wal aparatus 1 No.
6 Thermal conductivity of insulating powder aparatus 1 No.
7 Pin-fin aparatus 1 No.
8 Stefan-Boltzman aparatus 1 No.
9 Emisivity measurement aparatus 1 No.
10 Paralel/counter flow heat exchanger aparatus 1 No.59
1 Single/two stage reciprocating air compresor 1 No.
12 Refrigeration test rig 1 No.
13 Air-conditoning test rig 1 No.
ME6513 METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES
To familar with diferent measurement equipments and use of this industry for quality
inspection
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tol Maker’s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Toth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Co ordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
1. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocolimator
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Abilty to handle diferent measurement ols and perform measurements in quality impulsion
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Micrometer 5
2 Vernier Caliper 5
3 Vernier Height Gauge 2
4 Vernier depth Gauge 2
5 Slip Gauge Set 1
6 Gear Toth Vernier 1
7 Sine Bar 1
8 Floating Cariage Micrometer 1
9 Profile Projector /Tol Makers Microscope 1
10 Paralel / counter flow heat exchanger aparatus 1
1 Mechanical /Electrical /Pneumatic Comparator 1
12 Autocolimator 1
13 Temperature Measuring Setup 1
14 Force Measuring Setup 1
15 Torque Measuring Setup 1
16 Cordinate measuring machine 160
17 Surface finish measuring equipment 1
18 Bore gauge 1
19 Telescope gauge 1
ME601 DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of Mechanical power
Transmision components. To understand the standard procedure available for Design of Transmision of Mechanical
elements
To learn to use standard data and catalogues
(Use of P S G Design Data Bok permited)
UNIT I DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS 9
Design of Flat belts and puleys - Selection of V belts and puleys – Selection of hoisting wire ropes
and puleys – Design of Transmision chains and Sprockets.
UNIT I SPUR GEARS AND PARALLEL AXIS HELICAL GEARS 9
Sped ratios and number of teth-Force analysis -Toth streses - Dynamic efects – Fatigue strength
- Factor of safety - Gear materials – Design of straight toth spur & helical gears based on strength
and wear considerations – Presure angle in the normal and transverse plane- Equivalent number of
teth-forces for helical gears.
UNIT I BEVEL, WORM AND CROSS HELICAL GEARS 9
Straight bevel gear: Toth terminology, toth forces and streses, equivalent number of teth.
Estimating the dimensions of pair of straight bevel gears. Worm Gear: Merits and demeritsterminology.
Thermal capacity, materials-forces and streses, eficiency, estimating the size of the
worm gear pair. Cros helical: Terminology-helix angles-Estimating the size of the pair of cros helical
gears.
UNIT IV GEAR BOXES 9
Geometric progresion - Standard step ratio - Ray diagram, kinematics layout -Design of sliding mesh
gear box - Design of multi sped gear box for machine tol aplications - Constant mesh gear box - Sped reducer unit. – Variable sped gear box, Fluid Couplings, Torque Converters for automotive
aplications.
UNIT V CAMS, CLUTCHES AND BRAKES 9
Cam Design: Types-presure angle and under cuting base circle determination-forces and surface
streses. Design of plate clutches –axial clutches-cone clutches-internal expanding rim clutches- Electromagnetic clutches. Band and Block brakes - external shoe brakes – Internal expanding shoe
brake.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to sucesfuly design transmision
components used in Engine and machines61
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Bok Co, 2010.
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbet “Mechanical
Enginering Design”, 8th Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 208.
REFERENCES:
1. Sundararajamorthy T. V, Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publications,
Chenai, 203.
2. Gitn Maitra, L. Prasad “Hand bok of Mechanical Design”, 2nd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil,
201.
3. Prabhu. T.J., “Design of Transmision Elements”, Mani Ofset, Chenai, 200.
4. C.S.Sharma, Kamlesh Purohit, “Design of Machine Elements”, Prentice Hal of India, Pvt. Ltd.,
203.
5. Bernard Hamrock, Steven Schmid, Bo Jacobson, “Fundamentals of Machine Elements”,
2nd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil Bok Co., 206.
6. Robert C. Juvinal and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Design”, 4
th Editon, Wiley,
205
7. Alfred Hal, Halowenko, A and Laughlin, H., “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hil
BokCo.(Schaum’s Outline), 2010
8. Orthwein W, “Machine Component Design”, Jaico Publishing Co, 203.
9. Ansel Ugural, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Aproach", 1st Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil
Bok Co, 203.
10. Merhyle F. Spots, Tery E. Shoup and Le E. Hornberger, “Design of Machine Elements”
8
th Editon, Printice Hal, 203.
1. U.C.Jindal :Machine Design, "Design of Transmision System", Dorling Kindersley, 2010
MG6851 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enable the students to study the evolution of Management, to study the functions and
principles of management and to learn the aplication of the principles in an organization .
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9
Definiton of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers - managerial roles and skils – Evolution of Management – Scientifc, human relations , system and
contingency aproaches – Types of Busines organization - Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and Environment – Curent
trends and isues in Management.
UNIT I PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planing – planing proces – types of planing – objectives – seting
objectives – policies – Planing premises – Strategic Management – Planing Tols and Techniques – Decision making steps and proces.
UNIT I ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization structure
– types – Line and staf authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority – centralization and
decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planing, Recruitment,62
selection, Training and Development, Performance Management ,Carer planing and management.
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – proces of communication – barier in communication – efective communication –
communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and proces of controling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control and
performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course, students wil be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planing, organizing, stafing, leading & controling and have same
basic knowledge on international aspect of management
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Stephen P. Robins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hal (India)Pvt. Ltd., 10th Editon,
209.
2. JAF Stoner, Freman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Editon, Pearson
Education, 204.
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen A. Robins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of Management”
7
th Editon, Pearson Education, 201.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, “ Management”, Biztantra, 208.
3. Harold Kontz & Heinz Weihrich, “Esentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hil, 198.
4. Tripathy PC & Redy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hil, 199
ME602 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the construction and working principle of various parts of an automobile. To have the practice for asembling and dismantling of engine parts and transmision system
UNIT I VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES 9
Types of automobiles, vehicle construction and diferent layouts, chasis, frame and
body, Vehicle aerodynamics (various resistances and moments involved), IC engines –componentsfunctions
and materials, variable valve timing (VVT).
UNIT I ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9
Electronicaly controled gasoline injection system for SI engines, Electronicaly
controled diesel injection system (Unit injector system, Rotary distributor type and
common rail direct injection system), Electronic igniton system (Transistorized coil igniton system,
capacitve discharge igniton system), Turbo chargers (WGT, VGT), Engine emision control by thre
way catalytic converter system, Emision norms (Euro and BS).63
UNIT I TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9
Clutch-types and construction, gear boxes- manual and automatic, gear shift mechanisms, Over drive,
transfer box, fluid flywhel, torque converter, propeler shaft, slip joints, universal joints ,Diferential
and rear axle, Hotchkis Drive and Torque Tube Drive.
UNIT IV STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 9
Stering geometry and types of stering gear box-Power Stering, Types of Front Axle,
Types of Suspension Systems, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Braking Systems, Antilock Braking System
(ABS), electronic brake force distribution (EBD) and Traction Control.
UNIT V ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Use of Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas, Bio-diesel, Bio-ethanol, Gasohol and
Hydrogen in Automobiles- Engine modifcations required –Performance, Combustion and Emision
Characteristics of SI and CI engines with these alternate fuels - Electric and Hybrid Vehicles, Fuel Cel
Note: Practical Training in dismantling and asembling of Engine parts and Transmision Systems
should be given to the students.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students wil be able to identify the diferent components in
automobile enginering. Have clear understanding on diferent auxilary and transmision systems usual.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Enginering”, Vol 1 & 2, Seventh Editon, Standard Publishers, New
Delhi, 197.
2. Jain K.K. and Asthana .R.B, “Automobile Enginering” Tata McGraw Hil Publishers, New
Delhi, 202.
REFERENCES:
1. Newton ,Steds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Buterworth Publishers,1989.
2. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics,” Second Editon, East-West Pres, 199.
3. Martin W, Stockel and Martin T Stockle , “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” The God
heart –Wil Cox Company Inc, USA ,1978.
4. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology,” SAE International Publications USA, 198.
5. Ganesan V. “Internal Combustion Engines”, Third Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 207.
ME603 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To introduce the concepts of Mathematical Modeling of Enginering Problems. To apreciate the use of FEM to a range of Enginering Problems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical Background – Mathematical Modeling of field problems in Enginering – Governing
Equations – Discrete and continuous models – Boundary, Inital and Eigen Value problems– Weighted
Residual Methods – Variational Formulation of Boundary Value Problems – RitzTechnique – Basic
concepts of the Finite Element Method.64
UNIT I ONE-DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 9
One Dimensional Second Order Equations – Discretization – Element types- Linear and Higher order
Elements – Derivation of Shape functions and Stifnes matrices and force vectors- Asembly of
Matrices - Solution of problems from solid mechanics and heat transfer. Longitudinal vibration
frequencies and mode shapes. Fourth Order Beam Equation –Transverse deflections and Natural
frequencies of beams.
UNIT I TWO DIMENSIONAL SCALAR VARIABLE PROBLEMS 9
Second Order 2D Equations involving Scalar Variable Functions – Variational formulation –Finite
Element formulation – Triangular elements – Shape functions and element matrices and vectors.
Aplication to Field Problems - Thermal problems – Torsion of Non circular shafts –Quadrilateral
elements – Higher Order Elements.
UNIT IV TWO DIMENSIONAL VECTOR VARIABLE PROBLEMS 9
Equations of elasticity – Plane stres, plane strain and axisymmetric problems – Body forces and
temperature efects – Stres calculations - Plate and shel elements.
UNIT V ISOPARAMETRIC FORMULATION 9
Natural co-ordinate systems – Isoparametric elements – Shape functions for iso parametric elements – One and two dimensions – Serendipity elements – Numerical integration and aplication to plane
stres problems - Matrix solution techniques – Solutions Techniques to Dynamic problems –
Introduction to Analysis Software.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to understand diferent mathematical
Techniques used in FEM analysis and use of them in Structural and thermal problem
TEXT BOOK:
1. Redy. J.N., “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil,
205
2. Seshu, P, “Text Bok of Finite Element Analysis”, Prentice-Hal of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
207.
REFERENCES:
1. Rao, S.S., “The Finite Element Method in Enginering”, 3rd Editon, Buterworth Heineman,
204
2. Logan, D.L., “A first course in Finite Element Method”, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., 202
3. Robert D. Cok, David S. Malkus, Michael E. Plesha, Robert J. Wit, “Concepts and
Aplications of Finite Element Analysis”, 4th Editon, Wiley Student Editon, 202.
4. Chandrupatla & Belagundu, “Introduction to Finite Elements in Enginering”, 3rd Editon,
Prentice Hal Colege Div, 190
5. Bhati Asghar M, "Fundamental Finite Element Analysis and Aplications", John Wiley & Sons,
205 (Indian Reprint 2013)*
ME604 GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the basic diference betwen incompresible and compresible flow.65
To understand the phenomenon of shock waves and its efect on flow. To gain some basic
knowledge about jet propulsion and Rocket Propulsion.
(Use of Standard Gas Tables permited)
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND ISENTROPIC FLOWS 6
Energy and momentum equations of compresible fluid flows – Stagnation states, Mach waves and
Mach cone – Efect of Mach number on compresibilty – Isentropic flow through variable ducts – Nozle and Difusers
UNIT I FLOW THROUGH DUCTS 9
Flows through constant area ducts with heat transfer (Rayleigh flow) and Friction (Fano flow) –
variation of low properties.
UNIT I NORMAL AND OBLIQUE SHOCKS 10
Governing equations – Variation of low parameters acros the normal and oblique shocks – Prandtl – Meyer relations – Aplications.
UNIT IV JET PROPULSION 10
Theory of jet propulsion – Thrust equation – Thrust power and propulsive eficiency – Operating
principle, cycle analysis and use of stagnation state performance of ram jet, turbojet, turbofan and
turbo prop engines.
UNIT V SPACE PROPULSION 10
Types of rocket engines – Propelants-feding systems – Igniton and combustion – Theory of rocket
propulsion – Performance study – Staging – Terminal and characteristic velocity – Aplications –
space flights.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to sucesfuly aply gas dynamics
principles in the Jet and Space Propulsion
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anderson, J.D., "Modern Compresible flow", 3
rd Editon, McGraw Hil, 203.
2. Yahya, S.M. "Fundamentals of Compresible Flow", New Age International (P) Limited, New
Delhi, 196.
REFERENCES:
1. Hil. P. and C. Peterson, "Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion", Adison – Wesley
Publishing company, 192.
2. Zucrow. N.J., "Aircraft and Misile Propulsion", Vol.1 & I, John Wiley, 1975.
3. Zucrow. N.J., "Principles of Jet Propulsion and Gas Turbines", John Wiley, New York, 1970.
4. Suton. G.P., "Rocket Propulsion Elements", John wiley, New York,1986,.
5. Shapiro. A.H.," Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compresible fluid Flow", John wiley, New
York, 1953. 6. Ganesan. V., "Gas Turbines", Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Co., New Delhi, 199.
7. Somasundaram. PR.S.L., "Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsions", New Age International
Publishers, 196.
8. Babu. V., "Fundamentals of Gas Dynamics", ANE Boks India, 208.
9. Cohen. H., G.E.C. Rogers and Saravanamuto, "Gas Turbine Theory", Longman Group Ltd.,
1980.6
ME61 CAD /CAM LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modeling software systems.
• To study the features of CNC Machine Tol.
• To expose students to modern control systems (Fanuc, Siemens etc.,)
• To know the aplication of various CNC machines like CNC lathe, CNC Vertical Machining
centre, CNC EDM and CNC wire-cut and studying of Rapid prototyping.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. 3D GEOMETRIC MODELLING 24 PERIODS
List of Experiments
1. Introduction of 3D Modeling software
Creation of 3D asembly model of folowing machine elements using 3D Modeling software
2. Flange Coupling
3. Plummer Block
4. Screw Jack
5. Lathe Tailstock
6. Universal Joint
7. Machine Vice
8. Stufing box
9. Croshead
10. Safety Valves
1. Non-return valves
12. Conecting rod
13. Piston
14. Crankshaft
* Students may also be trained in manual drawing of some of the above components
2. Manual Part Programming. 21 PERIODS
(i) Part Programming - CNC Machining Centre
a) Linear Cuting.
b) Circular cuting.
c) Cuter Radius Compensation.
d) Caned Cycle Operations.
(i) Part Programming - CNC Turning Centre
a) Straight, Taper and Radius Turning.
b) Thread Cuting.
c) Rough and Finish Turning Cycle.
d) Driling and Taping Cycle.
3. Computer Aided Part Programming
e) CL Data and Post proces generation using CAM packages.
f) Aplication of CAPP in Machining and Turning Centre.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS67
OUTCOMES
Abilty to develop 2D and 3D models using modeling softwares. Abilty to understand the CNC control in modern manufacturing system. Abilty to prepare CNC part programming and perform manufacturing.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. Description of Equipment Qty
HARDWARE
1. Computer Server 1
2. Computer nodes or systems (High end CPU with atleast 1
GB main memory) networked to the server 30
3. A3 size ploter 1
4. Laser Printer 1
5. CNC Lathe 1
6. CNC miling machine 1
SOFTWARE
7. Any High end integrated modeling and manufacturing CAD
/ CAM software 15 licenses
8. CAM Software for machining centre and turning centre
(CNC Programming and tol path simulation for FANUC /
Sinumeric and Heidenhain controler)
15 licenses
9. Licensed operating system Adequate
10. Suport for CAPP Adequate
ME612 DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROJECT L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES: The main objective is to give an oportunity to the student to get hands on training in the
fabrication of one or more components of a complete working model, which is designed by
them.
GUIDELINE FOR REVIEW AND EVALUATION
The students may be grouped into 2 to 4 and work under a project supervisor. The device/
system/component(s) to be fabricated may be decided in consultation with the supervisor and if
posible with an industry. A project report to be submited by the group and the fabricated model, which wil be reviewed and evaluated for internal asesment by a Commite constiuted by the
Head of the Department. At the end of the semester examination the project work is evaluated based
on oral presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal examiners constiuted by
the Head of the Department.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Use of design principles and develop conceptual and enginering design of any components. Abilty to fabricate any components using diferent manufacturing tols.68
GE6563 COMMUNICATION SKILLS – LABORATORY BASED L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES: To provide oportunites to learners to practice their communicative skils to make them
become proficient users of English. To enable learners to fine-tune their linguistic skils (LSRW) with the help of technology to
communicate globaly. To enhance the performance of learners at placement interviews and group discusions and
other recruitment procedures.
UNIT I LISTENING /VIEWING 10
Listening and note-taking – Listening to telephonic conversations – Ted talks – Inspirng Speches – Watching documentaries on personalites, places, socio-cultural events, TV news programmes and
discusions to answer diferent kinds questions, viz., identifying key idea and comprehension
questions… so on.
UNIT I SPEAKING 12
Conversation practice – Interview – Group Discusion – Introducing oneself and others – Role play – Debate – Presentation – Panel discusion – Neutral acent. UNIT I READING 10
Diferent genres of text (literature, media, technical) for comprehension – Reading strategies like note- making – reading graphs, charts and graphic organizer – Sequencing sentences – reading online
sources like e-boks, e-journals and e-newspapers.
UNIT IV WRITING 12
Blogs – Twets – Online resume/ – e-mails – SMS and Online texting – Report writng – Describing
charts and tables – Writng for media on curent events.
UNIT V VOCABULARY 8
Idioms and Phrases – Proverbs – Colocations – Chunks of language.
UNIT VI GRAMMAR 8
Sentence structures – Subject-Verb agrement – Pronoun-Antecedent agrement – Tense forms – Active and pasive voices – Direct and Indirect speches – Cohesive devices.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Teaching Methods:
1. To be totaly learner-centric with minimum teacher intervention as the course revolves around
practice.
2. Suitable audio/video samples from Podcast/YouTube to be used for ilustrative purposes.
3. Portfolio aproach for writng to be folowed. Learners are to be encouraged to blog, twet, text
and email employing apropriate language.
4. GD/Interview/Role Play/Debate could be conducted of the laboratory (in a regular clasrom)
but learners are to be exposed to telephonic interview and video conferencing.
5. Learners are to be asigned to read/write/listen/view materials outside the clasrom as wel
for graining proficiency and beter participation in the clas.
Lab Infrastructure:
S. No. Description of Equipment (minimum configuration) Qty Required
1 Server 1 No. PIV System
1 GB RAM /40 GB HDD69
OS: Win 200 server Audio card with headphones
JRE 1.3
2 Client Systems 60 Nos. PI System
256 or 512 MB RAM /40 GB HDD
OS: Win 200
Audio card with headphones
JRE 1.3
3 Handicam 1 No.
4 Television 46” 1 No.
5 Colar mike 1 No.
6 Cordles mike 1 No.
7 Audio Mixer 1 No.
8 DVD recorder/player 1 No.
9 LCD Projector with MP3/CD/DVD provision for
Audio/video facilty
1 No.
Evaluation:
Internal: 20 marks
Record maintenance: Students should write a report on a regular basis on the activites
conducted, focusing on the details such as the description of the activity, ideas emerged,
learning outcomes and so on. At the end of the semester records can be evaluated out of 20
marks.
External: 80 marks
Online Test - 35 marks
Interview - 15 marks
Presentation - 15 marks
Group Discusion - 15 marks
Note on Internal and External Evaluation:
1. Interview – mock interview can be conducted on one-on-one basis.
2. Speaking – example for role play:
a. Marketing enginer convincing a customer to buy his product.
b. Telephonic conversation- fixing an oficial apointment /placing an order /enquirng
and so on.
3. Presentation – should be extempore on simple topics
4. Discusion – topics of diferent kinds; general topics, case studies and abstract concept
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners should be able to
Take international examination such as IELTS and TOEFL
Make presentations and Participate in Group Discusions. Sucesfuly answer questions in interviews. REFERENCES:
1. Barker, A. “Improve Your Communication Skils”, New Delhi: Kogan Page India Pvt. Ltd.,
206.
2. Craven, Miles. “Listening Extra – A resource book of multi-level skils activities”, Cambridge University Pres, 204.70
3. Gammidge, Mick, “Speaking Extra - A resource book of multi-level skils activities”,
Cambridge University Pres, 204.
4. Hartley, Peter. “Group Communication”, London: Routledge, 204.
5. John Sely, “The Oxford Guide to Writing and Speaking” , New Delhi: Oxford University
Pres, 204.
6. Naterop, Jean & Rod Revel, “Telephoning in English”, Cambridge University Pres, 1987.
7. Ramesh, Gopalswamy and Mahadevan Ramesh, “The ACE of Soft Skils”. New Delhi:
Pearson, 2010.
Web Sources:
www.humanresources.about.com
www.careride.com
ME6701 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: Providing an overview of Power Plants and detailng the role of Mechanical Enginers in their
operation and maintenance.
UNIT I COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS 10
Rankine cycle - improvisations, Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critcal Boilers, FBC
Boilers, Turbines, Condensers, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal power plants – Fuel and
ash handling, Draught system, Fed water treatment. Binary Cycles and Cogeneration systems.
UNIT I DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANTS 10
Oto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle - Analysis & Optimisation. Components of Diesel and Gas Turbine
power plants. Combined Cycle Power Plants. Integrated Gasifer based Combined Cycle systems.
UNIT I NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS 7
Basics of Nuclear Enginering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of Nuclear
Reactors : Boilng Water Reactor (BWR), Presurized Water Reactor (PWR), CANada Deuterium- Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breder, Gas Coled and Liquid Metal Coled Reactors. Safety measures
for Nuclear Power plants.
UNIT IV POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY 10
Hydro Electric Power Plants – Clasifcation, Typical Layout and asociated components including
Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo Voltaic (SPV), Solar
Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cel power systems.
UNIT V ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF POWER PLANTS 8
Power tarif types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection criteria,
relative merits & demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of diferent power plants. Polution control
technologies including Waste Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power Plants.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to understand diferent types of power
plant, and its functions and their flow lines and isues related to them. Analyse and solve energy and economic related isues in power sectors.71
TEXT BOOK:
1. Nag. P.K., "Power Plant Enginering", Third Editon, Tata McGraw – Hil Publishing Company
Ltd., 208.
REFERENCES:
1. El-Wakil. M.M., "Power Plant Technology", Tata McGraw – Hil Publishing Company Ltd.,
2010.
2. Black & Veatch, Springer, "Power Plant Enginering", 196.
3. Thomas C. Eliot, Kao Chen and Robert C. Swanekamp, "Power Plant Enginering", Second
Editon, Standard Handbok of McGraw – Hil, 198.
4. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable energy", Open University, Oxford University Pres in asociation
with the Open University, 204.
ME6702 MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the elements and techniques involved in Mechatronics systems
which are very much esential to understand the emerging field of automation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12
Introduction to Mechatronics – Systems – Concepts of Mechatronics aproach – Ned for
Mechatronics – Emerging areas of Mechatronics – Clasifcation of Mechatronics. Sensors and
Transducers: Static and dynamic Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance
sensors – Strain gauges – Edy curent sensor – Hal efect sensor – Temperature sensors – Light
sensors
UNIT I 8085 MICROPROCESSOR AND 8051 MICROCONTROLLER 10
Introduction – Architecture of 8085 – Pin Configuration – Adresing Modes –Instruction set, Timing
diagram of 8085 – Concepts of 8051 microcontroler – Block diagram,.
UNIT I PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 8
Introduction – Architecture of 825, Keyboard interfacing, LED display –interfacing, ADC and DAC
interface, Temperature Control – Steper Motor Control – Trafic Control interface.
UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 7
Introduction – Basic structure – Input and output procesing – Programming – Mnemonics – Timers,
counters and internal relays – Data handling – Selection of PLC.
UNIT V ACTUATORS AND MECHATRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN 8
Types of Steper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle – Advantages and
Disadvantages. Design proces-stages of design proces – Traditonal and Mechatronics design
concepts – Case studies of Mechatronics systems – Pick and place Robot – Engine Management
system – Automatic car park barier.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to design mechatronics system with the
help of Microprocesor, PLC and other electrical and Electronics Circuits.72
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bolton, “Mechatronics”, Printice Hal, 208
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocesor Architecture, Programming, and Aplications with the
8085”, 5th Editon, Prentice Hal, 208.
REFERENCES:
1. Michael B.Histand and Davis G.Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hil International editon, 207.
2. Bradley D.A, Dawson D, Buru N.C and Loader A.J, “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hal, 193.
3. Smail.A and Mrad.F , “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Inteligent Machines”, Oxford
University Pres, 207.
4. Devadas Shety and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, PWS publishing
company, 207.
5. Krishna Kant, “Microprocesors & Microcontrolers”, Prentice Hal of India, 207.
6. Clarence W, de Silva, "Mechatronics" CRC Pres, First Indian Re-print, 2013
ME6703 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the aplication of computers in various aspects of Manufacturing viz., Design,
Proper planing, Manufacturing cost, Layout & Material Handling system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10
Brief introduction to CAD and CAM – Manufacturing Planing, Manufacturing control- Introduction to
CAD/CAM – Concurent Enginering-CIM concepts – Computerised elements of CIM system –Types
of production - Manufacturing models and Metrics – Mathematical models of Production Performance
– Simple problems – Manufacturing Control – Simple Problems – Basic Elements of an Automated
system – Levels of Automation – Lean Production and Just-In-Time Production.
UNIT I PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL AND COMPUTERISED
PROCESS PLANNING 10
Proces planing – Computer Aided Proces Planing (CAPP) – Logical steps in Computer Aided
Proces Planing – Agregate Production Planing and the Master Production Schedule – Material
Requirement planing – Capacity Planing- Control Systems-Shop Flor Control-Inventory Control – Brief on Manufacturing Resource Planing-I (MRP-I) & Enterprise Resource Planing (ERP) - Simple Problems.
UNIT I CELLULAR MANUFACTURING 9
Group Technology(GT), Part Familes – Parts Clasifcation and coding – Simple Problems in Opitz
Part Coding system – Production flow Analysis – Celular Manufacturing – Composite part concept – Machine cel design and layout – Quantiative analysis in Celular Manufacturing – Rank Order
Clustering Method - Aranging Machines in a GT cel – Holier Method – Simple Problems.73
UNIT IV FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM (FMS) AND AUTOMATED
GUIDED VEHICLE SYSTEM (AGVS) 8
Types of Flexibilty - FMS – FMS Components – FMS Aplication & Benefits – FMS Planing and
Control– Quantiative analysis in FMS – Simple Problems. Automated Guided Vehicle System
(AGVS) – AGVS Aplication – Vehicle Guidance technology – Vehicle Management & Safety.
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS 8
Robot Anatomy and Related Atributes – Clasifcation of Robots- Robot Control systems – End
Efectors – Sensors in Robotics – Robot Acuracy and Repeatabilty - Industrial Robot Aplications – Robot Part Programming – Robot Acuracy and Repeatabilty – Simple Problems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the student can able to understand the use of computers in
proces planing and use of FMS and Robotics in CIM
TEXT BOOK:
1. Mikel.P.Grover “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Prentice Hal of India, 208.
2. Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyan S.and Raju V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, 2nd Editon, New Age
International (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 200.
REFERENCES:
1. Kant Vajpaye S, “Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hal India,
203.
2. Gideon Halevi and Roland Weil, “Principles of Proces Planing – A Logical Aproach”
Chapman & Hal, London, 195.
3. Rao. P, N Tewari &T.K. Kundra, “Computer Aided Manufacturing”, Tata McGraw Hil
Publishing Company, 200.
GE6757 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To faciltate the understanding of Quality Management principles and proces.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Ned for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitons of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and
Crosby - Bariers to TQM - Quality statements - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer
satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention - Costs of quality.
UNIT I TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Leadership - Strategic quality planing, Quality Councils - Employe involvement - Motivation,
Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Quality circles Recogniton and Reward, Performance apraisal - Continuous proces improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Suplier partnership - Partnering,
Suplier selection, Suplier Rating.
UNIT I TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditonal tols of quality - New management tols - Six sigma: Concepts, Methodology,
aplications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason to bench mark,
Bench marking proces - FMEA - Stages, Types.74
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
Control Charts - Proces Capabilty - Concepts of Six Sigma - Quality Function Development (QFD) - Taguchi quality los function - TPM - Concepts, improvement neds - Performance measures.
UNIT V QUALITY SYSTEMS 9
Ned for ISO 900 - ISO 901-208 Quality System - Elements, Documentation, Quality Auditng - QS 900 - ISO 1400 - Concepts, Requirements and Benefits - TQM Implementation in
manufacturing and service sectors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The student would be able to aply the tols and techniques of quality management to
manufacturing and services proceses.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H. Besterfiled, et at., "Total quality Management", Third Editon, Pearson Education Asia,
Indian Reprint, 206. REFERENCES:
1. James R. Evans and Wiliam M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality", 8th
Editon, First Indian Editon, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hal (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
206.
3. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice Hal
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 206.
ME671 SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: To give exposure to software tols neded to analyze enginering problems. To expose the students to diferent aplications of simulation and analysis tols.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
A. SIMULATION
1. MATLAB basics, Dealing with matrices, Graphing-Functions of one variable and two variables
2. Use of Matlab to solve simple problems in vibration
3. Mechanism Simulation using Multibody Dynamic software
B. ANALYSIS
1. Force and Stres analysis using link elements in Truses, cables etc.
2. Stres and deflection analysis in beams with diferent suport conditons.
3. Stres analysis of lat plates and simple shels.
4. Stres analysis of axi – symmetric components.
5. Thermal stres and heat ransfer analysis of plates.
6. Thermal stres analysis of cylindrical shels.
7. Vibration analysis of spring-mas systems.
8. Model analysis of Beams.
9. Harmonic, transient and spectrum analysis of simple systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS75
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the Students can model, analyse and simulate experiments to
met real world system and evaluate the performance.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Computer Work Station 15
2 Color Desk Jet Printer 01
3 Multibody Dynamic Software Suitable for Mechanism
simulation and analysis
15 licenses
4 C /MATLAB 5 licenses
ME6712 MECHATRONICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 2
OBJECTIVES: • To know the method of programming the microprocesor and also the design, modeling &
analysis of basic electrical, hydraulic & pneumatic Systems which enable the students to
understand the concept of mechatronics.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Asembly language programming of 8085 – Aditon – Subtraction – Multiplication – Division – Sorting – Code Conversion.
2. Steper motor interface.
3. Trafic light interface.
4. Sped control of DC motor.
5. Study of various types of transducers.
6. Study of hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-pneumatic circuits.
7. Modeling and analysis of basic hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical circuits using Software.
8. Study of PLC and its aplications.
9. Study of image procesing technique.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to design mechatronics system with the
help of Microprocesor, PLC and other electrical and Electronics Circuits.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Sl.
No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Basic Pneumatic Trainer Kit with manual and electrical
controls/ PLC Control each
1 No.
2 Basic Hydraulic Trainer Kit 1 No
3 Hydraulics and Pneumatics Systems Simulation Software 10 No
4 8051 - Microcontroler kit with steper motor and drive
circuit sets
2 No
Image procesing system with hardware & software 1 No.76
ME6713 COMPREHENSION L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES: To encourage the students to comprehend the knowledge acquired from the first Semester to
Sixth Semester of B.E Degre Course through periodic exercise.
METHOD OF EVALUATION:
The students wil be asesed 10% internaly through wekly test with objective type questions
on al the subject related topics
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: abilty to understand and comprehend any given problem related to mechanical enginering
field.
MG6863 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enable students to understand the fundamental economic concepts aplicable to
enginering and to learn the techniques of incorporating inflation factor in economic decision
making.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 8
Introduction to Economics- Flow in an economy, Law of suply and demand, Concept of Enginering
Economics – Enginering eficiency, Economic eficiency, Scope of enginering economics - Element
of costs, Marginal cost, Marginal Revenue, Sunk cost, Oportunity cost, Break-even analysis - V ratio,
Elementary economic Analysis – Material selection for product Design selection for a product,
Proces planing.
UNIT I VALUE ENGINEERING 10
Make or buy decision, Value enginering – Function, aims, Value enginering procedure. Interest
formulae and their aplications –Time value of money, Single payment compound amount factor,
Single payment present worth factor, Equal payment series sinking fund factor, Equal payment series
payment Present worth factor- equal payment series capital recovery factor - Uniform gradient series
anual equivalent factor, Efective interest rate, Examples in al the methods.
UNIT I CASH FLOW 9
Methods of comparison of alternatives – present worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow
diagram), Future worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow
diagram), Anual equivalent method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash
flow diagram), rate of return method, Examples in al the methods.
UNIT IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9
Replacement and Maintenance analysis – Types of maintenance, types of replacement problem,
determination of economic life of an aset, Replacement of an aset with a new aset – capital
recovery with return and concept of chalenger and defender, Simple probabilstic model for items
which fail completely.7
UNIT V DEPRECIATION 9
Depreciation- Introduction, Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method of
depreciation-Sum of the years digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation/
Anuity method of depreciation, service output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public
alternatives- introduction, Examples, Inflation adjusted decisions – procedure to adjust inflation,
Examples on comparison of alternatives and determination of economic life of aset.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : Upon sucesful completion of this course, students wil acquire the skils to aply the basics
of economics and cost analysis to enginering and take economicaly sound decisions.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Paner Selvam, R, “Enginering Economics”, Prentice Hal of India Ltd, New Delhi, 201.
REFERENCES:
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Enginering Economics”, Prentice Hal of India, 201.
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavele, “Enginering Economics and analysis” Eng. Pres,
Texas, 2010.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sulivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Enginering Economy”, Macmilan, New
York, 201.
4. Zahid A khan: Enginering Economy, "Enginering Economy", Dorling Kindersley, 2012
ME681 PROJECT WORK L T P C
0 0 12 6
OBJECTIVES: To develop the abilty to solve a specifc problem right from its identifcation and literature
review til the sucesful solution of the same. To train the students in preparing project reports
and to face reviews and viva voce examination.
The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic aproved by the head of the department under the
guidance of a faculty member and prepares a comprehensive project report after completing the work
to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progres of the project is evaluated based on a minimum of
thre reviews. The review commite may be constiuted by the Head of the Department. A project
report is required at the end of the semester. The project work is evaluated based on oral
presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal examiners constiuted by the Head
of the Department.
TOTAL: 180 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: On Completion of the project work students wil be in a positon to take up any chalenging
practical problems and find solution by formulating proper methodology.78
MG6072 MARKETING MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enable students to deal with newer concepts of marketing concepts like strategic marketing
segmentation, pricing, advertisement and strategic formulation. The course wil enable a
student o take up marketing as a profesional carer.
UNIT I MARKETING PROCESS 9
Definiton, Marketing proces, dynamics, neds, wants and demands, marketing concepts,
environment, mix, types. Philosophies, seling versus marketing, organizations, industrial versus
consumer marketing, consumer gods, industrial gods, product hierarchy.
UNIT I BUYING BEHAVIOUR AND MARKET SEGMENTATION 9
Cultural, demographic factors, motives, types, buying decisions, segmentation factors - demographic - Psycho graphic and geographic segmentation, proces, paterns.
UNIT I PRODUCT PRICING AND MARKETING RESEARCH 9
Objectives, pricing, decisions and pricing methods, pricing management. Introduction, uses, proces
of marketing research.
UNIT IV MARKETING PLANNING AND STRATEGY FORMULATION 9
Components of marketing plan-strategy formulations and the marketing proces, implementations,
portfolio analysis, BCG, GEC grids.
UNIT V ADVERTISING, SALES PROMOTION AND DISTRIBUTION 9
Characteristics, impact, goals, types, and sales promotions - point of purchase - unique seling
propositon. Characteristics, wholesaling, retailng, chanel design, logistics, and modern trends in
retailng, Modern Trends, e-Marketing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : The learning skils of Marketing wil enhance the knowledge about Marketer’s Practices and
create insights on Advertising, Branding, Retailng and Marketing Research.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Philp Kolter & Keler, “Marketing Management”, Prentice Hal of India, 14th editon, 2012.
2. Chandrasekar. K.S., “Marketing Management Text and Cases”, 1
st Editon, Tata McGraw Hil – Vijaynicole, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Ramasamy and Nama kumari, “Marketing Environment: Planing, implementation and control
the Indian context”, 190.
2. Czinkota&Kotabe, “Marketing management”, Thomson learning, Indian editon 207
3. Adrain palmer, “ Introduction to marketing theory and practice”, Oxford university pres IE
204.
4. Donald S. Tul and Hawkins, “Marketing Reasearch”, Prentice Hal of Inida-197.
5. Philp Kotler and Gary Armstrong “Principles of Marketing” Prentice Hal of India, 200.
6. Steven J.Skiner, “Marketing”, Al India Publishers and Distributes Ltd. 198.
7. Graeme Drummond and John Ensor, "Introduction to marketing concepts", Elsevier, Indian
Reprint, 207.79
ME601 QUALITY CONTROL AND RELIABILITY ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To introduce the concept of SQC
To understand proces control and aceptance sampling procedure and their aplication. To learn the concept of reliabilty.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR VARIABLES 10
Introduction, definiton of quality, basic concept of quality, definiton of SQC, benefits and limitation of
SQC, Quality asurance, Quality control: Quality cost-Variation in proces causes of variation –Theory
of control chart- uses of control chart – Control chart for variables – X chart, R chart and chart - proces capabilty – proces capabilty studies and simple problems. Six sigma concepts
UNIT I PROCESS CONTROL FOR ATTRIBUTES 8
Control chart for atributes –control chart for non conformings– p chart and np chart – control chart for
nonconformites– C and U charts, State of control and proces out of control identifcation in charts,
patern study.
UNIT I ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING 9
Lot by lot sampling – types – probabilty of aceptance in single, double, multiple sampling techniques – O.C. curves – producer’s Risk and consumer’s Risk. AQL, LTPD, AOQL concepts-standard
sampling plans for AQL and LTPD- uses of standard sampling plans.
UNIT IV LIFE TESTING – RELIABILITY 9
Life testing – Objective – failure data analysis, Mean failure rate, mean time to failure, mean time
betwen failure, hazard rate – Weibul model, system reliabilty, series, paralel and mixed
configuration – simple problems. Maintainabilty and availabilty – simple problems. Aceptance
sampling based on reliabilty test – O.C Curves.
UNIT V QUALITY AND RELIABLITY 9
Reliabilty improvements – techniques- use of Pareto analysis – design for reliabilty – redundancy unit
and standby redundancy – Optimization in reliabilty – Product design – Product analysis – Product
development – Product life cycles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: Use of aproved statistical table permited in the examination.
OUTCOMES: • Upon sucesful completion of this course, the students can able to aply the concept of SQC
in proces control for reliable component production
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Douglas.C. Montgomery, “ Introduction to Statistical quality control”, 4th editon, John Wiley
201.
2. Srinath. L.S., “Reliabilty Enginering”, Afilated East west pres, 191.
REFERENCES:
1. John.S. Oakland. "Statistical proces control”, 5th editon, Elsevier, 205
2. Conor, P.D.T.O., “Practical Reliabilty Enginering”, John Wiley, 193
3. Grant, Eugene .L “Statistical Quality Control”, McGraw-Hil, 196
4. Monohar Mahajan, “Statistical Quality Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 201.
5. Gupta. R.C, “Statistical Quality control”, Khana Publishers, 197.
6. Besterfield D.H., “Quality Control”, Prentice Hal, 193.
7. Sharma S.C., “Inspection Quality Control and Reliabilty”, Khana Publishers, 198.
8. Dany Samson, “Manufacturing & Operations Strategy”, Prentice Hal, 19180
ME602 REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the underlying principles of operations in diferent Refrigeration & Air
conditoning systems and components. To provide knowledge on design aspects of Refrigeration & Air conditoning systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 5
Introduction to Refrigeration - Unit of Refrigeration and C.O.P.– Ideal cycles- Refrigerants Desirable
properties – Clasifcation - Nomenclature - ODP & GWP.
UNIT I VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 10
Vapor compresion cycle : p-h and T-s diagrams - deviations from theoretical cycle – subcoling and
super heating- efects of condenser and evaporator presure on COP- multipresure system - low
temperature refrigeration - Cascade systems – problems. Equipments: Type of Compresors,
Condensers, Expansion devices, Evaporators.
UNIT I OTHER REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 8
Working principles of Vapour absorption systems and adsorption coling systems – Steam jet
refrigeration- Ejector refrigeration systems- Thermoelectric refrigeration- Air refrigeration - Magnetic - Vortex and Pulse tube refrigeration systems.
UNIT IV PSYCHROMETRIC PROPERTIES AND PROCESSES 10
Properties of moist Air-Gibs Dalton law, Specifc humidity, Dew point temperature, Degre of
saturation, Relative humidity, Enthalpy, Humid specifc heat, Wet bulb temperature Thermodynamic
wet bulb temperature, Psychrometric chart; Psychrometric of air-conditoning proceses, mixing of air
streams.
UNIT V AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS AND LOAD ESTIMATION 12
Air conditoning loads: Outside and inside design conditons; Heat transfer through structure, Solar
radiation, Electrical apliances, Infiltration and ventilation, internal heat load; Aparatus selection;
fresh air load, human comfort & IAQ principles, efective temperature & chart, calculation of summer &
winter air conditoning load; Clasifcations, Layout of plants; Air distribution system; Filters; Air
Conditoning Systems with Controls: Temperature, Presure and Humidity sensors, Actuators &
Safety controls.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to demonstrate the operations in
diferent Refrigeration & Air conditoning systems and also able to design Refrigeration & Air
conditoning systems .
TEXT BOOK:
1. Arora, C.P., "Refrigeration and Air Conditoning", 3
rd editon, McGraw Hil, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Roy J. Dosat, "Principles of Refrigeration", 4
th editon, Pearson Education Asia, 209.
2. Stoecker, W.F. and Jones J. W., "Refrigeration and Air Conditoning", McGraw Hil, New Delhi,
1986.
3. ASHRAE Hand bok, Fundamentals, 2010
4. Jones W.P., "Air conditoning enginering", 5
th editon,Elsevier Buterworth-Heineman, 20181
ME603 RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: At the end of the course, the students are expected to identify the new methodologies /
technologies for efective utilzation of renewable energy sources.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
World Energy Use – Reserves of Energy Resources – Environmental Aspects of Energy Utilsation – Renewable Energy Scenario in Tamil nadu, India and around the World – Potentials - Achievements /
Aplications – Economics of renewable energy systems.
UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY 9
Solar Radiation – Measurements of Solar Radiation - Flat Plate and Concentrating Colectors – Solar
direct Thermal Aplications – Solar thermal Power Generation - Fundamentals of Solar Photo Voltaic
Conversion – Solar Cels – Solar PV Power Generation – Solar PV Aplications.
UNIT I WIND ENERGY 9
Wind Data and Energy Estimation – Types of Wind Energy Systems – Performance – Site Selection – Details of Wind Turbine Generator – Safety and Environmental Aspects
UNIT IV BIO - ENERGY 9
Biomas direct combustion – Biomas gasifers – Biogas plants – Digesters – Ethanol production – Bio diesel – Cogeneration - Biomas Aplications
UNIT V OTHER RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Tidal energy – Wave Energy – Open and Closed OTEC Cycles – Smal Hydro-Geothermal Energy – Hydrogen and Storage - Fuel Cel Systems – Hybrid Systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to identify the new methodologies /
technologies for efective utilzation of renewable energy sources.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rai. G.D., "Non Conventional Energy Sources", Khana Publishers, New Delhi, 201.
2. Twidel, J.W. & Weir, A., "Renewable Energy Sources", EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 206.
REFERENCES:
1. Sukhatme. S.P., "Solar Energy", Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 197.
2. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future", Oxford University Pres,
U.K., 196.
3. Tiwari. G.N., Solar Energy – "Fundamentals Design, Modeling & Aplications", Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi, 202.
4. Freris. L.L., "Wind Energy Conversion Systems", Prentice Hal, UK, 190.
5. Johnson Gary, L. "Wind Energy Systems", Prentice Hal, New York, 1985
6. David M. Mousdale – "Introduction to Biofuels", CRC Pres, Taylor & Francis Group, USA
2010
7. Chetan Singh Solanki, Solar Photovoltaics, "Fundamentals, Technologies and Aplications", PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 209.82
ME604 UNCONVENTIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To learn about various unconventional machining proceses, the various proces parameters
and their influence on performance and their aplications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Unconventional machining Proces – Ned – clasifcation – Brief overview .
UNIT I MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9
Abrasive Jet Machining – Water Jet Machining – Abrasive Water Jet Machining - Ultrasonic
Machining.(AJM, WJM, AWJM and USM). Working Principles – equipment used – Proces
parameters – MRR- Aplications.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9
Electric Discharge Machining (EDM)- working Principle-equipments-Proces Parameters-Surface
Finish and MRR- electrode / Tol – Power and control Circuits-Tol Wear – Dielectric – Flushing – Wire cut EDM – Aplications.
UNIT IV CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO-CHEMICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 1
Chemical machining and Electro-Chemical machining (CHM and ECM)-Etchants – Maskant -
techniques of aplying maskants - Proces Parameters – Surface finish and MRR-Aplications.
Principles of ECM- equipments-Surface Roughnes and MRR Electrical circuit-Proces Parameters- ECG and ECH - Aplications.
UNIT V THERMAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 10
Laser Beam machining and driling (LBM), plasma Arc machining (PAM) and Electron Beam
Machining (EBM). Principles – Equipment –Types - Beam control techniques – Aplications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to demonstrate diferent unconventional
machining proceses and know the influence of diference proces parameters on the
performance and their aplications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vijay.K. Jain “Advanced Machining Proceses” Alied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 207
2. Pandey P.C. and Shan H.S. “Modern Machining Proceses” Tata McGraw-Hil, New Delhi,
207. REFERENCES:
1. Benedict. G.F. “Nontraditonal Manufacturing Proceses”, Marcel Deker Inc., New York,
1987. 2. Mc Geough, “Advanced Methods of Machining”, Chapman and Hal, London, 198. 3. Paul De Garmo, J.T.Black, and Ronald.A.Kohser, “Material and Proceses in Manufacturing”
Prentice Hal of India Pvt. Ltd., 8thEditon, New Delhi ,201.83
ME605 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To introduce the proces planing concepts to make cost estimation for various products after
proces planing
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS PLANNING 10
Introduction- methods of proces planing-Drawing interpretation-Material evaluation – steps in
proces selection-.Production equipment and toling selection
UNIT I PROCESS PLANNING ACTIVITIES 10
Proces parameters calculation for various production proceses-Selection jigs and fixtures election
of quality asurance methods - Set of documents for proces planing-Economics of proces
planing- case studies
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 8
Importance of costing and estimation –methods of costing-elements of cost estimation –Types of
estimates – Estimating procedure- Estimation labor cost, material cost- alocation of over head
charges- Calculation of depreciation cost
UNIT IV PRODUCTION COST ESTIMATION 8
Estimation of Diferent Types of Jobs - Estimation of Forging Shop, Estimation of Welding Shop,
Estimation of Foundry Shop
UNIT V MACHINING TIME CALCULATION 9
Estimation of Machining Time - Importance of Machine Time Calculation- Calculation of Machining
Time for Diferent Lathe Operations ,Driling and Boring - Machining Time Calculation for Miling,
Shaping and Planing -Machining Time Calculation for Grinding
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to use the concepts of proces planing
and cost estimation for various products.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter scalon, “Proces planing, Design/Manufacture Interface”, Elsevier science technology
Boks, Dec 202.
REFERENCES:
1. Ostwalal P.F. and Munez J., “Manufacturing Proceses and systems”, 9
th Editon, John Wiley,
198.
2. Rusel R.S and Tailor B.W, “Operations Management”, 4th Editon, PHI, 203.
3. Chitale A.V. and Gupta R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, 2nd Editon, PHI, 202.
ME606 DESIGN OF JIGS, FIXTURES AND PRESS TOOLS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the functions and design principles of Jigs, fixtures and pres tols
To gain proficiency in the development of required views of the final design.84
UNIT I LOCATING AND CLAMPING PRINCIPLES: 8
Objectives of tol design- Function and advantages of Jigs and fixtures – Basic elements – principles
of location – Locating methods and devices – Redundant Location – Principles of clamping – Mechanical actuation – pneumatic and hydraulic actuation Standard parts – Dril bushes and Jig
butons – Tolerances and materials used.
UNIT I JIGS AND FIXTURES 10
Design and development of jigs and fixtures for given component- Types of Jigs – Post, Turnover,
Chanel, latch, box, pot, angular post jigs – Indexing jigs – General principles of miling, Lathe, boring,
broaching and grinding fixtures – Asembly, Inspection and Welding fixtures – Modular fixturing
systems- Quick change fixtures.
UNIT I PRESS WORKING TERMINOLOGIES AND ELEMENTS OF CUTTING DIES 10
Pres Working Terminologies - operations – Types of preses – pres acesories – Computation of
pres capacity – Strip layout – Material Utilzation – Shearing action – Clearances – Pres Work
Materials – Center of presure- Design of various elements of dies – Die Block – Punch holder, Die
set, guide plates – Stops – Stripers – Pilots – Selection of Standard parts – Design and preparation
of our standard views of simple blanking, piercing, compound and progresive dies.
UNIT IV BENDING AND DRAWING DIES 10
Diference betwen bending and drawing – Blank development for above operations – Types of
Bending dies – Pres capacity – Spring back – knockouts – direct and indirect – presure pads – Ejectors – Variables afecting Metal flow in drawing operations – draw die inserts – draw beadsironing
– Design and development of bending, forming, drawing, reverse redrawing and combination
dies – Blank development for axisymmetric, rectangular and eliptic parts – Single and double action
dies.
UNIT V OTHER FORMING TECHNIQUES 7
Bulging, Swaging, Embosing, coining, curling, hole flanging, shaving and sizing, asembly, fine
Blanking dies – recent trends in tol design- computer Aids for shet metal forming Analysis – basic
introduction - toling for numericaly controled machines- setup reduction for work holding – Single
minute exchange of dies – Poka Yoke.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: (Use of P S G Design Data Bok is permited in the University examination)
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to design jigs, fixtures and pres tols.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joshi, P.H. “Jigs and Fixtures”, Second Editon, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Co., Ltd., New
Delhi, 204.
2. Joshi P.H “Pres tols - Design and Construction”, whels publishing, 196
REFERENCES:
1. Venkataraman. K., “Design of Jigs Fixtures & Pres Tols”, Tata McGraw Hil, New Delhi,
205.
2. Donaldson, Lecain and Gold “Tol Design”, 3rd Editon, Tata McGraw Hil, 200.
3. Kempster, “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Third Editon, Hodes and Stoughton, 1974.
4. Hofman “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Thomson Delmar Learning, Singapore, 204.
5. ASTME Fundamentals of Tol Design Prentice Hal of India.
6. Design Data Hand Bok, PSG Colege of Technology, Coimbatore.85
ME607 COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND MECHANICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the fundamentals of composite material strength and its mechanical behavior
Understanding the analysis of iber reinforced Laminate design for diferent combinations of plies with diferent orientations of the fiber. Thermo-mechanical behavior and study of residual streses in Laminates during procesing.
Implementation of Clasical Laminate Theory (CLT) to study and analysis for residual streses
in an isotropic layered structure such as electronic chips.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION, LAMINA CONSTITUTIVE EQUATIONS & MANUFACTURING 12
Definiton –Ned – General Characteristics, Aplications. Fibers – Glas, Carbon, Ceramic and
Aramid fibers. Matrices – Polymer, Graphite, Ceramic and Metal Matrices – Characteristics of fibers
and matrices. Lamina Constiutive Equations: Lamina Asumptions – Macroscopic Viewpoint.
Generalized Hoke’s Law. Reduction to Homogeneous Orthotropic Lamina – Isotropic limit case,
Orthotropic Stifnes matrix (Qij), Typical Commercial material properties, Rule of Mixtures. Generaly
Orthotropic Lamina –Transformation Matrix, Transformed Stifnes. Manufacturing: Bag Moulding
Compresion Moulding – Pultrusion – Filament Winding – Other Manufacturing Proceses
UNIT I FLAT PLATE LAMINATE CONSTITUTE EQUATIONS 10
Definiton of stres and Moment Resultants. Strain Displacement relations. Basic Asumptions of
Laminated anisotropic plates. Laminate Constiutive Equations – Coupling Interactions, Balanced
Laminates, Symmetric Laminates, Angle Ply Laminates, Cros Ply Laminates. Laminate Structural
Moduli. Evaluation of Lamina Properties from Laminate Tests. Quasi-Isotropic Laminates.
Determination of Lamina streses within Laminates. UNIT I LAMINA STRENGTH ANALYSIS 5
Introduction - Maximum Stres and Strain Criteria. Von-Mises Yield criterion for Isotropic Materials.
Generalized Hil’s Criterion for Anisotropic materials. Tsai-Hil’s Failure Criterion for Composites.
Tensor Polynomial (Tsai-Wu) Failure criterion. Prediction of laminate Failure
UNIT IV THERMAL ANALYSIS 8
Asumption of Constant C.T.E’s. Modifcation of Hoke’s Law. Modifcation of Laminate Constiutive
Equations. Orthotropic Lamina C.T.E’s. C.T.E’s for special Laminate Configurations – Unidirectional,
Of-axis, Symmetric Balanced Laminates, Zero C.T.E laminates, Thermaly Quasi-Isotropic Laminates
UNIT V ANALYSIS OF LAMINATED FLAT PLATES 10
Equilbrium Equations of Motion. Energy Formulations. Static Bending Analysis. Buckling Analysis.
Fre Vibrations – Natural Frequencies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyse the fiber reinforced Laminate
for optimum design
Aply clasical aminate theory to study and analyse the residual streses in Laminate. TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gibson, R.F., "Principles of Composite Material Mechanics", Second Editon, McGraw-Hil,
CRC pres in progres, 194, -. 2. Hyer, M.W., “Stres Analysis of Fiber – Reinforced Composite Materials”, McGraw Hil, 19886
REFERENCES:
1. Isac M. Daniel and Ori Ishai, “Enginering Mechanics of Composite Materials”, Oxford
University Pres-206, First Indian Editon - 207
2. Malick, P.K., Fiber, ”Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing and Design”, Manel
Deker Inc, 193.
3. Halpin, J.C., “Primer on Composite Materials, Analysis”, Technomic Publishing Co., 1984.
4. Agarwal, B.D., and Broutman L.J., “Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites”, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 190.
5. Malick, P.K. and Newman, S., (editon), “Composite Materials Technology: Proceses and
Properties”, Hansen Publisher, Munish, 190.
ME608 WELDING TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To understand the basics of welding and to know about the various types of welding
proceses
UNIT I GAS AND ARC WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Fundamental principles – Air Acetylene welding, Oxyacetylene welding, Carbon arc welding, Shielded
metal arc welding, Submerged arc welding, TIG & MIG welding, Plasma arc welding and Electroslag
welding proceses - advantages, limitations and aplications.
UNIT I RESISTANCE WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Spot welding, Seam welding, Projection welding, Resistance But welding, Flash But welding,
Percusion welding and High frequency resistance welding proceses - advantages, limitations and
aplications.
UNIT I SOLID STATE WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Cold welding, Difusion bonding, Explosive welding, Ultrasonic welding, Friction welding, Forge
welding, Rol welding and Hot presure welding proceses - advantages, limitations and aplications.
UNIT IV OTHER WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Thermit welding, Atomic hydrogen welding, Electron beam welding, Laser Beam welding, Friction stir
welding, Under Water welding, Welding automation in aerospace, nuclear and surface transport
vehicles.
UNIT V DESIGN OF WELD JOINTS, WELDABILITY AND TESTING OF WELDMENTS 9
Various weld joint designs – Weldabilty of Aluminium, Coper, and Stainles stels. Destructive and
non destructive testing of weldments.
TOTAL : 45 HOURS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to compare diferent types of Welding
proces for efective Welding of Structural components.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Parmer R.S., “Welding Enginering and Technology”, 1
st editon, Khana Publishers, New
Delhi, 208.
2. Parmer R.S., “Welding Proceses and Technology”, Khana Publishers, New Delhi, 192.87
3. Litle R.L., “Welding and welding Technology”, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Co., Ltd., New
Delhi, 34th reprint, 208.
REFERENCES:
1. Schwartz M.M. “Metals Joining Manual”. McGraw Hil Boks, 1979.
2. Tylecote R.F. “The Solid Phase Welding of Metals”. Edward Arnold Publishers Ltd. London,
1968.
3. AWS- Welding Hand Bok. 8th Editon. Vol- 2. “Welding Proces”
4. Nadkarni S.V. “Modern Arc Welding Technology”, 1st editon, Oxford IBH Publishers, 205.
5. Christopher Davis. “Laser Welding- Practical Guide”. Jaico Publishing House, 194. 6. Davis A.C., “The Science and Practice of Welding”, Cambridge University Pres, Cambridge,
193
ME609 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
At he end of the course, the student is expected to
understand and analyse the energy data of industries
caryout energy acounting and balancing
conduct energy audit and sugest methodologies for energy savings and
utilse the available resources in optimal ways
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data – Environmental aspects asociated with energy utilzation –Energy Auditng: Ned, Types,
Methodology and Bariers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy auditng.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12
Components of EB biling – HT and LT suply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of Capacitors,
Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Eficiency Computation, Energy
Eficient Motors, Ilumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Eficacy, LED Lighting and scope of
Encon in Ilumination.
UNIT I THERMAL SYSTEMS 12
Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Eficiency computation and encon
measures. Steam: Distribution &U sage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash Steam
Utilzation, Insulators & Refractories
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MAJOR UTILITIES 8
Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compresed Air Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditoning Systems – Coling Towers – D.G. sets
UNIT V ECONOMICS 5
Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal Rate of Return, Net Present Value, Life
Cycle Costing –ESCO concept
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyse the energy data of industries. Can caryout energy acounting and balancing8
Can sugest methodologies for energy savings
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at www.energymanager training.com,
a website administered by Bureau of Energy Eficiency (BEE), a statutory body under Ministry
of Power, Government of India, 204.
REFERENCES:
1. Wite. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and Utilsation”
Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 198.
2. Calaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon Pres, Oxford,
1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Eficient Use of Energy” Buterworths, London, 1982
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand bok”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Buterworths, London 1987.
ME6010 ROBOTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the functions of the basic components of a Robot. To study the use of various types of End of Efectors and Sensors
To impart knowledge in Robot Kinematics and Programming
To learn Robot safety isues and economics.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 6
Robot - Definiton - Robot Anatomy - Co ordinate Systems, Work Envelope Types and Clasifcation- Specifcations-Pitch, Yaw, Rol, Joint Notations, Sped of Motion, Pay Load- Robot Parts and their
Functions-Ned for Robots-Diferent Aplications.
UNIT I ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9
Pneumatic Drives-Hydraulic Drives-Mechanical Drives-Electrical Drives-D.C. Servo Motors, Steper
Motors, A.C. Servo Motors-Salient Features, Aplications and Comparison of al these Drives, End
Efectors-Gripers-Mechanical Gripers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic- Gripers, Magnetic Gripers,
Vacum Gripers; Two Fingered and Thre Fingered Gripers; Internal Gripers and External
Gripers; Selection and Design Considerations.
UNIT I SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION 12
Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Aplications of the folowing types of sensors- Positon
sensors - Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers, Optical Encoders, pneumatic Positon Sensors,
Range Sensors Triangulations Principles, Structured, Lighting Aproach, Time of Flight, Range
Finders, Laser Range Meters, Touch Sensors ,binary Sensors., Analog Sensors, Wrist Sensors,
Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors, Camera, Frame Graber, Sensing and Digitzing Image Data- Signal Conversion, Image Storage, Lighting Techniques, Image Procesing and Analysis-Data
Reduction, Segmentation, Feature Extraction, Object Recogniton, Other Algorithms, AplicationsInspection,
Identifcation, Visual Serving and Navigation.
UNIT IV ROBOT KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING 13
Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Diference; Forward Kinematics and Reverse Kinematics
of manipulators with Two, Thre Degres of Fredom (in 2 Dimension), Four Degres of fredom (in
3 Dimension) Jacobians, Velocity and Forces-Manipulator Dynamics, Trajectory Generator,89
Manipulator Mechanism Design-Derivations and problems. Lead through Programming, Robot
programming Languages-VAL Programming-Motion Commands, Sensor Commands, End Efector
commands and simple Programs.
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION AND ROBOT ECONOMICS 5
RGV, AGV; Implementation of Robots in Industries-Various Steps; Safety Considerations for Robot
Operations - Economic Analysis of Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the basic enginering
knowledge for the design of robotics
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Klafter R.D., Chmielewski T.A and Negin M., “Robotic Enginering - An Integrated Aproach”,
Prentice Hal, 203.
2. Grover M.P., “Industrial Robotics -Technology Programming and Aplications”, McGraw Hil,
201.
REFERENCES:
1. Craig J.J., “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education, 208.
2. Deb S.R., “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation” Tata McGraw Hil Bok Co., 194.
3. Koren Y., “Robotics for Enginers", Mc Graw Hil Bok Co., 192.
4. Fu.K.S.,Gonzalz R.C. and Le C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Inteligence”,
McGraw Hil Bok Co., 1987.
5. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Procesing”, Tata McGraw Hil, 195.
6. Rajput R.K., “Robotics and Industrial Automation”, S.Chand and Company, 208.
7. Surender Kumar, “Industrial Robots and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Oxford and IBH
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 191.
GE6081 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and aplication
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Enginering- Clasifcations of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-ultra-thinfilms- multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and efect on properties: Mechanical, Electronic,
Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to properties and motivation for study
(qualitative only).
UNIT I GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9
Botom-up Synthesis-Top-down Aproach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical Miling,
Coloidal routes, Self-asembly, Vapour phase depositon, MOCVD, Sputering, Evaporation,
Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
UNIT I NANOMATERIALS 12
Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fulerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wal carbon
Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wal carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of synthesis(arc-growth,90
laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property Relationships aplications- Nanometal
oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, nanoalumina, CaO, AgTiO2, Ferites, Nanoclaysfunctionalization
and aplications-Quantum wires, Quantum dots-preparation, properties and
aplications
UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
X-ray difraction technique, Scaning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques, Transmision
Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques- AFM, SPM,
STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
NanoInfoTech: Information storage- nanocomputer, molecular switch, super chip, nanocrystal,
Nanobiotechlogy: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano medicines, Targeted
drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), Nano Electro Mechanical
Systems (NEMS)- Nanosensors, nano crystaline silver for bacterial inhibiton, Nanoparticles for
sunbarier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cel, batery
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Wil familarize about he science of nanomaterials
Wil demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
Wil develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial
TEXT BOOKS
1. Edelstein. A.S. and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
Aplications”, Instiute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 196.
2. John Dinardo. N, “Nanoscale charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd editon, Weinheim
Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 200
REFERENCES
1. Timp .G, “Nanotechnology”, AIP pres/Springer, 199.
2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia (Editor),“The Hand Bok of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure,
Theory, Modeling and Simulations”. Prentice-Hal of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 207.
ME601 THERMAL TURBO MACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the various systems, principles, operations and aplications of diferent ypes of
turbo machinery components.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES 9
Energy transfer betwen fluid and rotor-clasifcation of fluid machinery,-dimensionles parameters- specifc sped-aplications-stage velocity triangles-work and eficiency.
UNIT I CENTRIFUGAL FANS AND BLOWERS 9
Types- stage and design parameters-flow analysis in impeler blades-volute and difusers, loses,
characteristic curves and selection, fan drives and fan noise.91
UNIT I CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR 9
Construction details, impeler flow loses, slip factor, difuser analysis, loses and performance
curves.
UNIT IV AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSOR 9
Stage velocity diagrams, enthalpy-entropy diagrams, stage loses and eficiency, work done simple
stage design problems and performance characteristics.
UNIT V AXIAL AND RADIAL FLOW TURBINES 9
Stage velocity diagrams, reaction stages, loses and coeficients, blade design principles, testing and
performance characteristics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to explain the various systems, principles and aplications and diferent ypes of turbo machinery components.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Yahya, S.H., Turbines, Compresor and Fans, Tata McGraw Hil Publishing Company, 196.
REFERENCES:
1. Bruneck, Fans, Pergamom Pres, 1973.
2. Earl Logan, Jr., Hand bok of Turbomachinery, Marcel Deker Inc., 192.
3. Dixon, S.I, "Fluid Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Turbomachinery", Pergamon Pres,
190.
4. Shepherd, D.G., "Principles of Turbomachinery", Macmilan, 1969.
5. Ganesan, V., "Gas Turbines", Tata McGraw Hil Pub. Co., 199.
6. Gopalakrishnan .G and Prithvi Raj .D, "A Treatise on Turbo machines", Scifech Publications
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 202.
ME6012 MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To enable the student to understand the principles, functions and practices adapted in industry for
the sucesful management of maintenance activites. To explain the diferent maintenance categories like Preventive maintenance, conditon monitoring
and repair of machine elements. To ilustrate some of the simple instruments used for conditon monitoring in industry.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MAINTENANCE PLANNING 9
Basic Principles of maintenance planing – Objectives and principles of planed maintenance activity – Importance and benefits of sound Maintenance systems – Reliabilty and machine availabilty – MTBF, MTTR and MWT – Factors of availabilty – Maintenance organization – Maintenance
economics.
UNIT I MAINTENANCE POLICIES – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 992
Maintenance categories – Comparative merits of each category – Preventive maintenance,
maintenance schedules, repair cycle - Principles and methods of lubrication – TPM.
UNIT I CONDITION MONITORING 9
Conditon Monitoring – Cost comparison with and without CM – On-load testing and ofload testing – Methods and instruments for CM – Temperature sensitve tapes – Pistol thermometers – wear-debris
analysis
UNIT IV REPAIR METHODS FOR BASIC MACHINE ELEMENTS 10
Repair methods for beds, slide ways, spindles, gears, lead screws and bearings – Failure analysis – Failures and their development – Logical fault location methods – Sequential fault location.
UNIT V REPAIR METHODS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT 8
Repair methods for Material handling equipment - Equipment records –Job order systems -Use of
computers in maintenance.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the programme, the students can able to implement the maintenance
function and diferent practices in industries for the sucesful management of maintenance
activites
To identify the diferent maintenance categories like Preventive maintenance, conditon
monitoring and repair of machine elements.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Srivastava S.K., “Industrial Maintenance Management”, S. Chand and Co., 1981
2. Venkataraman .K “Maintancence Enginering and Management”, PHI Learning, Pvt. Ltd.,
207
REFERENCES:
1. Bhatacharya S.N., “Instalation, Servicing and Maintenance”, S. Chand and Co., 195
2. White E.N., “Maintenance Planing”, IDocumentation, Gower Pres, 1979.
2. Garg M.R., “Industrial Maintenance”, S. Chand & Co., 1986.
3. Higins L.R., “Maintenance Enginering Hand bok”, 5th Editon, McGraw Hil, 198.
4. Armstrong, “Conditon Monitoring”, BSIRSA, 198.
5. Davies, “Handbok of Conditon Monitoring”, Chapman & Hal, 196.
6. “Advances in Plant Enginering and Management”, Seminar Procedings - IPE, 196.
EE607 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To provide knowledge of semiconductors and solid mechanics to fabricate MEMS devices. To educate on the rudiments of Micro fabrication techniques. To introduce various sensors and actuators
To introduce diferent materials used for MEMS
To educate on the aplications of MEMS to disciplines beyond Electrical and Mechanical
enginering.93
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS – Energy Domains and Transducers- Sensors and Actuators –
Introduction to Micro fabrication - Silcon based MEMS proceses – New Materials – Review of
Electrical and Mechanical concepts in MEMS – Semiconductor devices – Stres and strain analysis – Flexural beam bending- Torsional deflection.
UNIT I SENSORS AND ACTUATORS-I 9
Electrostatic sensors – Paralel plate capacitors – Aplications – Interdigitated Finger capacitor – Comb drive devices – Micro Gripers – Micro Motors - Thermal Sensing and Actuation – Thermal
expansion – Thermal couples – Thermal resistors – Thermal Bimorph - Aplications – Magnetic
Actuators – Micromagnetic components – Case studies of MEMS in magnetic actuators- Actuation
using Shape Memory Aloys
UNIT I SENSORS AND ACTUATORS-I 9
Piezoresistive sensors – Piezoresistive sensor materials - Stres analysis of mechanical elements – Aplications to Inertia, Presure, Tactile and Flow sensors – Piezoelectric sensors and actuators –
piezoelectric efects – piezoelectric materials – Aplications to Inertia , Acoustic, Tactile and Flow
sensors.
UNIT IV MICROMACHINING 9
Silcon Anisotropic Etching – Anisotrophic Wet Etching – Dry Etching of Silcon – Plasma Etching – Dep Reaction Ion Etching (DRIE) – Isotropic Wet Etching – Gas Phase Etchants – Case studies - Basic surface micro machining proceses – Structural and Sacrifcial Materials – Aceleration of
sacrifcial Etch – Striction and Antistriction methods – LIGA Proces - Asembly of 3D MEMS – Foundry proces.
UNIT V POLYMER AND OPTICAL MEMS 9
Polymers in MEMS– Polimide - SU-8 - Liquid Crystal Polymer (LCP) – PDMS – PMMA – Parylene – Fluorocarbon - Aplication to Aceleration, Presure, Flow and Tactile sensors- Optical MEMS –
Lenses and Mirors – Actuators for Active Optical MEMS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Abilty to understand and aply basic science, circuit theory, Electro-magnetic field theory
control theory and aply them to electrical enginering problems. Abilty to understand and analyse, linear and digital electronic circuits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chang Liu, "Foundations of MEMS", Pearson Education Inc., 206.
2. Stephen D Senturia, "Microsystem Design", Springer Publication, 200.
3. Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture” Tata McGraw Hil, New
Delhi, 202.
REFERENCES:
1. Nadim Maluf,“ An Introduction to Micro Electro Mechanical System Design”, Artech House,
200.
2. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “ The MEMS Handbok”, CRC pres Baco Raton, 200
3. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan, Osama O. Awadelkarim, "Micro Sensors MEMS and
Smart Devices", John Wiley & Son LTD,202
4. James J.Alen, "Micro Electro Mechanical System Design", CRC Pres Publisher, 2010
5. Thomas M.Adams and Richard A.Layton, “Introduction MEMS, Fabrication and Aplication,”
Springer 2012.94
IE605 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the various components and functions of production planing and control such
as work study, product planing, proces planing, production scheduling, Inventory Control. To know the recent trends like manufacturing requirement Planing (MRP I) and Enterprise
Resource Planing (ERP).
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Objectives and benefits of planing and control-Functions of production control-Types of productionjob-
batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect - Functional aspects- Operational aspect-Durabilty and dependabilty aspect aesthetic aspect. Profit consideration- Standardization, Simplifcation & specialization- Break even analysis-Economics of a new design.
UNIT I WORK STUDY 9
Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of proces - Critcal analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement - Techniques of work
measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard data - Predetermined motion time standards.
UNIT I PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9
Product planing-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack of
product planing-Proces planing and routing-Pre requisite information neded for proces planing- Steps in proces planing-Quantiy determination in batch production-Machine capacity, balancing- Analysis of proces capabilties in a multi product system.
UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9
Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Gant
charts-Perpetual oading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance – Flow production scheduling- Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing – Production Control systems-Periodic batch
control-Material requirement planing kanban – Dispatching-Progres reporting and expeditng- Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.
UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9
Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Efect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures. Two
bin system -Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantiy and economic lot size- ABC analysis-Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production planing systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP I and ERP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to prepare production planing and
control activites such as work study, product planing, production scheduling, Inventory
Control. They can plan manufacturing requirements manufacturing requirement Planing (MRP I) and
Enterprise Resource Planing (ERP).
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Enginering and Production Management”, First editon, S.
Chand and Company, 200.
2. James.B.Dilworth,”Operations management – Design, Planing and Control for manufacturing
and services” Mcgraw Hil International editon 192.
REFERENCES:95
1. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planing and Control”, Universal Bok Corpn.1984
2. Elwod S.Bufa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, 8th
Editon, John Wiley and Sons, 200.
3. Kanishka Bedi, “ Production and Operations management”, 2
nd Editon, Oxford university
pres, 207.
4. Melynk, Denzler, “ Operations management – A value driven aproach” Irwin Mcgraw hil.
5. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management”, 9th editon, Thomson learning IE,
207
6. Jain. K.C & L.N. Agarwal, “Production Planing Control and Industrial Management”, Khana
Publishers, 190.
7. Chary. S.N. “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata McGraw
Hil, 195.
8. Upendra Kachru, “Production and Operations Management – Text and cases”, 1st Editon, Excel boks 207.
MG6071 ENTERPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To develop and strengthen entrepreneurial quality and motivation in students and to impart
basic entrepreneurial skils and understanding to run a busines eficiently and efectively.
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Entrepreneur – Types of Entrepreneurs – Diference betwen Entrepreneur and Intrapreneur
Entrepreneurship in Economic Growth, Factors Afecting Entrepreneurial Growth.
UNIT I MOTIVATION 9
Major Motives Influencing an Entrepreneur – Achievement Motivation Training, Self Rating, Busines
Games, Thematic Aperception Test – Stres Management, Entrepreneurship Development
Programs – Ned, Objectives.
UNIT I BUSINESS 9
Smal Enterprises – Definiton, Clasifcation – Characteristics, Ownership Structures – Project
Formulation – Steps involved in seting up a Busines – identifying, selecting a God Busines
oportunity, Market Survey and Research, Techno Economic Feasibilty Asesment – Preparation of
Preliminary Project Reports – Project Apraisal – Sources of Information – Clasifcation of Neds
and Agencies.
UNIT IV FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING 9
Ned – Sources of Finance, Term Loans, Capital Structure, Financial Instiution, Management of
working Capital, Costing, Break Even Analysis, Taxation – Income Tax, Excise Duty – Sales Tax.
UNIT V SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS 9
Sicknes in smal Busines – Concept, Magnitude, Causes and Consequences, Corective Measures
- Busines Incubators – Government Policy for Smal Scale Enterprises – Growth Strategies in smal
industry – Expansion, Diversifcation, Joint Venture, Merger and Sub Contracting.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : Upon completion of the course, students wil be able to gain knowledge and skils neded to
run a busines sucesfuly.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Khanka. S.S., “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd., Ram Nagar, New Delhi,
2013.96
2. Donald F Kuratko, “Entreprenuership – Theory, Proces and Practice”, 9
th Editon, Cengage
Learning, 2014.
REFERENCES :
1. Hisrich R D, Peters M P, “Entrepreneurship” 8th Editon, Tata McGraw-Hil, 2013.
2. Mathew J Manimala, "Enterprenuership theory at cros roads: paradigms and praxis” 2
nd
Editon Dream tech, 205.
3. Rajev Roy, "Entrepreneurship" 2
nd Editon, Oxford University Pres, 201.
4. EDI “Faulty and External Experts – A Hand Bok for New Entrepreneurs Publishers:
Entrepreneurship Development”, Instiute of India, Ahmadabad, 1986.
ME6013 DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSELS AND PIPING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the Mathematical knowledge to design presure vesels and piping
To understand the abilty to cary of stres analysis in presure vesels and piping
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 3
Methods for determining streses – Terminology and Ligament Eficiency – Aplications.
UNIT I STRESSES IN PRESSURE VESSELS 15
Introduction – Streses in a circular ring, cylinder –Dilation of presure vesels, Membrane stres
Analysis of Vesel – Cylindrical, spherical and, conical heads – Thermal Streses – Discontinuity
streses in presure vesels.
UNIT I DESIGN OF VESSELS 15
Design of Tal cylindrical self suporting proces columns – Suports for short vertical vesels – Stres concentration at a variable Thicknes transiton section in a cylindrical vesel, about a circular
hole, eliptical openings. Theory of Reinforcement – Presure Vesel Design.
UNIT IV BUCKLING AND FRACTURE ANALYSIS IN VESSELS 8
Buckling phenomenon – Elastic Buckling of circular ring and cylinders under external presure –
colapse of thick waled cylinders or tubes under external presure – Efect of suports on Elastic
Buckling of Cylinders – Buckling under combined External presure and axial oading.
UNIT V PIPING 4
Introduction – Flow diagram – piping layout and piping stres Analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the mathematical fundamental
for the design of presure vesels and pipes. Further they can able to analyse and design of
presure vesels and piping.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John F. Harvey, "Theory and Design of Presure Vesels", CBS Publishers and
Distributors,1987.
REFERENCES:97
1. Henry H. Bedner, “Presure Vesels, Design Hand Bok", CBS publishers and Distributors,
1987.
2. Stanley, M. Wales, “Chemical proces equipment, selection and Design". Buterworths series
in Chemical Enginering, 198.
3. Wiliam. J., Bes, “Aproximate Methods in the Design and Analysis of Presure Vesels and
Piping”, Pre ASME Presure Vesels and Piping Conference, 197.
4. Sam Kanapan, “Introduction to Pipe Stres Analysis”. John Wiley and Sons, 1985.
ME6014 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To introduce Governing Equations of viscous fluid flows
To introduce numerical modeling and its role in the field of luid flow and heat ransfer To enable the students to understand the various discretization methods, solution procedures
and turbulence modeling. To create confidence to solve complex problems in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer by
using high sped computers.
UNIT I GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 8
Basics of computational fluid dynamics – Governing equations of fluid dynamics – Continuity,
Momentum and Energy equations – Chemical species transport – Physical boundary conditons – Time-averaged equations for Turbulent Flow – Turbulent–Kinetic Energy Equations – Mathematical
behaviour of PDEs on CFD - Eliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations.
UNIT I FINITE DIFFERENCE AND FINITE VOLUME METHODS FOR DIFFUSION 9
Derivation of finite diference equations – Simple Methods – General Methods for first and second
order acuracy – Finite volume formulation for steady state One, Two and Thre -dimensional
difusion problems –Parabolic equations – Explicit and Implicit schemes – Example problems on
eliptic and parabolic equations – Use of Finite Diference and Finite Volume methods.
UNIT I FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION DIFFUSION 10
Steady one-dimensional convection and difusion – Central, upwind diferencing schemes properties
of discretization schemes – Conservativenes, Boundednes, Transportivenes, Hybrid, Power-law,
QUICK Schemes.
UNIT IV FLOW FIELD ANALYSIS 9
Finite volume methods -Representation of the presure gradient term and continuity equation – Stagered grid – Momentum equations – Presure and Velocity corections – Presure Corection
equation, SIMPLE algorithm and its variants – PISO Algorithms.
UNIT V TURBULENCE MODELS AND MESH GENERATION 9
Turbulence models, mixing length model, Two equation (k-Є) models – High and low Reynolds
number models – Structured Grid generation – Unstructured Grid generation – Mesh refinement – Adaptive mesh – Software tols.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS98
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able
To create numerical modeling and its role in the field of luid flow and heat ransfer To use the various discretization methods, solution procedures and turbulence modeling to
solve flow and heat ransfer problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Versteg, H.K., and Malalasekera, W., "An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The
finite volume Method", Pearson Education Ltd.Second Editon, 207.
2. Ghoshdastidar, P.S., "Computer Simulation of flow and heat transfer", Tata McGraw Hil
Publishing Company Ltd., 198.
REFERENCES:
1. Patankar, S.V. "Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow", Hemisphere Publishing Corporation,
204.
2. Chung, T.J. "Computational Fluid Dynamics", Cambridge University, Pres, 202.
3. Ghoshdastidar P.S., "Heat Transfer", Oxford University Pres, 205
4. Muralidhar, K., and Sundararajan, T., "Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer", Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi, 195.
5. ProdipNiyogi, Chakrabarty, S.K., Laha, M.K. "Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics", Pearson Education, 205.
6. Anil W. Date "Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics" Cambridge University Pres,
205.
ME6015 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To provide knowledge and training in using optimization techniques under limited resources for
the enginering and busines problems.
UNIT I LINEAR MODELS 15
The phase of an operation research study – Linear programming – Graphical method– Simplex
algorithm – Duality formulation – Sensitvity analysis.
UNIT I TRANSPORTATION MODELS AND NETWORK MODELS 8
Transportation Asignment Models –Traveling Salesman problem-Networks models – Shortest route
– Minimal spaning tre – Maximum flow models –Project network – CPM and PERT networks – Critcal path scheduling – Sequencing models.
UNIT I INVENTORY MODELS 6
Inventory models – Economic order quantiy models – Quantiy discount models – Stochastic
inventory models – Multi product models – Inventory control models in practice.
UNIT IV QUEUEING MODELS 6
Queueing models - Queueing systems and structures – Notation parameter – Single server and multi
server models – Poison input – Exponential service – Constant rate service – Infinite population – Simulation.
UNIT V DECISION MODELS 109
Decision models – Game theory – Two person zero sum games – Graphical solution- Algebraic
solution– Linear Programming solution – Replacement models – Models based on service life – Economic life– Single /Multi variable search technique – Dynamic Programming – Simple Problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to use the optimization techniques for
use enginering and Busines problems
TEXT BOOK:
1. Taha H.A., “Operations Research”, Sixth Editon, Prentice Hal of India, 203.
REFERENCES:
1. Shenoy G.V. and Srivastava U.K., “Operation Research for Management”, Wiley Eastern,
194.
2. Bazara M.J., Jarvis and Sherali H., “Linear Programming and Network Flows”, John Wiley,
190.
3. Philp D.T. and Ravindran A., “Operations Research”, John Wiley, 192.
4. Hilier and Libeberman, “Operations Research”, Holden Day, 1986
5. Budnick F.S., “Principles of Operations Research for Management”, Richard D Irwin, 190.
6. Tulsian and Pasdey V., “Quantiative Techniques”, Pearson Asia, 202.
ME6016 ADVANCED I.C ENGINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To understand the underlying principles of operation of diferent IC Engines and components. To provide knowledge on polutant formation, control, alternate fuel etc. UNIT I SPARK IGNITION ENGINES 9
Mixture requirements – Fuel injection systems – Monopoint, Multipoint & Direct injection - Stages of
combustion – Normal and Abnormal combustion – Knock - Factors afecting knock – Combustion
chambers.
UNIT I COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES 9
Diesel Fuel Injection Systems - Stages of combustion – Knocking – Factors afecting knock – Direct
and Indirect injection systems – Combustion chambers – Fuel Spray behaviour – Spray structure and
spray penetration – Air motion - Introduction to Turbocharging.
UNIT I POLLUTANT FORMATION AND CONTROL 9
Polutant – Sources – Formation of Carbon Monoxide, Unburnt hydrocarbon, Oxides of Nitrogen, Smoke and Particulate mater – Methods of controling Emisions – Catalytic converters, Selective
Catalytic Reduction and Particulate Traps – Methods of measurement – Emision norms and Driving
cycles.
UNIT IV ALTERNATIVE FUELS 9
Alcohol, Hydrogen, Compresed Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas and Bio Diesel - Properties,
Suitabilty, Merits and Demerits - Engine Modifcations.10
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9
Air asisted Combustion, Homogeneous charge compresion igniton engines – Variable Geometry
turbochargers – Common Rail Direct Injection Systems - Hybrid Electric Vehicles – NOx Adsorbers - Onboard Diagnostics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to compare the operations of diferent
IC Engine and components and can evaluate the polutant formation, control, alternate fuel
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ramalingam. K.K., "Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals", Scitech Publications, 202.
2. Ganesan, "Internal Combustion Engines", I Editon, TMH, 202.
REFERENCES:
1. Mathur. R.B. and R.P. Sharma, "Internal Combustion Engines"., Dhanpat Rai & Sons 207.
2. Dufy Smith, "Auto Fuel Systems", The God Heart Wilcox Company, Inc., 1987.
3. Eric Chowenitz, "Automobile Electronics", SAE Publications, 195
ME6017 DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To learn the thermal and stres analysis on various parts of the heat exchangers
To analyze the sizing and rating of the heat exchangers for various aplications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Types of heat exchangers, shel and tube heat exchangers – regenerators and recuperators - Temperature distribution and its implications - Parts description, Clasifcation as per Tubular
Exchanger Manufacturers Asociation (TEMA)
UNIT I PROCESS DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS 9
Heat transfer corelations, Overal heat transfer coeficient, analysis of heat exchangers – LMTD and
efectivenes method. Sizing of ined tube heat exchangers, U tube heat exchangers, Design of shel
and tube heat exchangers, fouling factors, presure drop calculations.
UNIT I STRESS ANALYSIS 9
Stres in tubes – header shets and presure vesels – thermal streses, shear streses - types of
failures, buckling of tubes, flow induced vibration.
UNIT IV COMPACT AND PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER 9
Types- Merits and Demerits- Design of compact heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers,
performance influencing parameters, limitations.
UNIT V CONDENSERS AND COOLING TOWERS 9
Design of surface and evaporative condensers – coling tower – performance characteristics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: • Upon completion of this course, the students can able to aply the mathematical knowledge
for thermal and stres analysis on various parts of the heat exchangers components.101
TEXT BOOKS:
1. SadikKakac and Hongtan Liu, "Heat Exchangers Selection", Rating and Thermal Design, CRC
Pres, 202.
2. Shah,R. K., Dušan P. Sekulić, "Fundamentals of heat exchanger design", John Wiley & Sons,
203.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert W. Serth, "Proces heat transfer principles and aplications", Academic pres,
Elesevier, 207.
2. Sarit Kumar Das, "Proces heat ransfer", Alpha Science International, 205
3. John E. Heselgreaves, "Compact heat exchangers: selection, design, and operation", Elsevier science Ltd, 201.
4. Kupan. T., "Heat exchanger design hand bok", New York :Marcel Deker, 200.
5. Eric M. Smith, "Advances in thermal design of heat exchangers: a numerical aproach: direct- sizing, step-wise rating, and transients", John Wiley & Sons, 199.
ME6018 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To know the principle methods, areas of usage, posibilties and limitations as wel as
environmental efects of the Aditve Manufacturing technologies
To be familar with the characteristics of the diferent materials those are used in Aditve
Manufacturing.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10
Overview – History - Ned-Clasifcation -Aditve Manufacturing Technology in product development- Materials for Aditve Manufacturing Technology – Toling - Aplications.
UNIT I CAD & REVERSE ENGINEERING 10
Basic Concept – Digitzation techniques – Model Reconstruction – Data Procesing for Aditve
Manufacturing Technology: CAD model preparation – Part Orientation and suport generation – Model Slicing –Tol path Generation – Softwares for Aditve Manufacturing Technology: MIMICS,
MAGICS.
UNIT I LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 10
Clasifcation – Liquid based system – Stereolithography Aparatus (SLA)- Principle, proces,
advantages and aplications - Solid based system –Fused Depositon Modeling - Principle, proces,
advantages and aplications, Laminated Object Manufacturing
UNIT IV POWDER BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 10
Selective Laser Sintering – Principles of SLS proces - Proces, advantages and aplications, Thre
Dimensional Printing - Principle, proces, advantages and aplications- Laser Enginered Net
Shaping (LENS), Electron Beam Melting.
UNIT V MEDICAL AND BIO-ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 5
Customized implants and prosthesis: Design and production. Bio-Aditve Manufacturing- Computer
Aided Tisue Enginering (CATE) – Case studies102
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to compare diferent method and
discus the efects of the Aditve Manufacturing technologies and analyse the characteristics
of the diferent materials in Aditve Manufacturing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and aplications”, Third
Editon, World Scientifc Publishers, 2010.
2. Gebhardt A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 203.
REFERENCES:
1. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Enginering aplications : A tol box for
prototype development”, CRC Pres, 207.
2. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 206.
3. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., “Rapid Toling: Technologies and Industrial Aplications”, CRC
pres, 200.
ME6019 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING AND MATERIALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To study and understand the various Non Destructive Evaluation and Testing methods, theory
and their industrial aplications.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF NDT 7
NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Overview of the Non Destructive Testing Methods for the detection of
manufacturing defects as wel as material characterisation. Relative merits and limitations, Various
physical characteristics of materials and their aplications in NDT., Visual inspection – Unaided and
aided.
UNIT I SURFACE NDE METHODS 8
Liquid Penetrant Testing - Principles, types and properties of liquid penetrants, developers,
advantages and limitations of various methods, Testing Procedure, Interpretation of results. Magnetic
Particle Testing- Theory of magnetism, inspection materials Magnetisation methods, Interpretation
and evaluation of test indications, Principles and methods of demagnetization, Residual magnetism.
UNIT I THERMOGRAPHY AND EDDY CURRENT TESTING (ET) 10
Thermography- Principles, Contact and non contact inspection methods, Techniques for aplying
liquid crystals, Advantages and limitation - infrared radiation and infrared detectors, Instrumentations
and methods, aplications.Edy Curent Testing-Generation of edy curents, Properties of edy
curents, Edy curent sensing elements, Probes, Instrumentation, Types of arangement, Aplications, advantages, Limitations, Interpretation/Evaluation.
UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING (UT) AND ACOUSTIC EMISSION (AE) 10
Ultrasonic Testing-Principle, Transducers, transmision and pulse-echo method, straight beam and
angle beam, instrumentation, data representation, A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Phased Aray Ultrasound,
Time of Flight Difraction. Acoustic Emision Technique –Principle, AE parameters, Aplications
UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY (RT) 10103
Principle, interaction of X-Ray with mater, imaging, film and film les techniques, types and use of
filters and screns, geometric factors, Inverse square, law, characteristics of films - grainines,
density, sped, contrast, characteristic curves, Penetrameters, Exposure charts, Radiographic
equivalence. Fluoroscopy- Xero-Radiography, Computed Radiography, Computed Tomography
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students can able to use the various Non Destructive
Testing and Testing methods understand for defects and characterization of industrial
components
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T.Jayakumar, M.Thavasimuthu “Practical Non-Destructive Testing”, Narosa
Publishing House, 209.
2. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised editon, New Age
International Publishers, 2010
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbok,”Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, American Society of
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 20, Volume-17.
2. Paul E Mix, “Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide”, Wiley, 2nd Editon New
Jersey, 205
3. Charles, J. Helier,“ Handbok of Nondestructive evaluation”, McGraw Hil, New York 201.
4. ASNT, American Society for Non Destructive Testing, Columbus, Ohio, NDT Handbok,Vol. 1,
Leak Testing, Vol. 2, Liquid Penetrant Testing, Vol. 3, Infrared and Thermal Testing Vol. 4,
Radiographic Testing, Vol. 5, Electromagnetic Testing, Vol. 6, Acoustic Emision Testing, Vol.
7, Ultrasonic Testing
ME6020 VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: The student wil be able to understand the sources of vibration and noise in automobiles and
make design modifcations to reduce the vibration and noise and improve the life of the
components
UNIT I BASICS OF VIBRATION 9
Introduction, clasifcation of vibration: fre and forced vibration, undamped and damped vibration,
linear and non linear vibration, response of damped and undamped systems under harmonic force,
analysis of single degre and two degre of fredom systems, torsional vibration, determination of
natural frequencies.
UNIT I BASICS OF NOISE 9
Introduction, amplitude, frequency, wavelength and sound presure level, aditon, subtraction and
averaging decibel levels, noise dose level, legislation, measurement and analysis of noise,
measurement environment, equipment, frequency analysis, tracking analysis, sound quality analysis.
UNIT I AUTOMOTIVE NOISE SOURCES 9
Noise Characteristics of engines, engine overal noise levels, asesment of combustion noise,
asesment of mechanical noise, engine radiated noise, intake and exhaust noise, engine necesary
contributed noise, transmision noise, aerodynamic noise, tire noise, brake noise.104
UNIT IV CONTROL TECHNIQUES 9
Vibration isolation, tuned absorbers, un-tuned viscous dampers, damping treatments, aplication
dynamic forces generated by IC engines, engine isolation, crank shaft damping, modal analysis of the
mas elastic model shock absorbers.
UNIT V SOURCE OF NOISE AND CONTROL 9
Methods for control of engine noise, combustion noise, mechanical noise, predictive analysis,
paliative treatments and enclosures, automotive noise control principles, sound in enclosures, sound
energy absorption, sound transmision through bariers
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS105
OUTCOMES: Understanding causes, source and types of vibrations in machineries
Gaining knowledge in sources and measurement standard of noise
Abilty to design and develop vibrations and noise control systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Singiresu S.Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations”, 5th Editon, Pearson Education, 2010
REFERENCES:
1. Benson H. Tongue, “Principles of Vibrations”, 2nd Editon, Oxford University, 207
2. David Bies and Colin Hansen, “Enginering Noise Control – Theory and Practice”,4th Editon,
E and FN Spon, Taylore & Francise e-Library, 209
3. Wiliam T. Thomson, Marie Dilon Dahleh, Chandramouli Padmanabhan, “Theory of
Vibration with Application”, 5
th Editon Pearson Education, 201
4. Grover. G.T., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Nem Chand and Bros., 196
5. Bernard Chalen and Rodica Baranescu - “Diesel Engine Reference Bok”, Second Editon,
SAE International, 199.
6. Julian Hapian-Smith - “An Introduction to Modern Vehicle Design”- Buterworth-Heineman,
204
7. Rao, J.S and Gupta, K., “Introductory course on Theory and Practice of Mechanical
Vibration”, 2nd Editon, New Age International Publications, 2010
8. Shabana. A.A., “Theory of vibrations – An introduction”, 2nd Editon, Springer, 2010
9. Balakumar Balachandran and Edward B. Magrab, “Fundamentals of Vibrations”, 1st Editon,
Cengage Learning, 209
10. John Fenton, “Handbok of Automotive body Construction and Design Analysis – Profesional
Enginering Publishing, 198
0 comments:
Pen down your valuable important comments below